B71495AF Instructions For Use DXC 700 AU

Instructions for Use
BECKMAN COULTER DxC 700 AU
For In Vitro Diagnostic Use
B71495AF
April 2021
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
250 S. Kraemer Blvd.
Brea, CA 92821 U.S.A.
Instructions for Use
PN B71495AF (April 2021)
© 2021 Beckman Coulter, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks
Beckman Coulter, the stylized logo, and the Beckman Coulter product and service marks mentioned herein
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Beckman Coulter, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Find us on the World Wide Web at:

www.beckmancoulter.com
EC REP
Beckman Coulter Ireland Inc.
Lismeehan, O’Callaghan’s Mills,
Co. Clare, Ireland
Phone: +353-65-683-1100
FAX: +353-65-683-1122
Rx Only
Original Instructions
Quick Start
1 Revision History
— View the Revision History
2 Training and Education Resources

Go to the Beckman Coulter Training & Education website (https://
www.beckmancoulter.com/wsrportal/wsr/support/training-education/index.htm) to
find the following items:
— eLearning Training Modules:
Engaging interactive training provides an overview of the system software,
hardware components, ISE, and reaction process.
— Job Aid Booklets and Additional Job Aids:
Easy to use instructions and flow charts for frequently asked questions.
— Training Competency Checklists:
To ensure that trainees in your lab are proficient in basic system operations.
3 How to Use the Software

— Software Overview
— System Help and Videos
4 Related manuals:
— Related Manuals
5 Printable Manuals
— Download a copy from the web: https://www.beckmancoulter.com/wsrportal/
page/techdocSearch.
— Order a hard copy: Contact Beckman Coulter Customer Support at 1-800-526-3821
from the United States and Canada, or your local Beckman Coulter Representative.
6 IFU Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

How do I find the following items?
List of Flags:
IFU - Flags
Screen Navigation and Software Overview:

IFU System Overview - Software Overview
Startup Procedures:
B71495AF iii
Quick Start
IFU, Daily Startup
Rebooting the System:

IFU, System Monitoring and Results - System Shutdown (End Process)
Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance and ISE Maintenance:

IFU, Maintenance - Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance and Parts List for ISE
Maintenance
Analyzer Maintenance and ISE Maintenance Schedules:

IFU, Maintenance - Maintenance Schedule (All Countries and Regions Except Japan)
For Japan, ISE Addendum - Maintenance Schedule
Manual Orders:
IFU, Sample Programming and Processing - Order for Routine and Emergency
Samples
STAT Samples:
IFU, Sample Programming and Processing - Priority STAT Samples
Program a New Test:

IFU, System Setup - Program a New Test
Contamination Parameters:
Reference Manual, Parameters
iv B71495AF
Revision History
This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent
software version changes the information in this document, a new issue will be released.
B71495AF, 04/2021
Software version 1.0
This document was created to:

• Add the Service and Coverage section.
• Add the Use Statement section.
• Add the Notice to Users section.
• Add the Crushing of hands symbol to the Symbols Glossary table.
• Add the last bullet point to the DxC 700 AU Hazards section.
• Add the Restricted Use section.
• Update the Laser Labels diagram.
• Update the Intended Use section.
• Add the Benefits and Limitations section.
• Add the Minimum Software Requirements section.
• Add the Sample Syringe Parts, Reagent Syringe Parts, Wash Syringe Parts, and ISE
Buffer Syringe photos to the Inspect the Syringes for Leaks section.
• Update the Calibrate Tests section.
• Add an Important note to the Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control (QC) sections.
• Add the Specimen Preparation section.
• Add the Installation section.
• Add the Temperature and Humidity Conditions When the Analyzer is being
Transported section.
• Add the Analytical Performance Characteristics section.
• Update the first paragraph in the Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode section.
• Update the first paragraph in the Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing section.
• Update Table 2.1 Parts List for Daily Inspections and Preparations.
• Update Table 6.16 Weekly Analyzer Maintenance.
• Update Table 6.17 Monthly Analyzer Maintenance.
• Update Table 6.22 Sodium Hypochlorite Solution.
• Update Table 6.27 Daily ISE Maintenance.
• Update Table 6.28 Weekly ISE Maintenance.
• Update Table 6.32 Every Three Months or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance.
• Update Table 6.35 As Needed ISE Maintenance.
B71495AE, 04/2019
B71495AF v
Revision History

• Update the Safety Notice section.
• Update Hardware Overview section.
• Update Software Overview section.
• Update Turn on the System section.
• Update Perform Daily Inspections and Preparations section.
• Update Monitor the Reagent Status section.
• Update Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the Racks (Standalone)
section.
• Update Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the STAT Table (Standalone)
section.
• Update Order and Perform Calibration and Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table
(Laboratory Automation System) section.
• Update Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Sample Tubes and Cups in Racks section.
• Update Perform Replicates section.
• Update Monitoring Analysis section.
• Update Disable a Test section.
• Update Reagent Management section.
• Add Replace Reagent Probe Cleaning Solution-1 (CLN-1) in MEASURE Mode (Optional)
section.
• Update Maintenance Introduction section.
• Update Program the Operator Name section.
• Update Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance section.
• Update Weekly Maintenance section.
• Update As Needed Maintenance section.
• Update Parts List for ISE Maintenance section.
• Update Flag Details section.
• Update Troubleshooting Reagents, Calibrators, Control Samples, and Patient Samples
section.
• Update Cups or Tubes Specification section in Appendix.
B71495AD, 06/2018

• Update the Safety Notice section.
• Add the Symbol Glossary.
• Revise Intended Use statement.
• Update Hardware Overview section.
• Update Software Overview section.
• Update Order and Perform Calibration and Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table
(Laboratory Automation System) section.
• Update Reagent Management section.
• Update Monitor the Reagent Status section.
• Update Calibrate Tests section.
• Update Perform Replicates section.
• Add Maximum Sample Volume Limits in Sample Tubes and Cups in Racks section.
vi B71495AF
Revision History
• Update Search for Results to View, Print, or Send to LIS section.
B71495AC, 10/2017
This document was created to add the following sentence
"When your system is set to Multiple Loads STAT Table operation (automation systems
only), the STAT Pause [F2] function in the STAT Status screen is disabled except during
PAUSE and REAGENT PAUSE modes."
to the following sections:

• Processing Priority STAT Samples -> Table 4.4 -> STAT Pause [F2] option.
• Processing Priority STAT Samples in Bar Code Mode -> Step 2 -> NOTE
• Processing Priority STAT Samples in Cup Position Mode -> Step 2 -> NOTE.
• Perform Quick STAT Operation -> Step 6 -> NOTE.
Updated Prepare and Load Calibrators and Control Samples -> Step 3 -> NOTE with the
following two sentences:
The blinking STAT TABLE ROTATION LED indicates that the system is aspirating the
samples on the STAT Table. You can interrupt patient sample analysis to perform calibration
and QC analysis. Press the STAT Pause [F2] from the STAT Status screen and remove the
patient samples that are currently on the STAT Table.
After the calibration or QC analysis is completed, replace the removed patient samples in
their original positions on the STAT table and resume the patient sample analysis.
B71495AB, 03/2017
This document was created to add the CE mark to the title page.
Initial Issue, B71495AA, 12/2016

B71495AF vii
Revision History
viii B71495AF
Warranty
The system is covered by and subject to the provisions of the warranty included in your
contractual agreement for the system or its reagents.
The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

arising from the failure to perform these maintenance procedures at the indicated time
intervals are made at the discretion of Beckman Coulter, and at the customer's expense.
B71495AF ix
Warranty
x B71495AF
Service and Coverage
If any problems occur in the system during the warranty period, call your Beckman Coulter
Representative. Provide the serial number or system ID number and a complete description
of the problem.
Telephone Service: USA and Canada
For United States and Canada customers, call Beckman Coulter Customer Support toll-free
at (800) 854-3633. Beckman Coulter Customer Support is available 24 hours a day to
customers in the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, and Canada.
Telephone Service: International
For international customers, contact your local Beckman Coulter Customer Support.
B71495AF xi
Service and Coverage
xii B71495AF
Contents
Quick Start, iii
Revision History, v
Warranty, ix
Service and Coverage, xi
Safety Notice, xxv
Introduction, xxxix
CHAPTER 1: System Overview, 1-1
Hardware Overview, 1-1
Hardware Component Overview, 1-1
Breakers, 1-2
Operation Buttons, 1-3
Status Light, 1-4
Rack Feeder Module, 1-5
STAT Table, 1-6
Sample Transfer Component, 1-9
Reagent Transfer Component, 1-10
Mix Bar Component, 1-11
Cuvette Wheel Component, 1-12
Photometry Component, 1-13
Wash Nozzle Component, 1-13
Reagent Refrigerator Component, 1-15
Syringe Component, 1-16
Tank Storage, 1-17
Wash Solution Roller Pump, 1-18
ISE Module (Optional), 1-19
Console, 1-21
Touch Screen, Mouse, and Keyboard, 1-23
Software Overview, 1-23
Minimum Software Requirements, 1-23
Organization of Operation, 1-24
Navigation Button Area, 1-25
Action Button Area, 1-26
Main Workspace, 1-27
Status Area and Analyzer Modes, 1-29
Event Display Area, 1-30
Sub Workspace, 1-30
Using the System Help, Quick Start Page, and Event Log, 1-31
CHAPTER 2: Daily Startup, 2-1
Introduction, 2-1
Startup Procedure, 2-1
B71495AF xiii
Contents
Turn on the System, 2-1

Create a New Index, 2-2
Perform Daily Inspections and Preparations, 2-3
Parts List for Daily Inspections and Preparations, 2-5
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks, 2-5
Inspect the Wash Solution Roller Pump for Leaks, 2-9
Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars, 2-10
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottle, 2-12
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions, 2-13
Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions (Standard
Configuration), 2-14
Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions (Optional
Configuration), 2-15
Inspect the Analyzer Status, 2-16
Perform the ISE Startup (Option), 2-17
Inspect the ISE Reagents, 2-18
Clean the ISE, 2-22
Calibrate the ISE, 2-24
Monitor the Reagent Status, 2-26
Replace the Reagents, 2-33
Calibrate Tests, 2-35
Process Quality Control (QC), 2-36
Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the Racks (Standalone), 2-38
Order and Perform Calibration from the Racks, 2-38
Order and Perform Quality Control (QC) from the Racks, 2-40
Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the STAT Table
(Standalone), 2-42
Program the Bar Code or Cup Positions Option for Calibration
and QC from the STAT Table, 2-42
Order and Perform Calibration from the STAT Table, 2-43
Order and Perform Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table, 2-46
Order and Perform Calibration and Quality Control (QC) from the STAT
Table (Laboratory Automation System), 2-48
Order the Calibrations and QCs, 2-50
Prepare and Load Calibrators and Control Samples, 2-52
Analyze the Calibrators or Control Samples, 2-53
Place Another Load of Calibrators or Control Samples on the STAT
Table, 2-54
Analyze the Last Load of Calibrators or Control Samples, 2-54
Start Analysis, 2-55
Start Rack Analysis, 2-55
Start STAT Table Analysis, 2-56
xiv B71495AF
Contents
CHAPTER 3: System Setup, 3-1

Program a New Test, 3-1
Create a Panel, 3-7
Create a Sample Panel, 3-7
Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration Panel, 3-8
Create a QC Panel, 3-9
Program Calibrator Concentrations, 3-10
Load Calibrator Concentrations with Two-dimensional Bar Code, 3-10
Program Calibrator Concentrations Manually, 3-15
Review the Loading History of Calibrator Information, 3-16
Program Preset QC Mean and Range , 3-16
Program a User Menu, 3-17
Edit the User Menu, 3-17
Delete a User Menu, 3-18
CHAPTER 4: Sample Programming and Processing, 4-1
Sample Preparation, 4-1
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Sample Tubes and Cups in Racks, 4-2
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in the Rack, 4-3
Place Samples into each Rack Type, 4-4
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack, 4-6
Place Racks on the Rack Input Area, 4-8
Order for Routine and Emergency Samples, 4-10
Enter Manual Orders for Routine and Emergency Samples, 4-11
Enter Batch Orders, 4-13
Delete an Order, 4-15
Download Orders from a Laboratory Information System, 4-16
Processing Emergency Samples, 4-17
Priority STAT Samples, 4-17
Enter Manual Orders for Priority STAT Samples, 4-17
Processing Priority STAT Samples, 4-19
Perform Quick STAT Operation, 4-23
Perform a Rerun, 4-25
Auto Rerun, 4-25
Manual Rerun, 4-26
Search for Results to View, Print, or Send to LIS, 4-31
Print Results, 4-35
Send Results to LIS, 4-35
Perform Replicates, 4-36
CHAPTER 5: System Monitoring and Results, 5-1
Monitoring Analysis, 5-1
B71495AF xv
Contents
Monitor Results, 5-1

Identifying Sample Kinds and Types by Sample Data Prefix, 5-1
Sample Status Screen, 5-2
Inspect the Analyzer Status, 5-5
Disable a Test, 5-15
Enable a Test That Has Been Disabled, 5-16
Review Results for Flags and Events, 5-16
Review Results for Flags, 5-16
Review Events, 5-16
Interpreting Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis (LIH) Results, 5-18
Reagent Management, 5-20
Reagents, 5-20
Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray, 5-22
Remove Adapters from the Reagent Tray, 5-23
Assign a Reagent Position, 5-24
Edit a Reagent ID, 5-26
Replace or Add Reagents in MEASURE Mode, 5-27
ISE Reagent Management, 5-32
Program the ISE Parameters (Onboard Stability Period and Alarm
Tests), 5-33
Replace ISE Reagents in MEASURE Mode, 5-34
System Shutdown (End Process), 5-38
Stop Feeder, 5-39
Stop the Rack Input Area, 5-39
Restart Analysis After Selecting Stop Feeder, 5-39
Stop Analysis, 5-39
Return to STANDBY Mode After Stopping Analysis, 5-40
Power Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button, 5-40
Return to STANDBY Mode After Powering Off the System by
Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button, 5-41
Identify and Reanalyze Samples after a Cuvette Overflow, 5-41
Copy the List of Sample Results with Invalid Data, 5-45
Print the List, 5-46
Replace Reagent Probe Cleaning Solution-1 (Optional Configuration) in
MEASURE Mode, 5-47
CHAPTER 6: Maintenance, 6-1
Introduction, 6-1
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions, 6-1
Maintenance Schedule (All Countries and Regions Except Japan), 6-3
Program the Operator Name, 6-8
Maintenance Log, 6-8
Confirm the Maintenance Schedule, 6-9
xvi B71495AF
Contents
Add a Maintenance Procedure, 6-10

Delete a Maintenance Procedure, 6-11
Update the Maintenance Log, 6-11
Approve the Maintenance Record, 6-11
View Maintenance History, 6-12
Copy Maintenance History Record to External Memory Device or
CD-R, 6-13
View Maintenance Schedule, 6-13
Accessing Maintenance Operations, 6-14
Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance, 6-15
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions, 6-20
Weekly Maintenance, 6-21
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars, 6-21
Perform a W2, 6-26
Perform a Photocal, 6-29
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottle, 6-32
Monthly Maintenance, 6-33
Clean the Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells,
and Whole Blood Wash Well, 6-34
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells, 6-36
Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube
Mounting Joints, 6-38
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter, 6-46
Every Three Months Maintenance, 6-52
Clean the Air Filters, 6-52
Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing, 6-54
Six-Month Maintenance, 6-56
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel, 6-56
Yearly Maintenance, 6-63
Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint, 6-64
As Needed Maintenance, 6-66
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes, 6-67
Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe, 6-68
Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing, 6-70
Replace the Mix Bars, 6-71
Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints, 6-74
Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe, 6-76
Replace the Wash Syringe, 6-83
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators and STAT Table
Compartment, 6-89
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes, 6-91
Perform a W1, 6-92
B71495AF xvii
Contents
Replace Rack ID Labels, 6-93

Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes, 6-94
Replace the Photometer Lamp, 6-99
Replace the Wash Solution Tank, 6-105
Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-
ring, 6-106
Clean the Rack, 6-107
Clean the Rack Input and Output Areas, 6-109
Save Parameters, 6-110
Online Software Updates (Optional), 6-110
ISE Maintenance (All Countries and Regions Except Japan), 6-113
ISE Tubing Block Diagram, 6-113
Parts List for ISE Maintenance, 6-114
ISE Daily Maintenance, 6-117
Clean the ISE, 6-117
Calibrate the ISE, 6-118
ISE Weekly Maintenance, 6-120
Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes, 6-121
Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line, 6-123
ISE Maintenance Every Two Weeks or Every 3,000 Samples, 6-124
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Nozzles,
and Sample Pot, 6-124
ISE Maintenance Monthly, Every Two Months, or Every Three Months, 6-129
Replace ISE Tubing, 6-129
ISE Maintenance Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples, 6-139
Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution, 6-139
ISE Every Three Months Maintenance or Maintenance Every 20,000
Samples, 6-140
Manually Clean the Drain Well, 6-140
ISE Six-Month Maintenance or Every 40,000 Samples, 6-144
Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode, 6-144
ISE Maintenance Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples, 6-149
Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing, 6-149
ISE As Needed Maintenance, 6-155
Replace the Sample Pot, 6-155
Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side), 6-159
Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode, 6-163
Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block, 6-168
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual), 6-176
Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case, 6-181
Replace the ISE Mix Bar, 6-186
Perform CRS Calibration (Optional), 6-190
xviii B71495AF
Contents
Manually Clean the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing, 6-193
CHAPTER 7: Flags, 7-1
Flags, 7-1
Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order), 7-1
Summary of Flags (Priority Order), 7-3
Flag Details, 7-5
d: QC result is excluded by operator, 7-5
e: Data edited by the operator, 7-6
(: Reagent probe cleaning solution is insufficient, 7-6
Wa: Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette, 7-6
R: Insufficient reagent detected, 7-7
#: Insufficient sample detected, 7-7
%: Clot detected, 7-8
?: Unable to calculate a result, 7-8
M: Duplicate sample ID, 7-9
n: LIH test not performed, 7-9
l: Result may be affected by lipemia , 7-9
i: Result may be affected by icterus, 7-9
h: Result may be affected by hemolysis, 7-9
Y: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last
photometric read point, 7-10
U: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last
photometric read point, 7-10
y: OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient
sample is high, 7-10
u: OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient
sample is low, 7-11
@: OD is higher than 3.0, 7-11
$: Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction, 7-12
D: OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range, 7-13
B: OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range, 7-14
*: Linearity error in rate method, 7-15
&: Prozone test data is abnormal, 7-15
Z: Prozone error, 7-16
E: Error in reaction rate for rate assay, 7-16
Fx: Result (OD) is higher than the analytical measuring range, 7-16
Gx: Result (OD) is lower than the analytical measuring range, 7-16
!: Unable to calculate concentration, 7-17
): Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from
the lot number used for RB/Calibration, 7-18
a: Reagent expired, 7-18
ba: No calibration data or calibration is expired, 7-18
bh: Reagent blank or calibration failed, and the result was
calculated with historical data, 7-18
B71495AF xix
Contents
bn: Mastercurve used, 7-19

bz: Calibration curve for Prozone data used, 7-19
F: Result is higher than the analytical measuring range, 7-19
G: Result is lower than the analytical measuring range, 7-19
Tx: Result of T-Hb or A1c is outside the analytical measuring
range, 7-20
ph: Result is higher than the high critical limit, 7-20
pl: Result is lower than the low critical limit, 7-20
T: Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check, 7-20
P: Positive, 7-20
N: Negative, 7-21
H: Result is higher than reference interval, 7-21
L: Result is lower than reference interval, 7-21
J: Result is higher than the rerun decision limit, 7-21
K: Result is lower than the rerun decision limit, 7-21
fh: Result is higher than the reflex limit, 7-22
fl: Result is lower than the reflex limit, 7-22
Va: Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range, 7-22
xQ: Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other control
sample, 7-22
1Q: QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field, 7-23
2Q: QC data exceeds 13s control range, 7-23
4Q: QC data exceeds R4s control range, 7-24
6Q: A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of
the mean, 7-24
7Q: Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or
decreasing values, 7-25
S: First-run result replaced by rerun result, 7-25
/: Test pending or not analyzed, 7-25
r: Result has been transferred to Laboratory Information System
through online communication, 7-25
c: Result corrected by the operator using data correction, 7-26
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of Final
Result Flowchart, 7-26
CHAPTER 8: Troubleshooting, 8-1
Introduction, 8-1
Reagent Blank Data, 8-1
Calibration Data, 8-1
QC Data, 8-2
Troubleshooting Reagents, Calibrators, Control Samples, and Patient
Samples, 8-2
xx B71495AF
Contents
Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions, 8-2

Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions, 8-3
QC Related Issues and Corrective Actions, 8-4
Sample Related Issues, 8-4
Wash Solution Related Issues, 8-5
Deionized Water Related Issues, 8-5
Items in Common on the DxC 700 AU that can Aid in
Troubleshooting, 8-5
Mechanical Problems, 8-6
Syringe Problems, 8-6
Probe Problems, 8-6
Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel or Wash Nozzles, 8-7
Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer
Component, 8-8
Mixing Problems, 8-8
Deionized Water Tank Problems, 8-9
Deionized Water or Filter Problems, 8-9
Incubation Temperature Problems, 8-9
Tubing and Pump Problems, 8-9
Troubleshooting Reagent Refrigerator Problems, 8-10
STAT Table Problems, 8-10
Rack Problems, 8-10
System Problems, 8-11
Event for Reagent Refrigerator Temp, 8-11
Abnormal Sound from Inside the System, 8-11
Event for Deionized Water, 8-12
Leaks from the Wash Solution Roller Pump, 8-13
Bar Code Label Errors, 8-13
Leaks from the Bottom of the System, 8-14
No Wash Solution to Mix Bar Wash Wells, 8-14
Reagent Event when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles, 8-14
Sample Event when Sufficient Sample Remains, 8-14
No Sample Cup Event when Sample Cup is in the Rack, 8-14
No Sample Cup Event when Sample Cup is on the STAT Table, 8-15
Liquid Leaking from the Reagent Probe or Sample Probe, 8-15
Reagent Probe or Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette, 8-15
Flag [#] (Sample Level Detection Error) Generated during the
Sample Dispense Operation, 8-15
Thermal Control Error on the Wash Water Heater, 8-15
Rack Jams, 8-15
Printer Problems, 8-16
Computer Problems, 8-16
Menu cannot be selected, 8-16
B71495AF xxi
Contents
Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work, 8-17

Keyboard Not Responding, 8-17
Results Do Not Print Automatically, 8-17
Online Auto-Output by Laboratory Information System Not
Executed, 8-17
Recovering from Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP
Button or Power Loss, 8-17
Power Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button, 8-18
Return to STANDBY Mode After Powering Off the System by
Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button, 8-18
RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart, 8-19
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Event, 8-21
Inspect the Cuvettes to Determine if an Overflow Occurred, 8-21
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow, 8-21
Overflow Causes, 8-21
Recognizing an Overflow, 8-22
Items to Confirm when Recovering from an Overflow, 8-22
After the Overflow is Repaired, 8-22
Recovering from an Unstable Photometry Error, 8-22
Inspect the Cuvette Placement, 8-23
Inspect the Cuvette Condition, 8-23
Inspect the Lamp, 8-25
Laboratory Automation System Problems, 8-26
APPENDIX A: System Specifications, A-1
Installation, A-1
System Specifications, A-1
General Specifications, A-7
Cups or Tubes Specifications, A-9
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Tubes in Racks, A-13
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Other Containers in Racks, A-15
Sampling Specifications, A-16
Reagent Specifications, A-16
Reaction System Specifications, A-17
Analytical Method Specifications, A-18
Optical System Specifications, A-18
Data Processing Specifications, A-19
Calculation Processing Specifications, A-19
Input and Output Specifications, A-20
ISE Specifications, A-21
xxii B71495AF
Contents
APPENDIX B: End-User License Agreement and Open Source Software Notice, B-1
End-user License Agreement, B-1
Open Source Software Notice, B-4
Glossary
B71495AF xxiii
Contents
xxiv B71495AF
Safety Notice
Read all product manuals and consult with Beckman Coulter-trained personnel before you
operate the system. Do not perform any procedure before you carefully read all
instructions. Always follow the product labels and the recommendation from the
manufacturer. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip
Warning
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could cause
death or serious injury. Warning can indicate the possibility of erroneous data that
could cause an incorrect diagnosis.
Caution
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can cause
minor or moderate injury. Caution can also alert against unsafe practices, or indicate
the possibility of erroneous data that could cause an incorrect diagnosis.
Important
Important indicates important information to follow.
Note
Note indicates notable information to follow.
Tip
Tip indicates information to consider.
Use Statement
• The system is for indoor use only.
• Use the system in a manner specified by Beckman Coulter, as the protection provided
by the system can be impaired and incorrect results or system failure can occur.
Notice to Users
• In the unlikely event that a serious incident occurs with this product, we will notify the
users and the administrative authorities of the country in writing.
• If a user discovers a serious incident, the user should contact a Beckman Coulter
Representative.
B71495AF xxv
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary
Symbols Glossary
Table 1 Symbols Glossary
Symbol Description
CE Marking
Indicates conformity with the provisions of the applicable EU directives.
cNRTLus Certification Mark
This symbol indicates recognition by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)

that the system has met the relevant product safety standards for the United States and
Canada.
OSHA, CEC
Country of Origin Symbol

Made in Country of Origin
This symbol indicates the country that the product was manufactured.
Moving Parts Symbol
The moving parts symbol indicates that there are moving parts in the area. Only operate
the system when all covers are in position and use caution to reduce the risk of personal
injury. While the system is operating, do not touch the moving parts of the system. Do
not insert fingers or hands into any system opening.
Warning; Crushing of hands
This symbol indicates a warning of a closing motion of mechanical parts of equipment.
ISO 7010. Graphical Symbols for electrical equipment in medical practices. #W024
Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information
Use caution to avoid injury to hands when close to equipment with moving mechanical
parts.
RCM Symbol
This symbol indicates compliance with the Australian Communications Media Authority
(ACMA) requirements (safety and EMC) for Australia and New Zealand.
xxvi B71495AF
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary
Table 1 Symbols Glossary (Continued)

Symbol Description
RoHS Caution Symbol
This symbol indicates that this electronic information product contains certain toxic or
制造。
日期 / Mfg. Date
hazardous elements, and can be used safely during its environmental protection use
period. The number in the middle of the logo indicates the environmental protection
use period (in years) for the product. The outer circle indicates that the product can be
recycled. The logo also signifies that the product should be recycled immediately after
its environmental protection use period has expired. The date on the label indicates the
date of manufacture.
These labels and materials declaration table (the Table of Hazardous Substance's Name
and Concentration) meet People's Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/
T11364-2006 Marking for Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Products
requirements.
RoHS Environmental Symbol
This symbol indicates that the product does not contain any toxic or hazardous
substances or elements. The "e" stands for electrical, electronic, and environmental
electronic information products. This logo indicates that this electronic information
product does not contain any toxic or hazardous substances or elements, and is green
and is environmental. The outer circle indicates that the product can be recycled. The
logo also signifies that the product can be recycled after being discarded, and should
not be casually discarded.
RxOnly Symbol
Recognized by the US FDA as an alternate to "Caution: Federal law restricts this device
to sale by or on the order of a licensed practitioner.
21 CFR 801.109(b)(1)
B71495AF xxvii
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary

Symbol Description
Recycling Symbol
This label is required by the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive
of the European Union. The presence of this label indicates that:
1. The device was put on the European Market after August 13, 2005.
2. The device is not to be disposed of via the municipal waste collection system of any
member state of the European Union.
Customers must understand and follow all laws regarding the correct decontamination
and safe disposal of electrical equipment. For Beckman Coulter products bearing this
label, contact your dealer or your local Beckman Coulter Representative for more
information on the take-back program that facilitates the correct collection, treatment,
recovery, recycling, and safe disposal of these products.
EU Directive 2002-96-EC: waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE)
For the Japan market:
This system is considered an industrial waste, subject to special controls for infectious
waste. Before disposal of the system, refer to the Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning
Law for compliance procedures.
"ON" (power)
To indicate connection to the mains, at least for mains switches or their positions, and
all those cases where safety is involved.
IEC 60417: Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Overview and application, #5007
This symbol indicates the on position.
"ON"/"OFF" (push-push)
To indicate connection to or disconnection from the mains.
This symbol can be used for switches that are used as an on and off switch, without
disconnecting power.
xxviii B71495AF
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary

Symbol Description
"ON" for a part of equipment
To indicate the "ON" condition for a part of equipment.
This symbol can also indicate on or reset conditions.
Stop
To identify the control or the indicator to stop the active function.
IEC 60417: Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Overview and application, #5110A
This symbol indicates a stop button.
"OFF" (power)
To indicate disconnection from the mains, at least for mains switches or their positions,
and all those cases where safety is involved.
This symbol indicates the off position.
Fuse
To identify fuse boxes or their location.
This symbol is used to identify a fuse location and rating.
Dangerous voltage
To indicate hazards arising from dangerous voltages.
This symbol can also indicate an area of the system to not access under any
circumstances, due to possibility of high voltages and the risk of electrical shock.
B71495AF xxix
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary

Symbol Description
Protective earth; protective ground
To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for
protection against electric shock in case of a fault, or the terminal of a protective earth
(ground) electrode.
Warning, Hot Surface
To warn of a hot surface.
This symbol indicates that there is a hot surface or component (such as a lamp) in the
area that, if touched, can cause a burn.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11
Laser Compliance
EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO
LASER NOTICE NO. 50 DATED JUNE 24, 2007
MANUFACTURED This label indicates that the product is a Class 1 Laser Product and is in compliance with
LABEL P/N B09250AC
Beckman Coulter, Inc. MADE IN U.S.A. MARCA REG

international standard and US requirements.
21 CFR 1040
Laser Class 2 Panel Label
The panel marking indicates that there is Class 2 laser light radiation beyond the panel it
is placed on. Use caution and do not stare into the beam when laser light is in the area.
IEC 60825: Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and requirements,
clause 7.4
Manufacturer
Indicates the medical device manufacturer.
ISO 15223-1. Medical devices - Symbols to be used with medical device labels, labelling
and information to be supplied - Part 1: General Requirements. #5.1.1
This symbol identifies who the legal manufacturer of the product is.
EC REP
Authorised representative in the European Community
Indicates the authorized representative in the European community.
xxx B71495AF
Safety Notice
Symbols Glossary

Symbol Description
Catalogue Number
Indicates the manufacturer's catalogue number so that the medical device can be
identified.
In vitro diagnostic medical device
Indicates a medical device that is intended to be used as an in vitro diagnostic medical

device.
ISO 15223-1: Medical devices. Symbols to be used with medical device labels, labelling
and information to be supplied. General requirements, clause 5.5.1
Caution
Indicates the need for the user to consult the instructions for use for important
cautionary information such as warnings and precautions that cannot, for a variety of
reasons, be presented on the medical device itself.
Warning; Biological hazard
To warn of a biological hazard.
This label indicates a caution to operate only with all covers in position to decrease risk
of personal injury or biohazard.
This label indicates the use of biohazardous materials in the area. Use caution when
working with possible infectious samples.
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats.
Handle and dispose of biohazardous materials according to your laboratory procedures.
Consult instructions for use
Indicates the need for the user to consult the instructions for use.
B71495AF xxxi
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards

Symbol Description
Date of Manufacture
To indicate the date when the medical device was manufactured.
Serial number
Indicates the manufacturer's serial number so that a specific medical device can be
identified.
Warning; Laser Beam
To warn of a laser beam.
The laser radiation symbol indicates that there can be laser light radiation in the area.
Take precautions to prevent exposure.
Info for USA only: California Proposition 65 California Proposition 65

WARNING
This product can expose you to chemicals known to the State of California to cause
C26155-AB
Cancer & Reproductive Harm

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov
Cancer and Reproductive Harm. For more information go to https://
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
Summary of Hazards
This section describes the possible hazards of the system. The hazards of individual
procedures in this manual are included in the warnings or cautions within the instructions.
Read this section before you operate this system.
Follow the power requirements in the system specifications. Follow the procedures and
safety warnings throughout this manual.
If you use the system in a manner not specified by Beckman Coulter, the protection
provided by the system can be impaired and incorrect results or system failure can occur.
Bar Code Reader

Do not adjust or remove the housing of any bar code reader. The bar code readers use
lasers and looking directly at the laser light can be hazardous. Assume that the laser is
always on.
xxxii B71495AF
Safety Notice
Summary of Hazards
Use of control or adjustments or performance of procedures other than these specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Biohazardous and Chemical Materials

Observe all biohazard precautions when doing maintenance, service, or troubleshooting on
the system. Biohazard precautions include, but are not limited to, wearing gloves, eye
shields, and lab coats, and washing hands after working on contaminated portions of the
system.
Follow all laboratory procedures and policies for handling infectious and pathogenic
materials.
Avoid skin contact with reagents and other chemical preparations. Wear Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) to work with reagents and other chemical preparations used
with the system. For more information, refer to the related SDS (Safety Data Sheet).
Clean spills of biohazardous or other potentially hazardous substances on the system

immediately. If the system must be decontaminated, contact Beckman Coulter.
Follow your laboratory procedure for biohazardous and hazardous material disposal.
Electric Shock
Do not replace or service any components where you can contact hazardous parts that can
cause electric shock. Beckman Coulter must perform this maintenance. To completely
power off the system, turn off the main breaker that is located on the left side of the
analyzer module.
Electrical Ground
Never operate the system until the power cord is connected correctly to an electrical
ground.
Electromagnetic Wave and Noise

The system generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the system is not
installed and operated correctly, this energy can cause interference with other equipment.
In addition, other equipment can radiate radio frequency energy to which the system is
sensitive. If you suspect interference between the system and other equipment, Beckman
Coulter recommends the following actions to correct the interference:
• This IVD medical equipment complies with the emission and immunity requirements
described in this part of the EN/IEC 61326 series.
• As to emission, this system has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, so in a
domestic environment, it may cause radio interference, in which case, you may need to
take measures to mitigate the interference.
• It is recommended to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to operation of
the system.
• Do not use this system in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic
radiation (for example, unshielded intentional RF sources), as these can interfere with
the proper operation.
B71495AF xxxiii
Safety Notice
DxC 700 AU Hazards
• Do not use mobile or cordless telephones and transceivers in the same room as the
system.
• Do not use medical equipment that can be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
Electric Magnetic Field (EMF) near the system.
Flammable Materials
Do not use this system near flammable materials.
Moving Parts
While the system is in operation, do not touch or go close to any moving parts. Close
protective guards and covers during operation. Failure to close covers correctly can cause
injury or incorrect results.
Noise Level Generated by the Analyzer

60 dB
Liquid Waste
Handle all liquid waste as potentially infectious.
Some liquid waste can require special treatment before disposal. Follow your laboratory
procedure.
Some substances in the reagents, control samples, calibrators, and wash solutions have
disposal regulations. Follow your laboratory procedure.
Solid Waste
Handle all solid waste as potentially infectious.
Some solid waste can require special treatment before disposal. Follow your laboratory
procedure.
Handle any used or replaced parts (such as tubing, mix bars, probes, cuvettes, and wash
nozzles) as infectious waste materials. Follow your laboratory procedure.
DxC 700 AU Hazards

• A Beckman Coulter representative installs the system. If the system installation needs
modification, contact Beckman Coulter.
• If the system malfunctions, power off the system completely using the main breaker
located on the left side of the analyzer module before any repair service.
• If fluid is spilled on the system, turn off the main breaker located on the left side of the
analyzer module immediately. Wipe up the spill only after turning off the main system
breaker. If fluid enters the system after a spill, contact Beckman Coulter before
restarting the system.
xxxiv B71495AF
Safety Notice
DxC 700 AU Hazards
• Before transferring the analysis results to a Laboratory Information System, confirm

that the sample numbers and sample IDs are correct.
• Substances such as Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis can interfere with results. Refer to
the reagent Instructions for Use (reagent IFU) for specific substance interference
information.
• To be sure the analytical data is accurate:
— Confirm the quality of deionized (DI) water is within specifications.
— Confirm that all tests have passed calibration, and calibration is not expired.
— Inspect the quality control data.
• Use the correct reagent, calibrator, and control to analyze samples.
• Avoid excessive reagent agitation, which can cause bubbles. If bubbles are visible on
the surface of the reagent, remove them. Confirm that the reagent bottles are placed
securely on the reagent tray with the correct adapters and partitions. If the bottles are
tilted, incorrect results can occur, or you can damage the reagent probe.
• Prepare reagents, wash solutions, calibrators, and control samples according to the
reagent IFU, paying particular attention to any reconstitution, mixing, and
pretreatment instructions.
• Handling samples:
— Precautions when using whole blood (HbA1c)
— Use the HbA1c tab with the HbA1c reagent (for automated sample
preparation) delivered from Beckman Coulter. Use of any other reagent can
cause incorrect diagnostic results. Operation of the three tests 100.HbA1c,
101.T-Hb, and 102.A1c, and some of the specific test parameters are pre-
programmed and you cannot change them.
— If the blood has coagulated, obtain a new sample.
— If the blood cells have precipitated, mix the whole blood by inverting gently.
— Sample to sample carryover is one potential source of analytical error in the
clinical laboratory. Do not use the same sample run on an AU Chemistry system for
analysis of analytes for which a small quantity of carryover could cause problems
with the results.
— This system analyzes serum, urine, plasma, other sample types, and whole blood
(for HbA1c only). Other refers to other body fluids such as cerebrospinal fluid
(CSF). Some samples cannot be analyzed depending on the analysis test, reagent,
and sample tubes used. For questions regarding reagent and sample tube type,
contact Beckman Coulter.
— Use serum or plasma that is clot free, or urine that is free from suspended matter.
If serum or urine contains clots or suspended matter, the probe can clog and cause
problems with the analysis results.
— Chemicals present in the sample (medicine, anticoagulant, preservative, and so
on) can significantly interfere with the results.
— Highly viscous samples can interfere with the testing of the samples and the
reliability of data.
— Refer to the IFU for each test for correct sample collection and storage. Incorrect
storage of samples can alter the analyte in a sample.
— Use only sample containers and sample tubes specified by Beckman Coulter.
— To reduce the risk of interference, centrifuge and then separate serum and plasma
samples adequately from blood cells immediately. Before analysis, confirm that
samples are free from suspended matter, such as fibrin. While the system has a
sophisticated clot detection mechanism, this mechanism is not able to detect all
clots. Carefully inspect the samples.
B71495AF xxxv
Safety Notice
Labels
— Collect urine samples using correct preservatives and remove any suspended
matter using centrifugation before analysis (CLSI GP16-A2).
— Confirm that any anticoagulants or collection devices that employ a barrier are
compatible with the test reagent being used. Refer to the reagent Instructions for
Use for suitable and validated sample types. Use caution when using sample tubes
containing barriers or gels. Confirm the suitability of all collection devices in use.
— For information about whether a serum separating agent is correct or not, contact
the chemical reagent manufacturer or distributor.
— When using sample containers or tubes containing a separating medium, confirm
that there is enough serum to avoid contaminating or blocking the sample probe
with the separating medium.
— Confirm that there is enough sample for correct sampling to occur. The small
amount of wash water left on the sample probe can dilute the volume of sample
left in the sample tube.
• To prevent water leaks, confirm that Beckman Coulter has fitted water supply and
drainage hoses according to local guidelines.
• To confirm system performance, maintain and inspect the system periodically by
replacing the parts according to the instructions in this guide.
— Have and follow a maintenance schedule for this system.
— Create a maintenance routine for the computer software and hardware, including
frequent backing up of data containing analysis settings, results history, and the
event log list file.
— Do not store backups onsite. Keep one copy on-site for reference and one copy
offsite.
• Before using the system for the first time, set parameters for the reagent and sample
quantity, measurement wavelength, calibrator values, and so on. Enter test specific
parameters from the reagent setting sheet to have optimum system performance.
Enter any updates to these settings into the system immediately.
• Dedicate the computer hardware to only running the system software. Do not connect
the computer hardware to the Internet, unless instructed to do so by Beckman Coulter.
• Keep the analyzer covers closed except for startup procedures and maintenance. If the
covers are open for extended periods of time, excess condensation can be generated in
the reagent refrigerators and cause errors.
• Be sure all consumables are unopened before use. If the consumables appear to be
opened or contaminated, contact Beckman Coulter.
Labels
• Stripes - Orange stripes affixed to the system surface indicate the movement areas of
the hardware components. Avoid these areas during operation.
• Warning Labels - Identify areas of the system where hazards exist and where caution
should be taken to avoid serious injury or death.
• Instruction Labels - Instruction labels are affixed on the system at relevant locations to
alert the operator to operate the system correctly.
Fluorocarbons Recovery and Destruction Law Label

This system uses a Hydro FluoroCarbon (HFC) cooling medium.
xxxvi B71495AF
Safety Notice
Restricted Use
HFC chemicals cannot be discharged indiscriminately. When the system is discarded,

recover HFC chemicals.
The type, pressure, and volume of the HFC chemicals are described on the label.
Restricted Use
• Samples and reagents: Refer to the reagent Instructions for Use used for measurement.
• Consumables: Refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance in this IFU.
• Computer Connectivity (LIS, Automation, Pro Services): Refer to System Overview >
Hardware Overview > Computers section.
DxC 700 AU Laser Labels

This system complies with IEC60825-1 and is classified as a Class 1 laser product.
B71495AF xxxvii
Safety Notice
DxC 700 AU Laser Labels
Figure 1 Laser Labels
1. CAUTION-CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION 2. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT complies with

WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO THE IEC60825-1
BEAM
xxxviii B71495AF
Introduction
Intended Use
The BECKMAN COULTER DxC 700 AU measures analytes in samples, in combination with
appropriate reagents, calibrators, quality control (QC) samples, and other accessories. This
system is for in vitro diagnostic use only. Applications include colorimetric, latex
agglutination, ion selective electrode and homogeneous enzyme immunoassay.
This product measures the chemical components in the sample (serum, plasma, urine, and
whole blood (HbA1c only)) by mixing (stirring) the sample and reagent. Refer to the
reagent Instructions for Use for details of the measurement specifications.
Benefits and Limitations

The Beckman Coulter DxC 700 AU Clinical Chemistry Analyzer is an automated chemistry
analyzer that measures analytes in samples (patient, calibrator and quality control
material) in combination with appropriate reagents and other accessories. This system is
for in vitro diagnostic use only. Applications include colorimetric, turbidimetric, latex
agglutination, and ion selective electrode.
Related Manuals
Other documents are available with the System Help and on the Beckman Coulter website:
https://www.beckmancoulter.com/wsrportal/page/techdocSearch.
Manuals include:
• Reference Manual
• ISE Addendums (Japan Only)
• Reagent instructions
B71495AF xxxix
Introduction
Related Manuals
xl B71495AF
CHAPTER 1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
This section provides a description and diagram with location of each hardware component
and module.
Hardware Component Overview
Figure 1.1 Hardware Overview (Top and Front View)
1. Status light 10. Operation buttons

2. Reagent transfer components 11. Syringe components
3. Photometry component 12. ISE Module (option)
4. Mix bar component 13. Wash solution reservoir
5. Cuvette wheel component 14. Diluted wash solution tank
6. Sample transfer component 15. Deionized water tank
7. Rack feeder module 16. 5L wash solution tank
8. STAT table 17. Reagent refrigerator components
9. Monitor arm 18. Upper cover
B71495AF 1-1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Note
The rack feeder module is not installed with the DxC 700 AU when the DxC 700 AU
connects to a Laboratory Automation System.
Figure 1.2 Hardware Overview (Side and Back View)
1. Breakers 3. Water supply and drain connections

2. Power supply component 4. DIAG button (yellow)
Breakers
The main system breaker circuit board allows the power in specific areas of the system to
be isolated. The main breaker (main power switch) automatically shuts down all the
breaker switches. In normal conditions, all of the breaker switches are in the on position.
1-2 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.3 Breakers
1. Sub breakers 2. Main breaker
Main breaker and sub breakers are on the left side of the analyzer module.
Operation Buttons
Figure 1.4
1. ON button (Green) 4. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button

2. RESET button (White) 5. STAT START button
3. ANALYZER STOP button (Black) 6. STAT TABLE ROTATION LED
The following list describes the operation buttons in more detail.
B71495AF 1-3
System Overview
Hardware Overview
1. ON button (green) - The ON button turns on the analyzer and computer, and the system
initializes.
2. RESET button (white) - The RESET button supplies the main power to the system, and is
used after the ANALZYER STOP button was pressed or a power failure occurred. To be
sure there is correct synchronization after the ANALYZER STOP button was pressed, turn
off the computer by performing an End Process. In rare cases, an End Process takes a
long time or cannot be performed because there is no response from the analyzer. In
these cases, select Ctrl + Alt + Delete, then select Shutdown to turn off the computer. To
reboot the system, press the RESET button, and then press the ON button. After pressing
the ANALYZER STOP button, wait 5 seconds before pressing the RESET button, then wait
5 seconds before pressing the ON button. The RESET button also resets the Power
Failure Detected event by clearing the existing event and resetting the event for
notification at the next power failure.
3. ANALYZER STOP button (black)- The ANALYZER STOP button immediately stops the
operation of the analyzer.
4. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button (Diagnostic and Table Rotation) - The DIAG/TABLE
ROTATION button rotates the STAT table for loading samples on the STAT table. In the
Maintenance menu, this button initiates the maintenance or diagnostic function.
5. STAT START button - The STAT START button starts the Quick STAT operation (for STAT
table analysis).
6. STAT TABLE ROTATION LED (amber LED) - This light is located above the STAT START
button and the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button, and is on or blinks when the STAT table is
busy.
(Not pictured) TRAY ROTATION button - The TRAY ROTATION button rotates the reagent trays
when loading reagents in MEASURE mode. For more information, refer to Reagent
Refrigerator Component or Replace or Add Reagents in MEASURE Mode.
(Not pictured) ROTATION LED (amber LED) - The ROTATION LEDs are located above the TRAY
ROTATION button, and are on or blink when the reagent components are busy.
(Not pictured) DIAG button (yellow) - The DIAG button (yellow) is located at the center in
the rear of the analyzer module. In the Maintenance menu, this button initiates the
maintenance or diagnostic function.
Status Light
The status light indicates the analyzer mode by color. For red, the LED blinks. For green,
yellow, and blue, the LED is on steadily.
Table 1.1 Status Light Indication of Analyzer Mode
Color of Status Light Analyzer Mode
Red (LED is blinking) STOP
Green (LED is on) INITIAL, WARM UP, MEASURE 1, MEASURE 2,

Reset, End
Yellow (LED is on) PAUSE, REAGENT PAUSE
Blue (LED is on) STANDBY
1-4 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Table 1.1 Status Light Indication of Analyzer Mode (Continued)

Color of Status Light Analyzer Mode
Off (LED is off) The System power is off; INITIAL
For a description of the analyzer modes, refer to Analyzer Modes.
Important
If you cannot see colors or have difficulty seeing colors correctly, use the monitor
instead of the status light to confirm the analyzer mode.
Note
At the beginning of INITIAL mode, the status light is off for a maximum of 3 minutes.
Note
Change in the appearance of the status light might lag a maximum of 20 seconds
behind the real change in the analyzer mode.
Rack Feeder Module

This module is for loading and unloading racks.
Racks are loaded on the rack input area. A bar code reader reads the rack ID and sample ID,
and the information is automatically transferred to the system computer. Covers prevent
dirt or dust from getting into samples during analysis. Keep the upper cover closed during
normal operation. Keep the covers over the rack input area closed when you are not using
the system.
Note
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, the system is not
installed with a rack feeder module.
B71495AF 1-5
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.5 Top View of Rack Feeder Module
1. Surface where rack ID label is applied 5. Rack

2. Window for rack ID bar code reader 6. Window for sample ID bar code reader
3. Top cover 7. Bar code reader laser radiation (Sample
4. Rack input area ID)
Table 1.2 Sample ID Bar Code Reader Specifications
Item Specification
Wavelength 650 nm or 655 nm
Maximum output 85 μW
Pulse width 112 μS
Frequency 500 Hz
Class 2
STAT Table
Use the STAT table to process priority STAT samples. The STAT table is the fastest method
for processing a sample.
The STAT table compartment is maintained between 4 °C and 12 °C even after you turn off
the system using an End Process.
The STAT table has 22 outer positions for processing patient samples, calibrators, and
control samples, and 8 inner positions for performing ISE calibration, ISE maintenance
procedures, and reagent blank.
1-6 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Caution
To avoid injury, do not touch or open the STAT table cover while the amber STAT
TABLE ROTATION LED is blinking.
Figure 1.6 STAT Table (Top View)
1. Sample cup 5. STAT TABLE ROTATION LED

2. STAT table 6. STAT START button
3. Small STAT table cover 7. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button
4. Window for sample ID bar code reader 8. Bar code reader laser radiation
Table 1.3 STAT Table Bar Code Reader Specifications
Item Specification
Maximum output 85 μW
Pulse width 112 µS
Frequency 500 Hz
Class 2
Table 1.4 STAT TABLE ROTATION LED Status

LED Description
Quick Blink The STAT table rotates before sample aspiration. The sample probe moves over to
the STAT table.
B71495AF 1-7
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Table 1.4 STAT TABLE ROTATION LED Status (Continued)

LED Description
Slow Blink The STAT table is in waiting mode. The STAT table remains in waiting mode when the
analyzer is in MEASURE mode if:
• Contamination parameters for sample probe carryover are programmed.

• Reagent blank or calibrators are programmed on the STAT table.
• Cyclic QC after a defined quantity of tests or samples is programmed on the
STAT table.
Important
An event is generated if the small STAT table cover is opened when the STAT TABLE
ROTATION LED is blinking. Do not open the large STAT table cover before the system
completes the sample dispensing from racks in the sample transfer lane or samples in
the STAT table. If you open the cover too soon, the system goes into STOP mode.
Figure 1.7 STAT Table (Top View)
Table 1.5 STAT Table Positions

Position Sample
No.1 to No.22 Patient samples, calibrators, and control samples
S-H ISE High Serum Standard
S-L ISE Low Serum Standard
U-H ISE High Urine Standard
U-L ISE Low Urine Standard
CRS-H ISE Certified Reference Standard Solution H (Japan only)
1-8 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Table 1.5 STAT Table Positions (Continued)

Position Sample
CRS-M ISE Certified Reference Standard Solution M (Japan only)
CRS-L ISE Certified Reference Standard Solution L (Japan only)
CLEAN ISE Cleaning Solution
SEL-K ISE Selectivity Check Solution (K)
SEL-Na ISE Selectivity Check Solution (Na)
RB-1, RB-2 Reagent Blank
Note
When you program bar code mode for the STAT table, the STAT table can only read bar
code labels on samples placed on the outer positions of the STAT table.
Note
Always keep the large and small STAT table covers closed to maintain the temperature
and sample integrity. Although the STAT table compartment is cooled, do not use it to
store samples or leave samples for an extended time.
Note
Only open the small STAT table cover to add or remove samples as required. Excessive
opening and closing can damage the cover hinges.
Note
Patient samples include rerun samples. The system does not provide specific STAT table
positions to rerun samples. You assign the STAT table positions to both first-run and
rerun samples as Patient in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table
Setting [F6]).
Sample Transfer Component

The sample probe detects liquid levels and dispenses samples and diluent. The sample
probe has downward collision detection and clot detection. Sample is aspirated from the
tube or cup and dispensed into the cuvette. The sample probe is rinsed with deionized
water internally and externally in the sample probe wash well between each sample that is
dispensed. The whole blood wash well is designed and used for whole blood to perform
adequate cleaning of the sample probe.
When there is an ISE module installed, sample is aspirated from the tube or cup and
dispensed into the ISE sample pot for analysis.
B71495AF 1-9
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.8 Sample Transfer Component
1. Sample probe 3. Whole blood wash well

2. Wash well
Caution
Open and close the analyzer cover by using the handle located at the bottom of the
cover. Use caution when closing it because of the pinching action of the adjoining
portions of the cover.
Reagent Transfer Component

The two reagent probes (R1 and R2 probes) detect liquid levels and dispense reagents and
diluent. The reagent probes have downward collision detection. Reagent is aspirated from
the R1 and R2 refrigerators and dispensed into the cuvette. The probes are rinsed with
deionized water internally and externally in the reagent probe wash well between each
reagent that is dispensed.
1-10 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.9 Reagent Transfer Components
1. R2 Reagent Probe 3. R1 Reagent Probe

2. Wash wells
Mix Bar Component

Mix bars are used to mix the reagent and sample in the cuvette. The R1/S mix bar
component contains six mix bars, and a mix occurs after R1 and sample are dispensed. The
R2 mix bar component contains three mix bars, and a third mix occurs after the R2 is
dispensed. After mixing in the cuvette, the mix bars are cleaned in diluted wash solution,
then rinsed in deionized water in the wash wells.
Figure 1.10 Mix Bar Component
B71495AF 1-11
System Overview
Hardware Overview
1. R1/S mix bar component 3. Mix bar wash wells

2. R2 mix bar component
Cuvette Wheel Component

The incubation bath keeps the reaction temperature of the cuvettes at 37 °C. A cuvette is
made from optical glass.
Figure 1.11 Cuvette Wheel Component
1. Cuvette wheel
The cuvette wheel contains a total of 165 cuvettes in a single wheel. The wash nozzle
component automatically cleans the cuvettes. The weekly photocal maintenance procedure
monitors the cuvette integrity. From photocal results, clean and replace cuvettes as
required.
Caution
Cuvettes with the same outer dimensions might have different interior dimensions.
The DxC 700 AU uses cuvette PN MU846500 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 5
mm. These cuvettes are different from the other AU systems. Do not use a cuvette
from another AU system on the DxC 700 AU. Use of a cuvette other than the DxC 700
AU cuvette on the DxC 700 AU causes erroneous results.
Figure 1.12 Cuvette Interior Dimensions
1-12 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
1. For DxC 700 AU (PN MU846500 5 mm x 5 2. Example for other AU system

mm)
Cuvettes are continuously monitored in MEASURE mode by the real-time water blank check
method. The real-time water blank check method compares the water blank reading
obtained during analysis to the previous water blank reading. If the water blank reading
check fails the specification, the system generates a Photometry Error During Cuvette
Wash event. If the system detects a cuvette overflow and unstable photometry, the system
generates a Photometry Error During Cuvette Wash event. For more information,
refer to Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Event.
Photometry Component
The photometry component includes a halogen lamp, lenses, a diffraction grating, and a
photodetector to measure the amount of light transmitted through the reaction mixture in
the cuvette. The diffraction grating splits the light into 13 wavelengths.
Figure 1.13 Photometry Component
1. Lamp
Warning
Never touch the photometer lamp or look directly into the photometer lamp when
the lamp is illuminated. The lamp is hot when the system is on.
Wash Nozzle Component

The wash nozzle component cleans, rinses, and dries the cuvettes automatically. The wash
nozzle component includes six wash nozzles, one aspiration nozzle, and two dry nozzles.
B71495AF 1-13
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Each wash nozzle is a 3-way nozzle used to clean the cuvettes. The longest nozzle aspirates
liquid, the middle nozzle dispenses, and the shortest nozzle aspirates any overflow liquid.
The aspiration nozzle aspirates any remaining liquid in the cuvette. The dry nozzle uses the
fluorocarbon polymer tip to bring any remaining moisture to the bottom of the cuvette,
then aspirates to dry the interior of the cuvette completely.
Figure 1.14 Wash Nozzle Component
1. Dry nozzle 3. Wash nozzles

2. Aspiration nozzle
The dispensing sequence of the wash nozzles, from right to left in the diagram:
• Nozzle 1 and 2 - Diluted Wash Solution
• Nozzle 3 to 6 - Warm deionized water
• Nozzle 7 - Aspiration
• Nozzle 8 and 9 - Drying
1-14 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.15 Wash Nozzle
1. Wash nozzle 5. Dry nozzle

2. Overflow nozzle 6. Drying tip
3. Liquid (diluted wash solution and warm 7. Aspiration nozzle
deionized water) dispense nozzle
4. Liquid (reaction, diluted wash solution,
and warm deionized water) aspirating
nozzle
Reagent Refrigerator Component

The R1 refrigerator contains the first reagent (R1), and the R2 refrigerator contains the
second reagent (R2). Even when an End Process is performed, the temperature of the
refrigerators is maintained between 4°C (39.2 °F) and 12°C (53.6 °F).
Place the reagent bottle on the corresponding tray (R1 or R2) in the R1 refrigerator or R2
refrigerator.
The R1 refrigerator has 60 positions and the R2 refrigerator has 48 positions. Each
refrigerator uses applicable adapters or partitions for various sizes of reagent bottles: 15
mL, 30 mL, 60 mL, and 120 mL.
Each bottle position can be designated as reagent ID (bar code labeled) or fixed (not bar
code labeled). During a reagent check, reagent bottles are detected, reagent IDs are read,
and reagent volume is calculated.
B71495AF 1-15
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.16 Reagent Refrigerators
1. R2 refrigerator cover 4. R1 refrigerator small cover

2. R1 refrigerator cover 5. R2 refrigerator
3. R2 refrigerator small cover 6. R1 refrigerator
Important
Confirm that the reagent bottles are placed in the refrigerator with the reagent ID
facing outwards. Confirm that all reagent bottle caps are removed before placing them
in the refrigerator.
Syringe Component
This system has a sample syringe (S), and two reagent syringes(R1 and R2). If the ISE
module is installed, the system has a syringe for the ISE Buffer Solution. Syringes are used
to dispense the required volume of sample or reagent.
A wash syringe dispenses deionized water for the internal sample probe wash.
1-16 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.17 Syringe Locations
1. Reagent syringe (R2) (blue) 4. Sample syringe (yellow)

2. Reagent syringe (R1) (blue) 5. Wash syringe (blue)
3. ISE buffer syringe
Tank Storage
The tank storage area has a deionized water tank, a wash solution tank, a wash solution
reservoir, and a diluted wash solution tank.
The system uses diluted wash solution (1%) to clean the cuvettes and mix bars. The system
uses deionized water to dilute the wash solution, rinse analyzer components, and make
dilutions.
B71495AF 1-17
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.18 Tank Locations
1. Wash solution tank (5L) 3. Diluted wash solution tank

2. Deionized water tank 4. Wash solution reservoir (2L)
Diluted Wash Solution Tank
The diluted wash solution tank has a capacity of 2 liters. A float sensor detects when the
volume in the tank is low. The tank automatically fills with wash solution from the wash
solution reservoir and deionized water to make the diluted wash solution (1%).
Wash Solution Reservoir
The wash solution reservoir has a capacity of 2 liters. A float sensor detects when the
volume in the tank is low. The tank automatically fills with wash solution from the wash
solution tank.
Wash Solution Tank
The wash solution tank has a capacity of 5 liters. When the volume in the wash solution
tank decreases to a certain level, the system generates an event to alert the operator to
replace the tank with a new tank.
Deionized Water Tank
The deionized water tank has a capacity of 10 liters. A float sensor detects when the volume
in the tank is low and opens a valve to fill it automatically.
Wash Solution Roller Pump

The wash solution roller pump supplies wash solution to the diluted wash solution tank
from the wash solution reservoir.
1-18 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.19 Wash Solution Roller Pump
1. Roller pump tubing 3. Connectors

2. Wash solution roller pump
ISE Module (Optional)

Diluted sample passes through the Na, K, and Cl ion selective electrodes to determine the
concentration by comparing the electrical potential difference to the REF electrode.
The system has a common sample probe and sample syringe for photometric and ISE
analysis.
Figure 1.20 ISE Module
1. Mixing component 2. Sample pot

B71495AF 1-19
System Overview
Hardware Overview
3. Cl electrode 7. Pinch valve

4. Na electrode 8. Mixture aspiration roller pump
5. K electrode 9. MID Standard roller pump
6. REF electrode
• Mixing component - The mixing component mixes sample and ISE Buffer Solution
dispensed into the sample pot. It has two liquid-level sensors to detect correct
drainage.
• Sample pot - Sample and ISE Buffer Solution are dispensed into the sample pot and
mixed. The volumes dispensed for serum and urine:
— ISE Buffer Solution: 618 µL (fixed)
— Sample: 20 µL (fixed)
— Deionized water: 10 µL (fixed)
• Cl electrode, Na electrode, and K electrode - These electrodes are used for measuring
the potential of Cl, Na, and K ions in the sample and ISE MID Standard Solution. The
concentrations of individual ions in the sample can be calculated from the potential
differences between each ion in the sample and in the ISE MID Standard Solution.
• REF electrode - This electrode is the reference electrode for the Cl, Na, and K
electrodes.
• Pinch valve - The pinch valve has two functions:
— Allows sample in the sample pot to enter the flow cell for measurement.
— Allows excess sample to pass through the bypass tubing to waste.
• Roller pump
— Mixture Aspiration Roller Pump (pump is on the right):
— Aspirates liquid from the sample pot through the flow cell or bypass tubing
and out to waste.
— Aspirates ISE Reference Solution from the ISE Reference Solution bottle past
the REF electrode and out to waste.
— MID Standard Roller Pump (pump on left):
— Aspirates ISE MID Standard Solution from the ISE MID Standard Solution
bottle to the sample pot.
• Roller pump tubing - The roller pump tubing is made of rubber and wraps around the
roller pump. As the roller pump rotates, the rollers on the pump squeeze the tubing,
and solution is supplied or removed.
ISE Reagent Bottles
The ISE has an ISE Buffer Solution bottle, ISE MID Standard Solution bottle, and ISE
Reference Solution bottle.
1-20 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.21 ISE Reagent Bottles
1. ISE Reference Solution bottle 3. ISE Buffer Solution bottle

2. ISE MID Standard Solution bottle 4. ISE operation LED
• ISE Buffer Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE Buffer Solution. The system uses
the ISE Buffer Solution for diluting the sample. The capacity of this container is 2 liters.
• ISE MID Standard Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE MID Standard Solution.
The system uses the ISE MID Standard Solution to condition the electrodes between
analysis. The capacity of this container is 2 liters.
• ISE Reference Solution bottle - This bottle stores the ISE Reference Solution. The
system uses the ISE Reference Solution as a reference point relative to the three
electrodes. The capacity of this container is 1 liter.
• ISE operation LED - This LED blinks while the system is in MEASURE mode. You cannot
replace ISE reagent bottles while the ISE operation LED is blinking. You can replace ISE
reagent bottles when the ISE operation LED is off, for example, when in STANDBY,
WARM UP, PAUSE, or REAGENT PAUSE mode.
Console
The console is available as an option for the DxC 700 AU and is used when the DxC 700 AU
connects to a Laboratory Automation System. For a standalone DxC 700 AU, the computer is
located in the rack feeder module, and the monitor, keyboard, and manual bar code reader
are attached to the side of the rack feeder module with a monitor arm.
B71495AF 1-21
System Overview
Hardware Overview
Figure 1.22 Console
1. Keyboard 4. Manual bar code reader

2. Monitor 5. Computer
3. Mouse
Monitor
The monitor displays the operating software, and the keyboard and mouse allow operator
input.
Computer
The system uses a personal computer to perform data processing. The computer includes a
hard disk to store programs, analysis parameters, an analysis database, USB drives, and a
DVD R/W component. An external hard disk option is also available.
Printer (Optional)
You can output results in operator-defined reports or lists.
Manual Bar Code Reader
The manual bar code reader reads bar code labels for input to the software. You can scan a
sample ID in the Sample ID field in the Test Order tab (TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order or
STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order).
You can scan the 2-dimensional bar code on the calibrator value assignment sheet to load
the calibration information, including concentration values, on the system. You can scan the
bar code label located on the ISE reagent bottle when you replace the ISE reagent.
1-22 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Touch Screen, Mouse, and Keyboard

You can operate the system in any combination of the touch screen, mouse, or keyboard.
Figure 1.23 Operation Keys on the Keyboard
1. ESC key 9. Num Lock lamp (along with Caps Lock and
2. Function keys Scroll Lock lamps)
3. Start key 10. Num Lock key
4. Pause key 11. Stop or Standby key
5. Stop Feeder key 12. Home key
6. Print Screen key 13. End Process key
7. Menu List key 14. Numeric key pad
8. Event Clear key 15. ↑, ↓, ←, → keys
Software Overview
Minimum Software Requirements

Software usage environment: Use only on the PC included with this product.
To use this product safely, refer to the following chapters for more information:
• Safety Notice section - Safety Precautions for safe and accurate analysis.
• Appendix B - End User License Agreement and Open Source Software Notice.
B71495AF 1-23
System Overview
Software Overview
Organization of Operation
The interface contains six areas: the navigation button area, action button area, status area,
event log display area, main workspace, and sub workspace.
Figure 1.24 Home Screen
1. Navigation button area 6. Sub workspace

2. Main workspace 7. Select << to return to the previous screen.
3. Action button area (blue buttons) If the previous screen has multiple tabs,
4. Event display area the system displays the screen for the tab
5. Status area (green and white sections) on the left.
The following list describes the six areas of the interface in more detail.
1. Navigation button area - The display area for the navigation buttons (HOME (Home),
MENU (Menu List), RESULT (Results), TEST (Test Order), STAT (STAT Status), REAGENT
(Reagent), MAINT. (Maintenance), QC (Quality Control), CONFIG. (Configuration
Parameters), EVENT (Event Log), BROWSER (Browser), HELP (Help), END (End), and
LOGOUT (Logout)).
2. Main workspace - The display and operation for the selected menu or button.
3. Action button area - The display area for the action buttons (Start, Pause, Stop Feeder,
Stop/Reset, and Start STAT).
4. Event display area - The display area for the event generated during system operations,
and the Event Clear button.
5. Status area - The display area for the analyzer mode and the status of the printer, the
LIS connection, and PROService.
6. Sub workspace - The display area for USER MENU, ERROR MESSAGES, EVENT DETAILS,
NOTEPAD, and System Help.
1-24 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Navigation Button Area

Table 1.6 Navigation Button Area
Button Name Description
Home Displays the Home screen.
HOME
Menu List Displays the Menu List screen.
MENU
Results Displays the Results: Sample Status screen.
RESULT
Test Order Displays the Sample Program: Rack (Patient) screen.
TEST
STAT Status Displays the STAT: STAT Status screen
STAT
Reagent Displays the Reagent: Reagent Management screen
REAGENT
Maintenance Displays the Maintenance: Analyzer Maintenance screen.
MAINT.
Quality Control Displays the Quality Control: Chart screen
QC
Configuration Displays the Configuration Parameters screen.

Parameters
CONFIG.
Event Log Displays the Event Log screen.
EVENT
B71495AF 1-25
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.6 Navigation Button Area (Continued)

Browser Connects to the Beckman Coulter website.
BROWSER
Help Displays an explanation in the system help of the current

software view.
HELP
End Shuts down the system (End Process). Shutting down the
system turns off the auxiliary power supply, including the
lamp and computer.
END
Logout Logs out and logs in an operator.
The user name who currently logs on is displayed to the left

LOGOUT of the icon.
12/27/2015 11:16:16 Time Display Displays the current date and time.
area
A button that is gray indicates that the menu item is functioning normally. Select a button
that is yellow or red to review any problems related to the menu item.
Action Button Area

Table 1.7 Action Button Area
Start Starts analysis.
Pause Pauses analysis. The system pauses at the first test for which no R1
reagent is dispensed.
Stop Stops transportation of racks from the rack input area. The system
Feeder keeps analyzing samples in racks that have already been transported
from the rack input area.
Stop Stops analysis. The Stop button switches to the Reset button after
being selected.
Reset Puts the system back to STANDBY mode from STOP mode. The Reset
button switches to the Stop button after being selected.
Start STAT Starts STAT analysis.
1-26 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Main Workspace
The main workspace is the display and operation area for the screen that is selected, for
example, the STAT (Patient) screen.
Figure 1.25 Main Workspace for STAT (Patient) Screen
1. Screen button area 4. Operation area

2. Tab button area 5. Function button area
3. Previous and Next
Table 1.8 Main Workspace Areas

Name Description
Screen button area The buttons that open the screens that are used for the menu item. Select a
button to open a screen.
Above the screen button area, the main workspace displays breadcrumb
navigation text and double arrows that take you back in sequence to screens
that you recently visited.
Tab button area If the screen has sub menus, the system displays them in tabs. You can move
through the tabs to perform various changes to the values for the screen.
Previous and Next The buttons that move to previous or next object.
B71495AF 1-27
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.8 Main Workspace Areas (Continued)

Name Description
Operation area The operation screen for the selected screen or tab.
Note
Some screens might include a long, oval, blue button at the top
right of the operation area that allows you to go directly to a
screen that provides functions related to the current screen.
Function button area The function buttons. The number in square brackets [Fx] corresponds to the
function key on the keyboard. For a description of the function buttons in the
main workspace, refer to Table 1.10 Home Screen Main Workspace Function
Buttons.
Main Workspace Function Buttons

You can find descriptions of function buttons for particular screens or tabs in the
instructions for the procedures that use them. For the Home screen, refer to the following
table.
Table 1.9 Home Screen Main Workspace Function Buttons
Name Description
Create Index [F1] Displays the Create Index dialog, where you can create a new index or load an
existing one.
For more information, refer to Create a New Index.
Change Operator [F2] Displays the Change Operator dialog, where you can enter a new operator
name or select a pre-programmed comment to append to lists that you print.
For example, refer to Print Results. From the Change Operator dialog, you can
access the Default Start Sample No. dialog, where you can set the first number
that is selectable for sample numbers when ordering tests.
Enter the initials or name of the operator performing a maintenance

procedure to record the initials or name in the Maintenance screen. For more
information, refer to Program the Operator Name.
Realtime Online [F6] Displays the Realtime Online dialog, where you can pause or resume realtime
communication with the LIS. You can access this button only when you
program TCP/IP for System Maintenance. Use this button to pause realtime
communication with the LIS and manually order tests. To resume realtime
communication with the LIS, select this button again in STANDBY mode.
Disabled Tests [F7] Displays the Disabled Tests dialog, where you can prevent a test from being
performed on patient samples even after the test has been ordered.
For more information, refer to Disable a Test.
1-28 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.9 Home Screen Main Workspace Function Buttons (Continued)

Name Description
About DxC 700 AU [F8] Displays the About DxC 700 AU dialog, which displays software version,
copyright, trademark, and patent information about the product.
Status Area and Analyzer Modes

Table 1.10 Status Area
Name Description
Analyzer Mode Displays the current mode. The system displays the time to completion for some
maintenance procedures. After finishing all sample and reagent dispense for ordered
tests in MEASURE 2 mode, the system displays the time to completion.
Printer Displays the printer status.
LIS Displays the LIS status.
PROService Displays the PROService status.
Analyzer Modes
The system displays the analyzer modes in the status area. For example:
Table 1.11 Analyzer Modes

Mode Background Description
color
INITIAL Red Displays INITIAL after you press the ON button. The software loads and
the hardware initializes.
RESET Displays RESET after you select Reset. The system initializes the
analyzer, then goes to STANDBY mode.
STOP STOP mode occurs when there is a system error, or when you select
Stop. You cannot start the analyzer from STOP mode. To return to
STANDBY mode, select Stop. The mode displays as RESET while the
hardware is initializing, then it goes to STANDBY. Rerun all tests that are
in progress.
WARM UP Green After the system initializes, the system changes the mode to WARM UP
for approximately 20 minutes to allow the lamp to warm up and
stabilize.
STANDBY When the system is ready to perform sample analysis, the mode
changes to STANDBY. You can start analysis.
MEASURE 1 MEASURE 1 mode occurs when you select Start. Racks are on the rack
input area, and the racks move to the sample aspiration position.
MEASURE 2 MEASURE 2 mode occurs when there are no more racks on the rack
input area. To start more racks, select Start.
B71495AF 1-29
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.11 Analyzer Modes (Continued)

Mode Background Description
color
PAUSE Yellow PAUSE mode occurs when there is a system error or when you select
Pause. You can restart analysis from PAUSE mode by selecting Start.
The system completes all the tests that are in progress before
completely shifting to PAUSE mode, and displays MEASURE >> PAUSE in
the status area. It takes a maximum of 20 minutes.
REAGENT REAGENT PAUSE mode occurs when you select REAGENT > Load [F2]
PAUSE for loading reagent bottles on the analyzer, or select REAGENT > ISE >
Replace ISE Reagent [F1] for loading ISE reagent bottles. You can load
reagent bottles in this mode during analysis.
Event Display Area

In the event display area, the system displays the most recent event generated. Select Event
Clear to clear all events. When cleared from the event display area, view events from the
Event Log screen. For more information about the Event Log screen, refer to Using the
System Help Quick Start Page and Event Log.
Sub Workspace
The tabs in the sub workspace provide various useful functions.
USER MENU Tab

Shortcut buttons allow you to go directly to the most frequently accessed screens.
ERROR MESSAGES Tab

In the ERROR MESSAGES tab, the system displays messages regarding system conditions
that can affect analysis results. Background color indicates the severity of the message.
Table 1.12 Background Colors in the ERROR MESSAGES Tab
Color Definition
Red You cannot start analysis until you address the message.
Note
A red message or highlight on the analyzer component indicates

a condition that prevents you from starting the analyzer.
Yellow You can start analysis. Review the message carefully and take the corrective
action.
To display a dialog with information and the corrective actions for the message, select the
message. Select OK to go to the screen and take corrective actions, or select Cancel to close
the dialog.
1-30 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
EVENT DETAILS Tab

When you select an event in the Event Log screen, the system displays full message
information in the EVENT DETAILS tab, including actions that the system performs in
response to the event and corrective actions for the operator. For more information about
the Event Log screen, refer to Using the System Help Quick Start Page and Event Log.
NOTEPAD Tab
The NOTEPAD tab allows the operator to write any text memo. For example, you can leave
instructions for the next operator or leave a reminder for yourself.
The system saves the text that you enter as a text file that is saved even after rebooting the
computer.
Using the System Help, Quick Start Page, and Event Log
Figure 1.26 Help, Event Clear, and Event Log Buttons
1. Event Log button 3. Event clear button

2. Help button
B71495AF 1-31
System Overview
Software Overview
Table 1.13 Types of Help

Option Description
HELP Button System help
Select the system HELP button to display a system help explanation of the
current software view. The system help is displayed in a web browser window
on the right-hand side of the screen.
The system help window also contains the IFU, the Reference Manual, and
other related manuals.
Videos: Knowledge where you want it
In the Maintenance chapter of the system help IFU, some steps in the
maintenance procedures include short video demonstrations to accompany the
text. Select the Play/Pause button in a video window to view the video.
EVENT Button Displays the Event Log screen. In the EVENT DETAILS tab in the sub workspace,
the system displays the event description and the corrective actions. Select the
event to display the event description and the corrective action in the EVENT
DETAILS tab.
Note
Event descriptions and corrective actions are only available in

the EVENT DETAILS tab. DxC 700 AU Instructions for Use and
DxC 700 AU Reference Manual do not contain such information.
Input Help Displays the allowable input information for text fields. Move the cursor over
the input area for the system to display the available range of input.
Navigation Button Displays the name of the navigation buttons. Move the cursor over the
Help navigation button for the system to display the name of the button.
Quick Start Page in the To see useful information such as the following items, refer to Quick Start.
IFU
• Links for Training and Education Resources
• How to Use the Software
• Printable Manuals
• IFU Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• Revision History
When the system help IFU is open, you can find the Quick Start page at the
beginning of the Table of Contents.
System Help
When you select the system HELP button, the system help is displayed with an explanation
of the current software view. The system help is displayed inside a web browser. Within
system help, you can explore the entire IFU, Reference Manual, and related manuals.
1-32 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Figure 1.27 System Help Components
1. Navigation pane 3. Additional controls

2. Information pane
Responsive System Help Display
The arrangement of system help components changes according to the size of the system
help display. At larger sizes, all the system help components are visible.
When the system help area is smaller, the navigation pane moves out of view to show more
of the information pane. To view the navigation pane, select the system help menu button.
The navigation pane moves into view. To close the navigation pane, select the system help
menu button again.
B71495AF 1-33
System Overview
Software Overview
Figure 1.28 Hide and Show the Navigation Pane
1. System help menu button 3. Navigation pane

2. Information pane
Navigation Controls
To help you find the information you need, navigation controls are available in the
informational content, and in the web browser controls.
1-34 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Figure 1.29 Navigation Controls
1. Home page 6. Print

2. Navigation pane 7. Toggle search highlighting
3. Related links 8. Next topic
4. Breadcrumb links 9. Previous topic
5. Search bar
Home
If you select the Beckman Coulter logo, the home page of the document is displayed.
Navigation Pane
The navigation pane contains the table of contents, a Glossary (if available), an Index (if
available), and a Search function. When you select items in the Contents, Glossary, or Index,
the information is displayed in the information pane.
Related Links
Pages can contain convenient links at the bottom of the page that allow you to view related
information.
B71495AF 1-35
System Overview
Software Overview
• When a series of procedures must be performed in a particular order, a Next and

Previous link may display. These links allow quick access to the required procedures in
a series.
• A list of links related to the current topic may display.
• The Parent topic, or higher-level topic usually is displayed on every topic.
Breadcrumb Links
Indicate the location of the topic currently appearing in the information pane.
The breadcrumb links allow you to select higher-level subjects related to the current topic.
Select any breadcrumb link to open its topic.
Previous/Next
Previous and Next buttons allow you to view the previous and next pages in the document.
Search Bar
The search bar allows you to find content in a document by typing in one or more words
and selecting the Search button. A list of pages is displayed from which you can choose. The
search words you entered display highlighted in the text of the pages that contain those
words.
Note
To hide or show the highlighted search terms, select the "Toggle Search Highlighting"
button.
Web Browser Controls
The web browser that contains system help includes additional navigation controls that you
can use to return to the information you need quickly.
Favorites
To find frequently used information easily, add it to your Favorites. To add a favorite link,
navigate to the page you want. Then select the Favorites button . When prompted, you
can also locate or add a Favorites folder to contain your favorite links.
Tabs
To keep multiple pages of information available, you can add a tab for each page. To add a
tab, select an existing tab. With the mouse, right-click on the tab and select Duplicate Tab. A
new tab is displayed. Navigate to the information you need. Select any available tab to
switch between pages of information.
1-36 B71495AF
1
System Overview
Software Overview
Web Browser Size
You can move and resize the web browser to make information larger or easier to view.
• To fill the screen with the web browser, select the Maximize button .
• To return the browser to the previous size, select the Restore button .
• To resize the browser window manually, select the border of the browser window and
drag it to a new position.
• To hide the browser window completely, select the Close button .
Videos
Videos are displayed in the system help version of the IFU.
The videos are displayed directly in the system help IFU text, for example to explain a step
in a procedure. Select the play button at the bottom of a video window to view the video.
Videos do not display in the Acrobat PDF version of the IFU. In the PDF version of the IFU, a
message is displayed to indicate where video is available in the system help, like this
example:
Refer to the video in system help.
B71495AF 1-37
System Overview
Software Overview
1-38 B71495AF
CHAPTER 2
Daily Startup
Introduction
These procedures confirm that your system has adequate supplies and calibrated reagent
for your patient sample run, and include maintenance steps and quality control procedures
for continued optimal performance.
Startup Procedure
1 Turn on the System

2 Create a New Index
3 Perform Daily Inspections and Preparations
4 Inspect the Analyzer Status
5 Perform the ISE Startup (Option)
6 Monitor the Reagent Status
7 Calibrate Tests
8 Process Quality Control (QC)
9 Start Analysis
Turn on the System

If the system is on, proceed to Create a New Index.
1 Press the ON button (green) on the front of the analyzer module.

The computer loads the software and initializes the system. The system goes to WARM
UP mode for approximately 20 minutes, and then goes to STANDBY.
2 If the system shut down without an End Process command, the system displays the
System Start dialog.
3 If the system displays the System Start dialog, select OK.

If your laboratory requires an operator to log in, the system displays the Log on dialog.
B71495AF 2-1
Daily Startup
Turn on the System
Figure 2.1 Log on Dialog
4 Enter the user name and password, and select OK.

The system displays the New Index dialog.
Figure 2.2 New Index Dialog
5 Select New Index.

The system displays the current date and time in the New Index field.
Note
To set a new index by date and time, select the date and time in New Index.
6 In Group of Tests, select the group of tests for processing.
7 Select OK.
Create a New Index
Note
If you set a new index in Turn on the System, proceed to Perform Daily Inspections and
Preparations.
If your system is on, use this procedure to create an index and select a group of tests for
processing.
An index is a data file identified by the date and time and used to retrieve reagent blank,
calibration, QC, and patient results. Create an index daily, on each shift, or as needed.
A maximum of 100,000 samples or 300 indexes can be saved on the hard drive. A maximum
of 9,999 samples can be processed in an index.
1 Select HOME > Create Index [F1].

2-2 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Perform Daily Inspections and Preparations
The system displays the Create Index dialog.
Figure 2.3 Create Index Dialog
2 Select New Index. The system displays the current date and time in the New Index field.
Note
To set a new index by date and time, select the date and time in New Index.
3 In Group of Tests, select the group of tests for processing.
4 Select OK.

Perform daily inspections and preparations to maintain system performance and safety.
Warning
Performing daily inspections and preparations can expose you to biohazards. Wear
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats.
Handle and dispose of biohazards according to laboratory procedures.
Caution
Open and close the analyzer cover by using the handle located at the bottom of the
cover. Use caution when closing it because of the pinching action of the adjoining
portions of the cover.
B71495AF 2-3
Daily Startup
Do not grab the side of the cover to close the cover.
Use the handle to open and close the cover.
1 Inspect the Syringes for Leaks

2 Inspect the Wash Solution Roller Pump for Leaks
3 Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars
4 Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottle
5 Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions
2-4 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Parts List for Daily Inspections and Preparations

Table 2.1 Parts List for Daily Inspections and Preparations
Daily Inspections and Part Part Number
Preparations Procedure
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Inspect the Wash Solution Roller - -
Pump for Leaks
Inspect the Sample Probe, Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars alcohol)
Replace the Deionized Water or Deionized water or diluent -
Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottle
Replace the Sample Probe Wash 2% Wash solution ODR2000 (4x5L) or OSR0001
Solutions (6x2L)
Sodium hypochlorite solution
• 66039 (Outside Japan)
(1.0%)
• Commercial item (Japan)
• Cleaning Solution diluted
1:5 (Outside Japan)
• Sodium hypochlorite
solution (5%) diluted 1:5
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle (2 bottles) MU960500
Table 2.2 Dilution Ratio for Daily Inspection and Preparation Solutions
Solution Dilution Ratio
2% Wash solution 1:50
Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) 1:5
Caution
Prepare a fresh sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) to maintain effective cleaning.

Without effective cleaning, analysis results can be affected.
Note
Follow your laboratory procedure for replacing the diluted wash solution in the bottles.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the diluted wash solution daily.
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks

The system includes a sample syringe, a wash syringe, R1 and R2 reagent syringes. If your
system includes an ISE, the system includes an ISE buffer syringe. All syringes are located
B71495AF 2-5
Daily Startup
inside the right front door of the analyzer module. The procedure is identical for all
syringes.
The sample and reagent syringes measure the volume of sample or reagent to be used in a
reaction.
The wash syringe dispenses only deionized water for cleaning the interior of the sample
probe.
The ISE buffer syringe measures the correct volume of buffer to dilute the ISE sample.
If a syringe leaks, the leak causes possible failures to the syringe, probe, and analytes being
tested.
Although the syringes are different sizes and serve different functions, you can inspect for
correct performance using the same methods.
Inspect all components of the syringes, including the fixing nut and piston fixing screw for
leaks and correct installation.
Materials Required:
• Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue
1 Confirm that the system is in WARM UP, STANDBY, or STOP mode.

2 Open the right front door of the analyzer module.
Caution
Do not allow a strong alkali, such as the wash solution, to contact the syringe. If a
strong alkali contacts the syringe, cracks can occur.
If a strong alkali contacts the syringe, remove the syringe and rinse it with water.
3 Visually inspect each syringe for any cracks or leaks. Use the clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue to confirm that the top and bottom connections for the syringe and the
bottom fixing screw have no leaks. If you find a crack or a leak, replace the syringe. For
more information, refer to Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe, Replace the
Wash Syringe and Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case.
2-6 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.4 Syringe Locations
1. Reagent syringes (R1 and R2) (blue) 4. Wash syringe (R) (blue)
2. ISE buffer syringe 5. Possible leakage locations
3. Sample syringe (S) (yellow)
Figure 2.5 Sample Syringe Parts
1. Piston 3. Possible leakage locations

2. S syringe
B71495AF 2-7
Daily Startup
Figure 2.6 Reagent Syringe Parts
1. Piston 3. Possible leakage locations

2. R syringe
Figure 2.7 Wash Syringe Parts
1. Piston 3. R syringe
2. Seal assembly 4. Possible leakage locations
2-8 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.8 ISE Buffer Syringe
1. ISE buffer syringe 3. Case body (syringe case)

2. Case head (syringe case) 4. Possible leakage locations
4 Confirm that the fixing nuts and piston fixing screws are tight. If a leak persists after you
tighten the screws, replace the syringe.
Caution
If your skin, eyes, or mouth contact any liquid, immediately rinse the affected
area with water. Follow your laboratory procedure.
5 Close all the analyzer doors and covers.
Inspect the Wash Solution Roller Pump for Leaks

The wash solution roller pump supplies the required amount of wash solution to the
diluted wash solution tank. If the wash solution roller pump tubing leaks, the concentration
of diluted wash solution can be incorrect, or problems can occur with the wash solution
roller pump.
Materials Required:
B71495AF 2-9
Daily Startup
Caution
If your skin, eyes, or mouth contact any liquid, immediately rinse the affected area
with water. Follow your laboratory procedure.
1 Confirm that the system is in WARM UP or STANDBY mode.

2 Open the left front door of the analyzer module.
3 Inspect the wash solution roller pump tubing for cracks or leaks. If you find a crack,
replace the tubing and proceed to step 6. For more information, refer to Replace the
Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing.
1. Roller pump tubing 3. Connectors

2. Wash solution roller pump
4 Use the clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to wipe the peripheral part of the tubing
and the roller pump to inspect for leaks. Wipe any fluid with the clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
5 Confirm that the tubing connectors are tight. If a connector is loose, turn it clockwise to
tighten. Wait 5 minutes, then inspect for leaks again. If the leak persists, replace the
tubing. For more information, refer to Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing.
Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars

The probes deliver precise quantities of reagent or sample to the cuvettes.
2-10 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
The mix bars mix the contents in the cuvettes.
If the mix bars or probes are bent or damaged, or if the probes are clogged, correct analysis
cannot be achieved.
Before you begin analysis, inspect the sample probe, reagent probes, and mix bars for
damage or deterioration. Confirm that each probe operates correctly.
Materials Required:
• Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl alcohol)
Inspect the Sample Probe and Reagent Probes
1 Lift the upper cover.

2 Inspect each probe. If a probe is bent or damaged, replace the probe. For more
information, refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
3 Inspect each probe for contaminants or crystallization. If a probe is dirty, wipe the
surface with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
Important
Do not bend the probe when cleaning.
4 Confirm that the probe is aligned to the center of the wash well directly above the small
hole on the metal. If it is not, contact Beckman Coulter.
Inspect the Mix Bars
1 Inspect each mix bar. If a mix bar is bent, scratched, or there are chips in the fluororesin
coating, replace the mix bar. For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
2 Inspect each mix bar for contaminants or crystallization. If the mix bar is dirty, wipe the
mix bar with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
Confirm Operation of the Probes and Mix Bars

Prime the system to inspect the operation of the probes and mix bars.

2 Select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the Analyzer
Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
3 Select the Analyzer Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
4 Select Prime Washing Line. The system displays the Prime Washing Line dialog.
5 In Times, confirm that the value is 1.

B71495AF 2-11
Daily Startup
6 Select OK.
7 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button.

The system initializes the probes and mix bar components, then:
1. Dispenses deionized water from the sample probe

2. Dispenses deionized water from the R1 reagent probe
3. Dispenses deionized water from the R2 reagent probe
4. Activates the mix bar components and the wash nozzle component.
8 As the system dispenses water, confirm that each probe dispenses a thin, straight
stream of water, and that water flows in the wash wells.
Figure 2.10 Sample and Reagent Probes
1. Correct Flow 2. Incorrect Flow

a. If the water is spraying or dispensing at an angle, clean the probe. For more
information, refer to Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars or Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes.
b. If cleaning does not correct the problem, replace the probe. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
9 As the system activates the mix bar component, confirm that the mix bars align
correctly in the wash wells. If a mix bar does not align correctly, contact Beckman
Coulter.
10 Repeat steps 7 to 9 as required to inspect all probes and mix bars.

11 Clear the Analyzer Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution Bottle

The pre-dilution bottle is located in position 61. Diluent/W2 close to the R1 refrigerator.
1 Discard the deionized water or diluent in the pre-dilution bottle.

2 Rinse the bottle twice with deionized water.
2-12 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
3 Fill the bottle with deionized water or diluent and put the bottle back on the analyzer.
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions

The sample probe wash solution bottles are located in the positions labeled 64. Det.-1/W2
and 65. Det.-2.
For more information on materials required, refer to Parts List for Daily Inspections and
Preparations.
Materials Required:
• 2% Wash solution
• Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
• 60 mL reagent bottle (2)
Note
Sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) is only required for laboratories using the DxC 700
AU with higher than average numbers of samples or dialysis patients.
If you process an average number of samples and they are not highly viscous, fill the bottles
with approximately 50 mL:
• Position 64. Det.-1/W2: 2% wash solution
• Position 65. Det.-2: 2% wash solution
If you have a high volume of samples or use the analyzer for dialysis patient samples, fill the
bottles with approximately 50 mL:
• Position 64. Det.-1/W2: 2% wash solution
• Position 65. Det.-2: sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%)
Warning
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats,
to handle solution. If the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area
thoroughly with water. If the solution contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush
with water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
information. Follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
Caution
When using sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) as a sample probe wash solution,
follow these precautions:
• Prepare fresh sodium hypochlorite solution and completely replace the solution in the
bottle once a day.
B71495AF 2-13
Daily Startup
• If you do not plan to use the analyzer for two days or longer, remove the solution from
the analyzer and discard the solution to prevent analyzer corrosion.
• If solution spills on the analyzer, clean the area with an absorbent tissue, and wipe dry
with a clean absorbent tissue.
• Do not mix the solution with other chemicals. If the solution becomes contaminated,
follow your laboratory procedure to dispose of the solution.

2 Remove each sample probe wash solution bottle and discard the solution in the bottle.
3 Fill each bottle with approximately 50 mL of the fresh prepared solution used in your
laboratory.
4 Put the bottle back on the analyzer.

Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions (Standard Configuration)

The standard configuration uses the reagent probe cleaning solution 1 (CLN-1) bottles in
positions labeled 62.CLN-1 and 49.CLN-1, and the reagent cleaning cleaning solution 2
(CLN-2) bottles in positions labeled 63.CLN-2 and 50.CLN-2 located outside the reagent
refrigerators.
Important
This procedure applies to the system that uses 62.CLN-1 and 49.CLN-1 positions next to
the refrigerators as the reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle position. If you select
the option of the reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle position in the refrigerator,
refer to Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions (Optional Configuration).
Materials Required:
• Cleaning Solution: refer to the DxC 700 AU Reagent Contamination Prevention
Parameters document on the Beckman Coulter website.
• 60 mL reagent bottle (4)
Warning

2 Remove each reagent probe cleaning solution bottle and discard the solution in the
bottle.
2-14 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
3 Fill each bottle with approximately 50 mL of the fresh cleaning solution used in your
laboratory.
4 Put the bottles on the analyzer.

Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions (Optional Configuration)

The optional configuration uses the reagent probe cleaning solution 1 (CLN-1) bottles at
the multiple fixed positions in the reagent refrigerators, and the reagent cleaning solution 2
(CLN-2) in positions 63.CLN-2 and 50.CLN-2 located outside the reagent refrigerators. The
system does not use 62.CLN-1 and 49.CLN-1 positions located outside the reagent
refrigerators. In this configuration, more than one bottle of CLN-1 solution for each reagent
probe is required. Follow the procedure specific to your laboratory. For more information
about how to assign reagent probe cleaning solution-1 positions in the refrigerators, refer
to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Important
This procedure applies to the optional configuration for the reagent probe cleaning
solution-1 bottle position. If you select the standard position for the reagent probe
cleaning solution-1 bottle, refer to Replace the Reagent Probe Cleaning Solutions
(Standard Configuration).
Materials Required:
• Cleaning Solution: refer to the DxC 700 AU Reagent Contamination Prevention
Parameters document on the Beckman Coulter website.
• 60 mL reagent bottle (4 - 12)
The number of bottles depends on how many positions are assigned to the CLN-1
solution.
Warning
Caution
Do not set any acidic cleaning solution in the refrigerators. If any acidic solution is set
in the refrigerators, it has the potential to affect other reagents.
B71495AF 2-15
Daily Startup
Inspect the Analyzer Status
2 Remove each reagent probe cleaning solution-2 bottle from the 63.CLN-2 and 50.CLN-2
positions, and discard the solution in the bottles.
3 Fill each bottle with approximately 50 mL of the fresh cleaning solution-2 used in your
laboratory.
4 Put the bottles on the analyzer.

5 Open the R1 large refrigerator cover.
6 Remove each reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle from the R1 refrigerator and
discard the solution in the bottles.
laboratory.
8 Put the bottles into the R1 refrigerator.

9 Close the R1 large refrigerator cover.
10 Open the R2 large refrigerator cover.
11 Remove each reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle from the R2 refrigerator and
discard the solution in the bottles.
laboratory.
13 Put the bottles into the R2 refrigerator.

14 Close the R2 large refrigerator cover.

The Home screen displays a color-coded overview of the system. The system monitors the
status of the incubator, reagent refrigerators, the STAT table, deionized water tank, wash
solution tanks, waste tanks, printer, and LIS communication.
The system monitors the ISE module and reagents when the ISE module is installed.
The colors of the system components indicate the status.

Table 2.3 Analyzer Status
Color Status
Green No errors.
Yellow Non-fatal error. You can start analysis.
Red Fatal error. You cannot start analysis.
2-16 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Perform the ISE Startup (Option)
1 Select HOME.
The system displays the Home (Analyzer Status) screen.
Figure 2.11 Home (Analyzer Status) Screen
1. Analyzer top status 4. ISE reagents status

2. Rack feeder status 5. Printer, LIS, and PROService status
3. Analyzer tanks status
2 Confirm that system components are within acceptable limits (green). Investigate any
yellow or red conditions.
a. Inspect the analyzer top status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Analyzer Top Status.
b. Inspect the rack feeder status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Rack Feeder Status.
c. Inspect the analyzer tanks status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Analyzer Tanks Status.
d. Inspect the ISE reagents status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to ISE Reagents Status.
e. Inspect the printer, LIS, and PROService status. Investigate any red conditions. For
more information, refer to Printer, LIS, and PROService Status.

If your system includes an ISE module, confirm that sufficient ISE reagent is available and
perform the ISE Daily Maintenance.
1 Inspect the ISE Reagents

B71495AF 2-17
Daily Startup
2 Clean the ISE

3 Calibrate the ISE
Inspect the ISE Reagents
Important
If the volume of the ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard Solution, or ISE Reference
Solution reaches the alarm test level, the system generates an event message like the
following message: ISE xxxxxx Insufficient, where xxxxxx is the name of the ISE
reagent.
When the system generates the event, replace the reagent. For more information, refer
to Replace the ISE Reagents.
You can program the number of tests for each ISE reagent that generates the event.
Select REAGENT > Reagent Management > ISE > ISE Parameter Setting [F4]. For more
information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Note
Confirm that the ISE reagent volumes are sufficient for typical daily analysis before you
start the sample processing.
1 Select REAGENT > Reagent Management > ISE.

The system displays the Reagent Management: ISE tab.
2-18 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.12 Reagent Management: ISE Tab
1. ISE Tab 2. ISE Maintenance
2 Confirm that the ISE reagents are within the Onboard Remaining limit.
3 Confirm that the solution volume is sufficient for typical daily analysis.
4 Replace reagents as required. For more information, refer to Replace the ISE Reagents.
Replace the ISE Reagents

Replace the ISE reagents when the onboard stability expires, the reagent expires, or the
quantity of reagent is insufficient. If you need to replace all three reagents, replace them in
this order:
1. ISE Buffer Solution
2. ISE MID Standard Solution
3. ISE Reference Solution
For onboard stability claims for the ISE reagents, refer to the reagent IFU.
Caution
ISE Reference Solution is highly concentrated. Do not allow the ISE Reference Solution
(including that left in bottle, cap, and aspiration tubing) to contact the ISE Buffer
Solution or ISE MID Standard Solution.
B71495AF 2-19
Daily Startup
Caution
Do not add new reagent to existing bottles. Adding new reagent to existing bottles
can affect results.
Materials Required:
• ISE Buffer Solution
• ISE MID Standard Solution
• ISE Reference Solution

3 Select Replace ISE Reagent [F1].

The system displays the Replace ISE Reagent Dialog.
2-20 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.14 Replace ISE Reagent Dialog

5 Confirm that the ISE operation LED is off.
6 Select the Previous arrow or Next arrow to select the ISE reagent to be replaced.
7 Place the cursor in the ID field. If the cursor is not in the ID field, select ID.
8 Scan the bar code label on the bottle with a manual bar code reader.
The system displays the lot number, expiration date, and volume.
Note
If a manual bar code reader is not available, use the keyboard to enter the lot
number and expiration date.
Note
Confirm that the lot number and expiration date are consistent with the label on
the bottle.
9 Place the new bottle of reagent next to the analyzer and remove the cap.
10 Pull out the reagent bottle to replace.
Note
The system generates a NO ISE xxx SOLUTION BOTTLE event (xxx is the solution
replaced). Select the Event Clear button to clear the event.
11 Loosen the cap of the reagent bottle and remove the aspiration tubing.
Important
Do not touch the aspiration tubing.
Dispose of the old reagent according to your laboratory procedure.
12 Place the aspiration tubing in the new bottle and tighten the cap.
B71495AF 2-21
Daily Startup
13 Place the new bottle on the analyzer and push the bottle into position.
14 To load an additional ISE Reagent bottle, repeat steps 6 to 13.
15 Select OK. The system closes the Replace ISE Reagent dialog.
16 Select ISE Maintenance.

The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
Note
When you select ISE Maintenance in this tab, you go directly to the ISE
Maintenance: Maintenance tab. You do not have to go to the Home screen first.
17 Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
18 If you have replaced:

1. The ISE Buffer Solution
a. Select Buffer Prime.
The system displays Buffer Prime dialog.

b. Select OK.
c. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime.
The system primes the reagent for approximately 90 seconds.

2. The ISE MID Standard Solution or the ISE Reference Solution
a. Select MID/REF Prime.
The system displays MID/REF Prime dialog.

b. Select OK.

20 Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
Clean the ISE

Clean the sample pot and the electrode lines daily to prevent contamination and inaccurate
results. This procedure requires approximately four minutes to complete.
2-22 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Warning
to handle ISE Cleaning Solution. If the ISE Cleaning Solution contacts skin or clothes,
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the ISE Cleaning Solution contacts
the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the
Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more information. Follow your laboratory procedure to
wipe up spills immediately.
Note
If you do not plan to use the system for a long period, clean the ISE at the end of the
day.
For more information on materials required, refer to Parts List for ISE Maintenance.
Materials Required:
• ISE Cleaning Solution
• Hitachi Cup

2 Program the initials or name of the operator who performs the maintenance procedure.
To program the operator name, refer to Program the Operator Name.
3 Open the small STAT table cover.

4 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table until the CLEAN position
is accessible.
5 Fill the Hitachi cup with a minimum of 1 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.

6 Place the Hitachi cup in the CLEAN position on the STAT table.
Caution
Wipe up ISE Cleaning Solution spills immediately. Follow your laboratory

procedure.
7 Close the small STAT table cover.

8 Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
9 Select Cleaning. The system displays the Cleaning dialog.
10 Select OK. The system starts the cleaning operation.
11 When the cleaning operation is complete, open the small STAT table cover, remove the
Hitachi cup from the STAT table, and discard it.
B71495AF 2-23
Daily Startup
Calibrate the ISE

Calibrate the ISE once every 24 hours, each time after performing a particular maintenance
procedure, and each time after replacing the ISE reagents.
Caution
When the analysis is in process or the ISE status is Busy, do not open the STAT table
covers to add Standard Solutions to the STAT table or place hands in the path of the
sample probe.
Note
Calibrating only serum or urine requires approximately four minutes to complete.

Calibrating serum and urine together requires approximately seven minutes to
complete.
Materials Required:
• ISE High Serum Standard
• ISE Low Serum Standard
• ISE High Urine Standard
• ISE Low Urine Standard
• Hitachi Cup (4 cups)

3 If you calibrate the ISE immediately after the Clean the ISE procedure, perform a total
prime to clear the lines of ISE Cleaning Solution.
a. Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
b. Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
c. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
d. Select OK.
e. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE
ROTATION LED turns on after the prime is complete.
f. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.

2-24 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
5 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table until the S-H, S-L, U-H,
and U-L positions are accessible.
6 Fill a Hitachi cup with approximately 500 µL of Standard Solution as required for
processing (determined by your laboratory processing serum, urine, or both sample
types).
Table 2.4 Position Labels for ISE Serum and Urine Standard Solutions
Solution Position Label
ISE High Serum Standard S-H

ISE Low Serum Standard S-L
ISE High Urine Standard U-H
ISE Low Urine Standard U-L
7 Place the Hitachi cups into the corresponding positions on the STAT table.
9 Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Calibration.
The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab.
Figure 2.15 ISE Maintenance: Calibration Tab
10 Select Serum Start, Urine Start, or Serum/Urine Start depending on the sample types to
calibrate.
The system displays a dialog for starting the calibration.
11 Select Automatically print results or leave it cleared, and select OK.

The system starts calibration.
B71495AF 2-25
Daily Startup
Monitor the Reagent Status
12 When calibration is complete, confirm that the result for each electrode is within the
ranges for the calibrated sample types.
The system highlights acceptable results in green and results that exceed the values for
the calibration slope in the <Acceptable Calibration Range> table in yellow.
To determine calibration quality, compare the current results with previous results for
consistency.
13 Open the small STAT table cover, remove the Hitachi cups from the STAT table, and
discard them.

Monitor the reagent status to confirm the presence and status of reagents required for
typical daily analysis. Replace reagents as needed.
1 Select REAGENT > Reagent Management > Main.

The system displays the Reagent Management: Main tab.
Figure 2.16 Reagent Management: Main Tab
1. Reagent Status section 3. Reagent Check [F5]

2. Test Status section
2 Select Reagent Check [F5].

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog.
2-26 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Figure 2.17 Reagent Check Dialog
Table 2.5 Reagent Check Dialog Options

Option Description
Check all positions Determines the remaining volume of reagent at all positions, including
the bottle positions outside of the reagent refrigerator. Select this option
as part of the daily startup, when changing any settings, changing the
Group, and loading numerous reagents.
Check specified Determines the remaining volumes of reagent at the specified positions.
positions Select this option when replacing a reagent bottle. If the reagent is an
R1/R2, perform a reagent check for both the R1 and R2 reagent.
Check changed Determines the remaining reagent for any reagent ID that is new or has
positions been moved or removed since the previous reagent check.
Reset only Select this option when the reagent refrigerator cover was only opened
and closed without changing any reagent. The system resets to the latest
volumes (tests) in the system memory.
Check loaded positions Select this option after adding or replacing a reagent bottle by opening
the small reagent refrigerator cover during analysis. The system detects a
bottle and reads the bar code label (for reagent ID positions) on the newly
loaded reagent. The system also detects a bottle and reads the bar code
label (for reagent ID positions) for the two reagents on either side of the
newly loaded reagent to confirm that the newly loaded reagent is in the
correct position. During the first dispense from the newly loaded reagent,
the system determines then displays the remaining reagent volume. The
system assigns a bottle sequence number to the newly loaded bottle.
Read reagent ID Select this option for the system to read the reagent bar code label.
Note
If contamination prevention settings are programmed, the prevention settings are

applied during a reagent check.
Note
When turning on the system, all tests initially show fewer than 30 tests without a
volume indicator bar.
3 Select one of the reagent check options (refer to Figure 2.17 Reagent Check Dialog), and
then select Start.
B71495AF 2-27
Daily Startup
The system starts the reagent check. As the system progresses in the reagent check, the
system indicates the status as Checking in the Reagent Status section (refer to Figure
2.16 Reagent Management: Main Tab), with the progress bar to indicate the progress.
When the reagent check is complete, the status changes to Checked.
Note
Select Check all positions once for daily startup to confirm all required reagents are
onboard with sufficient volume for processing.
4 Review the Reagent Status section. For more information, refer to Figure 2.16 Reagent
Management: Main Tab and Figure 2.18 Reagent Status Section. The colors on the
screen indicate the status of the reagent refrigerator and reagent check.
If the system displays the status in yellow or red, review the Comment column in the
Details tab.
Figure 2.18 Reagent Status Section
Table 2.6 Reagent Status

Status Color Description
1 Accessible Green Reagent bottles can be loaded
Inaccessible Red Reagent bottles cannot be loaded.
2 Unchecked Red The status of the reagent check.
Checking Red
Checked Green
3 Progress bar - The system displays the progress of reagent

check. The progress bar displays only when the
system is performing the reagent check.
4 No Reagent Yellow A reagent assigned to the Group is missing from

the R1 or R2 refrigerator, the Onboard Remaining
is expired, the reagent is expired, or the bottle is
empty.
Reagent insufficient Yellow Reagent volume is insufficient.
No display Green Necessary reagents are set.
5 R1 Status Yellow The error level for reagents in the Reagent 1

refrigerator.
Green
6 R2 Status Yellow The error level for reagents in the Reagent 2

refrigerator.
2-28 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Table 2.6 Reagent Status (Continued)

Green
5 Review the Test Status section. For more information, refer to Figure 2.16 Reagent
Management: Main Tab and Figure 2.19 Test Status. Confirm that required reagents are
available and that all reagents have sufficient volume. Identify reagents to load.
Figure 2.19 Test Status
Table 2.7 Test Status

Item Description
1 Test name 1 The system displays test names in the output order
programmed in the Group. ISE and non-dedicated LIH
reagents are not displayed.
2 Test name 2 If you program the same reagent for two tests, the system
displays the second test name.
3 Number of tests or volume The number of tests remaining or volume in mL. Select Tests/
remaining Vol. to change the display. Select Type to view the number of
tests or volume for the specified sample type.
4 Indicator The remaining reagent volume. If more than one bottle is on

the system, the total reagent volume displays. The length of
the bar displays the maximum number of tests the system
calculates on the Reagent Inventory screen, and estimates the
reagent consumption required for the day.
Reagent quantity indicator bars: If Advanced Calibration is

set to No and Multi Reagent Switch is set to No, the R1
indicator bar displays on top of the R2 indicator bar. In a 3-
part reagent, the order of the bars is R1-1, R2-1, R1-2 from
top to bottom. If Advanced Calibration is set to Yes and
Multi Reagent Switch is set to Yes, there is a single
indicator bar even for an R1 and R2 test. Beckman Coulter
recommends programming Multi Reagent Switch to Yes.
B71495AF 2-29
Daily Startup
Table 2.7 Test Status (Continued)

Item Description
5 Color
— Yellow - A reagent assigned to the Group is missing from
the R1 or R2, the Onboard Remaining is expired, the
reagent is expired, the volume is insufficient, or the
bottle is empty.
— Green - Required reagents are loaded.
— White - The test operation is programmed to No for the
sample type displayed in the Reagent Management:
Main tab (REAGENT > Reagent Management >
Main). To change the sample type, select Type.
6 Change the selection in Type to view each sample type in use from the Main tab.
7 Select Details to review the Onboard Remaining, Number of Tests, and Expiration
columns to confirm that reagent volumes and reagent expirations are adequate for
sample processing. For more information, refer to Replace the Reagents.
Review the Comment column and perform necessary corrective actions.
Figure 2.20 Reagent Management: Details Tab
Note
You can select the title in the column header to sort the display by the following
columns: Test Name or Pos., Number of Tests, Onboard Remaining, Expiration, RB
Stability Remaining, Cal stability Remaining, and Comment.
2-30 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Switch between being able to sort by Test Name or by Pos. by selecting Test (the
default) or Position in Reagent Display.
Table 2.8 Reagent Management: Details Tab

Item Description
Type Serum, Urine, Other-1, Other-2, Whole Blood.
Reagent Display Displays test by test name (Test) or position (Position).
Content All or a specific test.
Pos. R1 or R2 reagent position.
Test Name Test name
R1/R2 R1-1 and R2-1 are standard. R1-2 is for a 3-part reagent test.
Number of Tests Quantity of tests remaining in the bottle. The blue indicator bar is
proportional to the level in the bottle (0 to 100%).
Onboard Remaining Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the reagent onboard stability expires.
Expiration The expiration date of the reagent lot number.
Lot No. Lot Number
Bottle No. (SN) A unique 4-digit number to identify each bottle of reagent.
Seq. Sequence number 1 to 5 of the same reagent in the R1/R2.
RB Stability Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the reagent blank stability expires.
Remaining
Cal Stability Hours (H) or Days (D) remaining until the calibration stability expires.
Remaining
Comment A caution or error message for the reagent.
Initialize Onboard Select a reagent bottle in fixed position and then select this button to reset
Stability the onboard stability period of the reagent bottle to the initial value
programmed in the Test and Test Method screen.
ID Edit Edits the 20-digit reagent ID. Use this option to edit the reagent ID after a
reagent ID read error.
Previous Setting Displays the most recent reagent bottle position. Available only in PAUSE
mode.
Edit [F1] Edits the test name, lot number, bottle number, bottle size, and position
setting.
B71495AF 2-31
Daily Startup
Table 2.8 Reagent Management: Details Tab (Continued)

Item Description
Load [F2] Select this button when replacing empty reagent bottles or adding new
reagent bottles in MEASURE mode. For more information, refer to Replace or
Add Reagents in MEASURE Mode.
Caution
Confirm the reagent bottle position in the reagent tray

before replacing a reagent bottle in a fixed position.
Reagent Check [F5] Performs the reagent check.
Reagent History [F6] Displays the lot number, bottle number, position, and Onboard Remaining
(hours) for 100 lines of data for R1 and R2 reagents.
List Display [F7] Select this button to confirm the list of the reagent bottles on the R1/R2
reagent trays. Use this list when replacing a reagent bottle in REAGENT
PAUSE mode. The system highlights in blue the reagent bottle that is
positioned under the small reagent refrigerator cover.
Only bottles to load: The system displays only the reagent bottles that you
select in the Load dialog.
Print [F8] Prints all the Details tab information.
Note
The time remaining displays in hours (H) up to 72 hours, and days (D) over 72 hours.
If two tests are programmed to use one reagent, the RB Stability Remaining and Cal
Stability Remaining display as lower Test No./higher Test No.
8 Scroll to positions for the probe cleaning solutions. Confirm that there is sufficient
volume of each solution required.
— R1-61 DIL: Deionized water or diluent for a dilution cuvette for Pre-Dilution or
Rerun Dilution.
— R1-xx CLN-1: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses cleaning
solution 1.
— R1-63 CLN-2: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses cleaning
solution 2.
— R2-xx CLN-1: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses cleaning
solution 1.
— R2-50 CLN-2: If you program Contamination Parameters, the system uses cleaning
solution 2.
— R1-64 DET-1: 2% Wash Solution for automatic sample probe cleaning.
— R1-65 DET-2: 2% Wash Solution or sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%) for
automatic sample probe cleaning.
xx: The position number that you assigned to the reagent cleaning solution bottle.
2-32 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
9 Select Type from the Details tab to view any additional sample types in use.
10 If reagent or required solution is missing, low, or empty, continue to Replace the

Reagents.
Replace the Reagents

Replace any reagent meeting any of the following conditions:
• Insufficient volume for the processing that day
• Onboard Remaining less than your laboratory requirements
• Expired
Remove the old reagent bottles and replace with a new set.
If the analyzer is in MEASURE mode and more than one sequence of bottles is onboard, the
analyzer switches to the next bottle sequence when the current bottle sequence is empty,
and not when the calibration or reagent is expired. If the reagent becomes empty during
MEASURE mode, you can replace the reagent by changing the analyzer mode to REAGENT
PAUSE mode. For more information, refer to Replace or Add Reagents in MEASURE Mode.
Caution
Bubbles in the reagent bottle can interfere with analysis. Inspect the reagent bottles
for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a cotton-tipped applicator before loading the
reagent.
Caution
can affect results.
Important
Condensation can form on refrigerated reagent bottles. Inspect the reagent bottle
opening and the bar code label area for condensation. Remove condensation with a
clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue before loading the reagent.
If the bar code label is dirty or has moisture on it, the system cannot read the label.
Inspect the bar code label and wipe off any dirt or moisture. If the system still cannot
read the label, enter the reagent ID manually. For more information, refer to Edit a
Reagent ID.
Important
The R1 and R2 reagent trays use partitions among the 15 mL, 30 mL, 60 mL, and 120 mL
bottles, and adapters to hold 15 mL and 30 mL reagent bottles securely in position.
B71495AF 2-33
Daily Startup
For two-part reagents, the reagent label indicates whether the reagent goes into the R1 or
R2 refrigerator.

2 Lift and remove the reagent refrigerator covers.
Figure 2.21 Reagent Refrigerator
1. Reagent Refrigerator Cover 5. Reagent Bottle (120 mL)

2. Reagent Bottle (60 mL) 6. Adapters
3. Reagent Bottle (15 mL) 7. Partitions
4. Reagent Bottle (30 mL)
3 Remove the onboard expired, expired, insufficient volume, and empty reagent bottles
from each refrigerator.
The system displays the reagent positions on the Details tab. The system indicates
assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in the column to the left
of the Pos. column. For more information, refer to Assign a Reagent Position.
4 Place the new bottles in the correct refrigerator. Use adapters and partitions as needed.
For more information, refer to Reagents.
Caution
Confirm that 15 mL reagent bottles are placed on the reagent tray with the bar
code label facing out. Incorrectly loaded bottles can damage the bottle or the
reagent probe.
Note
Place R1 bottles in the R1 refrigerator and R2 bottles in the R2 refrigerator.
2-34 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests
If the bottle has a reagent ID, place the bottle in any available (not assigned)
position in the R1 or R2 refrigerator.
If the bottle does not have a reagent ID, place the bottle in the correct assigned
position. The system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted
in blue in the column to the left of the Pos. column. For more information, refer to
Assign a Reagent Position.
5 Put the refrigerator covers back in position.

6 Close the upper cover.
7 After replacing reagents, select Reagent Check [F5], select the correct option, and then
select Start. For more information, refer to Figure 2.17 Reagent Check Dialog.
8 When the reagent check is complete, review the Main and Detail tabs to confirm that all
reagents are ready for processing.
Calibrate Tests
Important
Batch to Batch Variation
Calibrator set points can vary with new lots. Be sure to inspect the calibrator value
assignment sheets to ensure the correct set points are in use.
For calibrator information, refer to the calibrator IFU and value assignment sheet.
For rack analysis, after a reagent check the system automatically orders tests for reagent
blank and calibration for tests that satisfy the following four conditions.
For rack and STAT analysis, if you select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4], the system orders tests for
reagent blank and calibration for tests that satisfy the following four conditions.
• The reagent blank or calibration is expired.
• The reagent blank or calibration expires soon (default setting is 180 minutes).
• There is a new bottle or lot number for the reagent (if you are using Advanced
Calibration).
• The reagent blank or calibration failed.
Note
To request changes to the default setting for calibration expires soon from 180 minutes,
B71495AF 2-35
Daily Startup
Process Quality Control (QC)
Note
To determine the tests to calibrate, review the Comment column in the Reagent
Management: Details tab (REAGENT > Reagent Management > Details).
Calibration includes a reagent blank and calibration. You can perform calibration using
the blue and yellow racks or the STAT table.
Note
Load calibrators in the blue and yellow racks. For more information, refer to Order and
Perform Calibration from the Racks.
Use the STAT table to load calibrators to perform calibration after you load a reagent in
MEASURE mode. For more information, refer to Order and Perform Calibration from the
STAT Table.
If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, use the STAT table to
load calibrators. For more information, refer to Order and Perform Calibration and
Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table (Laboratory Automation System).
Note
Before a panel is available to order, program calibration panels in the Panel: RB/ACAL
tab (CONFIG. > Panel > RB/ACAL). You can program a maximum of 100 panels (including
daily, weekly, and monthly calibration requirements). For more information, refer to
Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration Panel.
Note
Before a test is available to order by bottle sequence number when you select
Individual Order [F3], program the test for Advanced Calibration in the Calibration
Setup: General tab (CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General). For more information,
refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Important
Batch to Batch Variation
Quality control material mean, range, and standard deviation can vary for each test
with new lots. Be sure the correct values for control material lot are in use.
Perform Quality Control on the schedule determined by your laboratory protocol. Run
control samples with each new calibration, with each new reagent lot, and after specific
maintenance or troubleshooting activities. If you find any trends or sudden shift in results,
2-36 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
review all operating settings. Follow your laboratory guidelines for corrective action if the
QC results do not recover within the specified limits.
Note
Process QC from the green racks. For more information, refer to Order and Perform
Quality Control (QC) from the Racks.
Use the STAT table to load control samples to perform quality control after you load a
reagent in MEASURE mode. For more information, refer to Order and Perform Quality
Control (QC) from the STAT Table.
If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, use the STAT table to
process QC. For more information, refer to Order and Perform Calibration and Quality
Control (QC) from the STAT Table (Laboratory Automation System).
Note
The system automatically orders the default QC panel for QC analysis from racks after a
reagent check.
Select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4] to order automatically the same tests for QC analysis as
ordered for calibration. This function is available for QC analysis both from the racks
and the STAT table.
Note
Program a QC panel in the Panel: QC tab (CONFIG. > Panel > QC). For more information,
refer to Create a QC Panel. The following specific panel numbers are designated as
default QC panels for each sample type and Group.
Table 2.9 Default QC Panel Numbers

Panel Number Sample Type Group
87 Serum 1
88 Serum 2
89 Serum 3
90 Urine 1
91 Urine 2
92 Urine 3
93 Other-1 1
94 Other-1 2
95 Other-1 3
96 Other-2 1
97 Other-2 2
B71495AF 2-37
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the Racks (Standalone)
Table 2.9 Default QC Panel Numbers (Continued)

Panel Number Sample Type Group
98 Other-2 3
99 Whole blood All
• Order and Perform Calibration from the Racks
• Order and Perform Quality Control (QC) from the Racks
Order and Perform Calibration from the Racks
1 Select TEST > Rack (Calibration).

The system displays the Sample Program: Rack (Calibration) screen.
Figure 2.22 Sample Program: Rack (Calibration) Screen
2 In Type, select the sample type.

The system automatically orders tests under any of the following conditions:
— The reagent blank or calibration is expired.
— The reagent blank or calibration expires soon (default setting is 180 minutes).
— There is a new bottle or lot number for the reagent (if you are using Advanced
Calibration).
— The reagent blank or calibration failed.
The system displays tests for calibration and reagent blank in blue.
2-38 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Note
If the system does not automatically order tests, select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4].
The system orders tests for reagent blank and calibration. The system also orders
the same tests for QC analysis.
3 Confirm that the ordered tests are correct for all sample types.
4 If the ordered tests are correct, continue to step 11.
5 To change the ordered tests, select Edit [F1].
6 To select a panel, select Panel. Select a panel, and then select OK.
7 To select a specific test, select a test from the RB or CAL column.
Note
Selecting from the RB column orders only a reagent blank. Selecting from the CAL
column orders a reagent blank and calibration.
8 To order a different sample type, change the sample type in Type. Then repeat steps 6
and 7.
9 To order sequential bottles of the same test, select Individual Order [F3].
— In Type, select the sample type.
— To select a specific test and bottle sequence, select the RB or CAL column.
— To order all bottles for the selected test, select Select All by Test.
— To order all bottles for all tests, select Select All.
— To order a different sample type, repeat test selection by changing the sample type
in Type.
— To save the order, select Close.
— To cancel the order, select Cancel.
10 Select Save [F2] to save the order. Select Close [F1] to cancel the order.
Note
To order the same tests for QC as ordered for calibration, select QC Same Order
[F5].
11 Select Display Cup Set [F6] to display the reagent blank, calibrators, racks, and positions
required for reagent blank and calibrators.
Load the reagent blanks and calibrators according to the list in the blue and yellow
racks. Select Close to close the dialog.
B71495AF 2-39
Daily Startup
Note
In the Display Cup Set dialog, the Volume (μL) is the volume required for the
ordered tests. The dead volume is not included.
Note
If calibrator Bar code Operation is enabled, the system does not display a rack ID for
the calibrator racks.
12 Load the racks in the rack input area. Load the blue rack first, followed by the yellow
racks.
13 Select Start.
Order and Perform Quality Control (QC) from the Racks
1 Select TEST > Rack (QC). The system displays the Sample Program: Rack (QC) screen.
Figure 2.23 Sample Program: Rack (QC) Screen
Note
The system automatically orders the default QC panel when you perform a reagent
check or quality control.
2-40 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
The system automatically orders the same tests for QC as ordered for the reagent
blank and calibration when you select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4] or QC Same Order
[F5] in TEST > Rack (Calibration) or STAT > STAT (Calibration).
The system highlights the tests in blue.
Note
If you use sequential bottles for the same test and have selected Multiple Bottles in
the QC Program by Panel button, the system automatically programs the same QC
order for all bottles for the test. This order by panel occurs after a reagent check,
after performing quality control, and when ordering by selecting a panel.
6 To clear the tests for the default QC panel orders, select Clear All Tests [F6].
Note
order for all bottles for the test.
8 Select the test.

a. To select all tests, select Select All Tests [F5].
b. To select a specific test, select the test.
9 To order a different sample type, change the sample type in Type. Then repeat steps 6 to
8.
Note
If you have selected Multiple Bottles in the QC Program by Panel button, skip this
step.

— To select a specific test and bottle sequence, select the test.
in Type.
B71495AF 2-41
Daily Startup
Calibrate Tests and Process Quality Control from the STAT Table (Standalone)
12 Select Display Cup Set [F7] to display the required control samples, racks, and positions.
13 Load the control samples in the green racks according to the list. Select Close.
Note
In the Display Cup Set dialog, the Volume (μL) is the volume required for the
Note
If QC Bar Code Operation is enabled, the system does not display a rack ID for the
QC racks.
14 Load the racks in the rack input area.

15 Select Start.
If you load a reagent bottle when in MEASURE mode, perform calibration or QC for the
reagent from the STAT table.
Program the Bar Code or Cup Positions Option for Calibration and QC from the STAT Table
Program patient samples, calibrators, and control samples in bar code (Bar Code) or
position assignment (Cup Pos.) for analysis from the STAT table.
Tip
For analysis from racks, program bar code operation for patient samples, calibrators,
and control samples in the Analysis Mode (CONFIG. > Analysis Mode), Calibrator Setup
(CONFIG. > Calibrator Setup), or QC Setup (CONFIG. > QC Setup) screens.
If you select Bar Code in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]),
the system reads the bar code to identify the sample kind (patient sample, calibrator, or
control sample). For Sample Kind select Free, then place patient samples, calibrators, and
control samples in any Free position.
If you select Cup Pos. for calibration or QC in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status >
STAT Table Setting [F6]), program the cup positions for the calibration or QC in the STAT
Table Setting dialog. The system allows you to run the calibration or QC in those assigned
positions only. For example, if you assign positions 1, 2, and 3 for the calibration, you can
2-42 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
use only those three positions for the calibration. For more information, refer to the DxC
700 AU Reference Manual.
1 Select STAT > STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6].
The system displays the STAT Table Setting dialog.
2 Select Edit.
3 In the [STAT Test Order] section, select Bar Code or Cup Pos. for calibration and QC.
4 In the [STAT Table Pos. Setting] section, the default selection for Group is the group that
is selected for Group of Tests in the Create Index dialog (HOME > Create Index [F1]).
Change the selection for Group as needed.
5 Make the following selections for calibrators:

• If you select Bar Code for calibration in step 3, select the position in the Pos.
column, and then select Free in the Sample Kind column.
• If you select Cup Pos. for calibration in step 3, select the position in the Pos. column,
select Cal in the Sample Kind column, and select the calibrator name in the
Calibrator/Control column.
6 Make the following selections for QC:

• If you select Bar Code for QC in step 3, select the position in the Pos. column, and
then select Free in the Sample Kind column.
• If you select Cup Pos. for QC in step 3, select the position in the Pos. column, select
QC in the Sample Kind column, and select the control sample name in the
Calibrator/Control column.
7 Select Save.
Order and Perform Calibration from the STAT Table

Confirm that you have programmed the options for performing a calibration from the STAT
Table. Refer to Program the Bar Code or Cup Positions Option for Calibration and QC from
the STAT Table.
1 Select STAT > STAT (Calibration).

The system displays the STAT (Calibration) screen.
B71495AF 2-43
Daily Startup
Figure 2.24 STAT (Calibration) Screen
3 Select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4]. In the STAT (Calibration) dialog, select OK.
Calibration).
The system displays tests for calibration and reagent blank in blue.
Note
The calibration is ordered, but the QC is not when you select Auto CAL/QC Order
[F4].
7 To select a panel, select Panel. Select a panel and then select OK.
8 To select a specific test, select the test from the RB or CAL column.
2-44 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Note
and 8.
in Type.
Note
If you select Cup Pos. for calibration in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status >
STAT Table Setting [F6]), and if you order tests for the calibration that require more
calibrators than the assigned positions, the system displays the STAT (Calibration)
dialog, which indicates that the test order is unavailable. Select OK. The test order is
canceled.
Note
To order the same tests for QC as ordered for calibration, select QC Same Order
[F5].
12 Select CAL/QC Position [F6] to display the calibrators, control samples, and volumes that
are required for the ordered tests.
Note
In the CAL/QC Position dialog, the Volume (μL) is the volume required for the
Note
If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for calibration in the STAT Table Setting
dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), the system displays calibrator
positions on the STAT table in the CAL/QC Position dialog.
B71495AF 2-45
Daily Startup
13 Load the required reagent blank and calibrators on the STAT table. Press the DIAG/
TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the table.
— Place the reagent blank sample in the inner STAT table position RB1.
— If you have selected the Bar Code option for calibration, place the calibrators with
bar code labels in any positions for which you set the sample kind to Free in the
STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]). The system
displays the available positions as Free in the Kind column on the STAT Status
screen.
— If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for calibration, place the calibrators in the
correct positions according to the Pos. column in the STAT Status screen or the
CAL/QC Position dialog (STAT > STAT (Calibration) > CAL/QC Position [F6]).
14 Select Start STAT in the software interface.

Refer to Start STAT Table Analysis.
Order and Perform Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table
Confirm that you have programmed the options for performing QC from the STAT Table.
Refer to Program the Bar Code or Cup Positions Option for Calibration and QC from the
STAT Table.
1 Select STAT > STAT (QC).

The system displays the STAT (QC) screen.
Figure 2.25 STAT (QC) Screen
2-46 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Note
The system automatically orders the same tests for QC as ordered for the reagent
blank and calibration when you select QC Same Order [F5] in STAT > STAT
(Calibration). The calibration is ordered, but the QC is not when you select Auto
CAL/QC Order [F4]. The system highlights the tests in blue. Refer to Order and
Perform Calibration from the STAT Table.
3 If there are tests ordered (highlighted in blue), confirm that the orders are correct for all
sample types.

5 If there are no tests ordered or to change the ordered tests, select Edit [F1].
Note
7 Select the test.

and 7.
Note
step.

in Type.
B71495AF 2-47
Daily Startup
Order and Perform Calibration and Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table (Laboratory Automation System)
Note
If you select Cup Pos. for QC in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status > STAT
Table Setting [F6]), and if you order tests for the QC that require more tests than
the assigned positions, the system displays the STAT (QC) dialog, which indicates
that the test order is unavailable. Select OK. The test order is canceled.
11 Select CAL/QC Position [F7] to display the list of control samples and volumes required
for the ordered tests.
Note
In the CAL/QC Position dialog, the Volume (μL) is the volume required for the
Note
If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for QC in the STAT Table Setting dialog
(STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), the system displays QC positions on the STAT
table in the CAL/QC Position dialog.
12 Load the required control samples on the STAT table. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
button to rotate the table.
— If you have selected the Bar Code option for QC in the STAT Table Setting dialog
(STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), place the control samples with bar code
labels in the positions for which you set the sample kind to Free for the STAT Table
Setting [F6] option of the STAT Status screen. The system displays the available
positions as Free in the Kind column on the STAT Status screen.
— If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for QC in the STAT Table Setting dialog
(STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), place the control samples in the correct
positions according to the Pos. column in the STAT Status screen or the CAL/QC
Position dialog (STAT > STAT (QC) > CAL/QC Position [F7]).

Refer to Start STAT Table Analysis.
Order and Perform Calibration and Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table
(Laboratory Automation System)
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, you can perform
calibration and QC only from the STAT table. DxC 700 AU provides a Multiple Loads STAT
Table operation. With Multiple Loads STAT Table operation, the system can process
multiple loads of up to 200 calibrators and up to 100 control samples in a single run. The
system can process 22 calibrators and control samples per load.
2-48 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
When Multiple Loads STAT Table operation is enabled, your only option for sample
identification is the use of bar code labels without any pre-assignment of sample kinds to
the positions.
A Beckman Coulter Representative configures the system for Multiple Loads STAT Table
operation during system installation at your request.
Important
The system does not process patient samples in the same run as calibrators or controls
on the STAT Table. Run patient samples after calibrations and QC analysis are
completed.
Important
Within a run, all calibrators must precede any control samples. The following are some
examples:
Table 2.10 Acceptable Calibrator and QC Load Order for Multiple Loads STAT Table
Operation
Load Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
First Calibrators only Calibrators only Calibrators only
Second Calibrators and Calibrators only Control samples only

control samples
Third Control samples only Control samples only Control samples only
Note
In the second load of Example 1, you can place calibrators and control samples
in any order on the STAT table.
Table 2.11 Unacceptable Calibrator and QC Load Order for Multiple Loads STAT Table
Operation
Load Example 1 Example 2
First Calibrators and control Control samples only

samples
Second Calibrators and control Calibrators only

samples
Note
The system analyzes all calibrators first, and then control samples.
Perform these procedures in the following order:
B71495AF 2-49
Daily Startup
1. Order the Calibrations and QCs

2. Prepare and Load Calibrators and Control Samples
3. Analyze the Calibrators or Control Samples
4. Place Another Load of Calibrators or Control Samples on the STAT Table
5. Analyze the Last Load of Calibrators or Control Samples
Order the Calibrations and QCs
1 Select STAT > STAT (Calibration).

The system displays the STAT (Calibration) screen.
Figure 2.26 STAT (Calibration) Screen
3 Select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4]. In the STAT (Calibration) dialog, select OK.
Calibration).
Note
The calibration is ordered, but the QC is not when you select Auto CAL/QC Order
[F4].
2-50 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
8 To select a specific test, select the test from the RB or CAL column.
Note
and 8.
in Type.
11 To save the order, select Save [F2], or to cancel the order, select Close [F1].
12 To order the same tests for QC as ordered for calibration, select QC Same Order [F5].
13 Select STAT > STAT (QC).

The system displays the STAT (QC) screen.
Note
The system automatically has ordered the same tests for QC as ordered for the
reagent blank and calibration when you select QC Same Order [F5] in the STAT
Status: STAT (Calibration) screen. The calibration is ordered, but the QC is not when
you select Auto CAL/QC Order [F4]. The system highlights the tests in blue.
15 If there are tests ordered (highlighted in blue), confirm that the orders are correct for all
sample types.
16 If the ordered tests are correct, continue to Prepare and Load Calibrators and Control
Samples.
B71495AF 2-51
Daily Startup
17 If there are no tests ordered or to change the ordered tests, select Edit [F1].
Note
19 Select the test.

20 To order a different sample type, change the sample type in Type, then repeat steps 18
and 19.
Note
step.

in Type.
22 To save the order, select Save [F2], or to cancel the order, select Close [F1].
Prepare and Load Calibrators and Control Samples
1 Select CAL/QC Position [F7] to display the reagent blank, calibrators, control samples,
and volumes that are required for the ordered tests.
Note
In the CAL/QC Position dialog, the volume (μL) is the volume required for the
2 Prepare the required calibrators and control samples.
2-52 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Load the reagent blank sample in the inner wheel of the STAT table labeled RB1.
3 Confirm that the STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off, and open the upper STAT table
cover.
Note
The blinking STAT TABLE ROTATION LED indicates that the system is aspirating the
samples on the STAT Table. You can interrupt patient sample analysis to perform
calibration and QC analysis. To remove patient samples that are currently
processing in the STAT table, change the system mode to Pause by selecting the
Pause button from the action button area. After the system changes mode to Pause,
select STAT Pause [F2] from the STAT Status screen and remove the patient samples
that are currently on the STAT Table.
After the calibration or QC analysis is completed, replace the removed patient

samples in their original positions on the STAT table and resume the patient sample
analysis.
4 Confirm again that the STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off, and open the large STAT table
cover.
5 Place the first load of calibrators or control samples on the STAT table.
You can place a maximum of 22 calibrators or control samples on the STAT table per
load.
Note
Keep the STAT table clean. If you spill the sample on the STAT table, wipe it off
immediately.
6 Close the large STAT table cover.
Analyze the Calibrators or Control Samples

The system displays the Start STAT dialog.
2 If this is the only table required for calibrators and QC, or if the table is for the last load
of calibrators and QC, select Last Table in the dialog.
3 Select Start.
The STAT TABLE ROTATION LED starts blinking, and the system starts calibration or QC
analysis on the STAT table.
The STAT TABLE ROTATION LED turns off when aspiration of calibrators or control
samples completes.
B71495AF 2-53
Daily Startup
Place Another Load of Calibrators or Control Samples on the STAT Table
1 Use one of the following methods to place another load of calibrators or control samples
on the STAT table:
• Reuse the STAT table used for the previous load:
1. Confirm that the STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off, and open the large STAT
table cover.
2. Remove the processed calibrators or control samples from the STAT table.
3. Place another load of calibrators or control samples on the STAT table.
4. Close the large STAT table cover.
• Use another STAT table:
1. Prepare another STAT table for the next load of calibrators or control samples.
2. Place the next load of calibrators or control samples on the STAT table that is
prepared for the next load.
3. Confirm that the STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off (aspiration is complete),
and open the large STAT table cover.
4. Pull up the two white latches in the STAT table compartment until they make a
clicking noise.
5. Lift the STAT table used for the previous load from the STAT table compartment
by holding the knob.
6. Set the STAT table for the new load in the STAT table compartment, adjusting
the STAT table position using the positioning pins.
7. Push down the two white latches until they make a clicking noise to secure the
STAT table.
8. Close the large STAT table cover.
Note
Keep the STAT table clean. If you spill the sample on the STAT table, wipe it off
immediately.
2 If the next load is going to be the last one, go to Analyze the Last Load of Calibrators or
Control Samples.
If the next load is not going to be the last one, repeat Place Another Load of Calibrators
or Control Samples on the STAT Table.
Analyze the Last Load of Calibrators or Control Samples

The system displays the Start STAT dialog.
2 Select Last Table in the dialog.
2-54 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
Note
If you start calibration or QC analysis for the last table without selecting the Last
Table box, select Last Table/Cancel Last Table [F1] before the system completes the
aspiration for the last sample.
3 Select Start.
The STAT TABLE ROTATION LED starts blinking, and the system starts calibration or QC
analysis on the STAT table.
The STAT TABLE ROTATION LED turns off when aspiration of calibrators or control
samples completes.
4 Confirm that the STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off, and remove the processed
calibrators or control samples from the STAT table.
Start Analysis
The reaction time is approximately 8 minutes and 33 seconds for the first result to be
obtained after the sample is dispensed. The system can sample another test every 4.5
seconds.
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, add an extra 4.5
seconds for each sample. The extra time allows the sample to move from the sample
aspiration position, and a new sample to advance to the sample aspiration position.
You can print and view results on the monitor.
Note
If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System:

• The DxC 700 AU must be in MEASURE mode before you start the Laboratory Automation
System. Select the Start button. When in MEASURE mode, the system performs analysis
whenever a sample is carried to the DxC 700 AU from the Laboratory Automation System.
• The DxC 700 AU remains in MEASURE mode, even after sample analysis is complete, until
you select Stop Feeder. After you select Stop Feeder, the mode changes to MEASURE 2,
and then to STANDBY.
Start Rack Analysis
1 Load racks on the rack input area.

2 Select Start. The system displays the Start dialog. Review the error list in the dialog
carefully and perform necessary corrective actions before you start analysis. If an error
is in red, you cannot start analysis unless you resolve the error.
B71495AF 2-55
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
Note
Select Edit to edit the starting sample number. Editing the starting sample number
is only necessary in Sequential mode.
3 Confirm the operator initials or name in Operator Name. To change the operator initials
or name, select Cancel, then change the operator initials or name in Home > Change
Operator [F2].
Note
When the operator option is selected in CONFIG > List Format > Print Information,
the initials or name of the operator print on the report.
4 Select Start.
Figure 2.27 Start Dialog
If the system does not detect any errors, the system starts analysis. The mode changes
from STANDBY to MEASURE 1.
Start STAT Table Analysis
1 Confirm that the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is not on or blinking, and then
open the small STAT table cover.
2-56 B71495AF
2
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
Figure 2.28 Start STAT Dialog
Review the Error List in the Start STAT dialog. Confirm that the required samples are on
the STAT table.
3 Confirm the operator initials or name in Operator Name. To change the operator initials
or name, select Cancel, then change the operator initials or name in Home > Change
Operator [F2].
Note

5 Select Start to initiate the automatic STAT table check (detects samples), or select Cancel
to take corrective actions.
6 If there are no errors specific to the STAT table after the STAT table check, analysis
starts. If there are STAT table errors, review the errors in the Start STAT dialog. Select
Start to begin analysis, or select Cancel to perform corrective actions.
B71495AF 2-57
Daily Startup
Start Analysis
2-58 B71495AF
CHAPTER 3
System Setup
Program a New Test
Program the new test using the reagent setting sheet. For more information, refer to the
DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Test numbers 1 to 120 are pre-programmed as closed or open test numbers.

• Closed Test Numbers - Beckman Coulter test parameters are available on a validated
CD that a Beckman Coulter Representative loads during installation. The Beckman
Coulter tests are loaded onto closed test numbers. Closed test numbers reduce manual
programming time and possible programming errors.
• Open Test Numbers - The system supports the ability to add tests not from Beckman
Coulter. Open test numbers are available for reagents not from Beckman Coulter.
1 Select CONFIG. > Test Name Parameters > Test Name.

a. Select Edit [F1].
b. In Test Name, enter the name (maximum of 6 characters).
Caution
Changing the test name affects all results associated with that test number.
Any previously reported results (with the old test name) are assigned the new
test name. Use caution when changing the test name.
Do not change the test name without noting the time and date that the
change occurred and then confirming any results printed before this time are
reviewed and correctly identified.
Tests are processed on a sample in the test number order (1 to 120) displayed,
with some exceptions. For information on contamination prevention, refer to
the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
c. (Optional) In Long Name, enter the name (maximum of 20 characters).
d. For all countries and regions except Japan: In Reagent ID, enter the first 3 digits of
the reagent ID, or refer to the reagent IFU for the reagent ID 3-digit code.
For Japan, the reagent ID includes the manufacturer ID and test code. In
Manufacturer ID, enter the first 3 digits of the reagent ID. In Test Code, enter the 2
digits of the reagent ID following the first 3 digits. Refer to the reagent IFU for the
manufacturer ID and test code.
e. In Alarm Tests, enter the remaining test number to generate a Reagent
Insufficient event. The default is 32.
Note
For the ISE reagents, to generate an ISE Reagent Insufficient event,

select REAGENT > Reagent Management > ISE, select ISE Parameter Setting
[F4], then enter the remaining test number.
B71495AF 3-1
System Setup
Program a New Test
f. In Multi Reagent Switch, select Yes. The Multi Reagent Switch allows the analyzer to
switch to a new sequence of R1 or R2 when either the R1 or R2 of a sequence
becomes empty.
g. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
2 Select Group of Tests.

a. In Group, select Group 1, 2, or 3.
b. Select Edit [F1].
c. Select Test Setting [F5].
d. Select the test to add to the Group. The system displays the test name in blue. Select
Close.
e. To change the print order:
1. Select a test to enable Forward [F2] and Backward [F3].

2. Move the test in the Group to change the print order.
f. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
3 (Optional) Select Panel.

b. Select Patient Sample, RB/ACAL, and QC to add the test to any required panel.
c. In Type, select the sample type.
Confirm the sample type for each panel.
Note
In the QC tab, you can program default QC panels (numbers 87 to 99) for each
sample type and Group. The default QC panel is the automatic QC order made
for the rack analysis after a reagent check.
d. In Panel Name, select a panel.
e. Select the test. The system displays the selected tests in blue.
For more information about panels, refer to Create a Panel.
4 Select CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > General.

b. In Test Name, select the test name.
c. In Type, select the sample type.
d. In Operation, confirm that Yes is selected for the sample type.
e. Enter the specific test parameters from the reagent setting sheet.
3-2 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Program a New Test
Note
The system can display the parameters for a maximum of 6 tests at a time for
verification. Select List Display [F7]. In Type, select the sample type. Select
Forward or Backward icons to display other tests. Select Close to close the
dialog.
5 Select Range.
a. In Test Name, select the test name.
b. In Type, select the sample type.
c. Select Edit [F1].
d. Select Set Decimal Places [F5], and then select 0 to 4 for the decimal place for the
results.
e. Select Close.
f. In Value/Flag:
— Select Value to access Specific Ranges to set the high (H flag) and low ranges (L
flag).
— Select Flag to access Level to set a positive limit (P flag) or negative limit (N
flag). This setting is typically used for drugs of abuse testing.
g. Use Specific Ranges to set a reference interval to generate high (H) and low (L) flags.
— In 1 to 6, enter a range determined by sex, age, and other type.
— In 7, Standard demographics, enter a generic reference interval. The system uses
the generic reference interval for samples without patient demographic
information (age and sex).
— In 8, Not within expected values, the system uses the Not within expected values
reference interval for a sample with patient demographic information (age or
sex), but the age or sex information did not satisfy the age and sex defined in
the specific range 1 to 6.
h. (Optional) Use Critical Limits to set limits to generate an event and a pl or ph flag.
i. Select Select to select the unit from the preprogrammed list, then select OK. Or, for
Unit, enter the unit.
If the units are formatted on the report, the system prints the units.
j. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
6 Select CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > Calibrators.
7 Select Edit [F1].
8 If it is not necessary to program a new calibrator, continue to step 9.

If it is necessary to program a new calibrator:
a. Select an available calibrator No. or Cup Position by Type.
b. Enter the Calibrator Name, Calibrator ID, Lot No., and Expiration.
B71495AF 3-3
System Setup
Program a New Test
Note
If Bar Code Operation is not enabled, enter the Calibrator Name. If Bar Code
Operation is enabled, enter the Calibrator Name and Calibrator ID. The Lot No.
and Expiration are optional fields.
c. Confirm that the information is correct.
9 Select General.
c. Refer to the reagent setting sheet to determine the Calibration Type, and enter
calibration-specific parameters.
— If the Calibration Type is AB, AA, 2AB, 3AB, 4AB, 5AB, 6AB or 7AB:
— Refer to the reagent setting sheet for the parameters for Formula, Slope
Check, Factor Range, Allowable Range Check, Advanced Calibration, and
Stability.
— For Counts (replicates), enter a number from 1 to 4. For more information,
— Select the calibrator from Calibrator.
— For Conc, enter the calibrator concentration from the calibrator insert
(available in the calibrator kit).
— If the Calibration Type is MB:
— Refer to the reagent setting sheet for the parameters for Formula,
Allowable Range Check, Advanced Calibration, MB Type Factor, and Stability.
— For Counts (replicates), enter a number from 1 to 4. For more information,
d. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
Note
If you process calibration on the STAT table, program the STAT Table Setting. For
information on programming the STAT table for calibration, refer to the DxC 700 AU
Reference Manual. If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System,
calibration from the STAT table is the only option.
10 Select CONFIG. > QC Setup > Controls.
Note
If using the QC menu to access the Controls tab, after you select QC, you might have
to select OK at a dialog that is displayed before you can select QC Setup > Controls.
11 Select Edit [F1].
12 If it is not necessary to program a new control material, continue to step 13.

If it is necessary to program a new control material:
3-4 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Program a New Test
a. Select an available No. or Cup Position by Type.

b. Enter the Control Name, ID, Lot No., and Expiration.
Note
If Bar Code Operation is not enabled, enter the Control Name. If Bar Code
Operation is enabled, enter the Control Name and Control ID. The Lot No. and
Expiration are optional fields.
c. Confirm that the information is correct.
13 Select Preset.
c. In Control, select the control material.
d. In Multi/Single, select Multi or Single.
e. Use the QC package insert or known values to enter the Mean, SD, and Range. The
system determines that QC is in or out of these preset ranges when the QC Mode is
set to Preset (on the Check tab).
1. In Mean, enter the QC mean.

2. In SD, enter a 1 SD value.
3. In Range, enter the value of the range. The range is the high value minus the low
value.
Note
If you process QC on the STAT table, program the STAT Table QC screen. For
information on programming the STAT table for QC, refer to the DxC 700 AU
Reference Manual. If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System,
QC from the STAT table is the only option.
14 Select CONFIG. > List Format > Printed Test.
Important
Do not change any parameters for items in Basic Condition, Print Information, or
Layout. These parameters affect the format of the printout.

b. In List Name, select the required report or list. Select the test to add it to the report
or list. When the test is selected, the system displays the test in blue.
B71495AF 3-5
System Setup
Program a New Test
Note
If you select a required report or list and all of the available spaces for tests are
highlighted in blue, you do not have to make changes.
Note
Before the tests print on the printout, add the new test to any required real-
time printouts (reagent blank, calibration, QC, and patient samples).
c. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
15 Select CONFIG. > Contamination Parameters.

Contact Beckman Coulter for test-specific contamination parameters information.
b. Program the Contamination Prevention as required for the Preceding Test Name,
Following Test Name, Reagent Probe Cleaner Kind, Wash Count, Water Cleaning
Effective, Mixer, and Cuvette.
c. Program the Carry-over Prevention (Test) as required for the Pre-Dispense Wash
Count and Post-Dispense Wash Count.
d. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
16 If the system is using online communication with a laboratory information system,

program an online test number. Select CONFIG. > Online > Online Test No.
b. Enter the Online Test No. The combination of the online test number and test must
be the same as the laboratory information system. Set the number as a blank when
online communication is not required.
Important
When the test number on the laboratory information system and the online
test number are different, the data cannot transmit correctly.
c. Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
17 Run the test to confirm the programming.

a. Load the reagent and any required cleaning solution on the analyzer.
b. Perform a reagent check.
c. Confirm that the system orders calibration for the new test.
d. If the test is not added to the default QC order, order QC on the new test.
e. Perform a reagent blank, calibration, and QC on the new test.
f. Review the printout and confirm that the reagent blank, calibration, and QC data are
correct.
3-6 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Create a Panel
Create a Panel
A panel is a group of tests that are typically ordered at the same time. Using a panel reduces
the quantity of selections needed, as a single panel is selected instead of multiple tests. A
maximum of 100 panels (Number 0 to Number 99) can be programmed for patient
samples, reagent blanks, calibration, and QC. A maximum of 99 tests can be programmed in
a panel. The quantity of sample blank tests, LIH, and sample type limits the quantity of tests
that can be programmed in a panel.
Each panel is assigned a panel name.
You cannot select unavailable tests.
For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Create a Sample Panel

You can only select ISE tests when the sample type is Serum or Urine.
1 Select CONFIG. > Panel > Patient Sample.
Figure 3.1 Panel: Patient Sample Tab
2 Select Edit [F1].
4 In Panel Name, select a panel number from 0 to 99.
5 For Panel Name, enter a panel name with a maximum of 20 characters.
B71495AF 3-7
System Setup
Create a Panel
6 Select the tests to include in the panel. The system displays selected tests in blue.
7 Confirm that the information is correct, and then select Save [F1].
Create a Reagent Blank or Calibration Panel
1 Select CONFIG. > Panel > RB/ACAL.
Figure 3.2 Panel: RB/ACAL Tab
2 Select Edit [F1].
6 Select the tests to include in the panel. The system displays the test in yellow (ACAL +
RB), pink (One Point), or blue (RB Only), which is determined by programming in the
tab that displays when you select CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General. Select
Calibration Options [F5] to change between the available options.
Note
The programming in the tab that displays when you select CONFIG. > Calibration
Setup > General determines the calibration options available in Calibration Options
[F5].
3-8 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Create a Panel
Note
You can select ISE tests when the ISE calibration type is ACAL. For more information,
Create a QC Panel
QC panels 87 to 99 are the default QC panels that are automatically ordered in TEST > Rack
(QC). The QC panel numbers 87 to 99 correspond to a specific Group and sample type:
• Number 87: Serum: For Group 1
• Number 90: Urine: For Group 1
• Number 93: Other-1: For Group 1
• Number 99: Whole blood: For all Groups
You can only select ISE tests when the sample type is Serum or Urine.
1 Select CONFIG. > Panel > QC.
B71495AF 3-9
System Setup
Program Calibrator Concentrations
Figure 3.3 Panel: QC Tab
2 Select Edit [F1].
6 Select the tests to include in the panel. The system displays selected tests in blue.

In the Calibration Setup: Calibrators screen, program calibrator concentrations with the use
of two-dimensional bar code labels or by the manual procedure.
Load Calibrator Concentrations with Two-dimensional Bar Code

You can load calibrator concentrations for Beckman Coulter calibrators by scanning the 2-
dimensional bar code label.
For more information on how to program calibrator material and calibration parameters,
3-10 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Important
Confirm the calibrator concentration values in the Calibration Setup screen. It is critical
that correct calibrator values are loaded.
1 Select HOME.
2 Select Change Operator [F2].
Figure 3.4 Change Operator Dialog
3 For Operator Name, enter the operator initials or name, or select Select to choose the
name of the operator from Comment Master, then select OK.
4 Select OK.
Note
The system records an operator initials or name in User Name in Calibrator Info.
Loading History when you load calibrator information from the two-dimensional
bar code.

The system displays the Calibration Setup: Calibrators tab.
6 Select Edit [F1].
B71495AF 3-11
System Setup
Figure 3.5 Calibration Setup: Calibrators Tab
7 Select the calibrator to edit.
Note
For a multi-level calibrator, select the first level of the calibrator.
Note
If you do not select a calibrator, the system displays the first position in the Load
Calibrator Information dialog. You can change the position when you perform step
13.
8 Select Load Calibrator Information [F2].

The system displays the Load Calibrator Information dialog.
3-12 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Figure 3.6 Load Calibrator Information Dialog
9 In the section labeled Step 1, select the empty text field at the top.
10 With the manual bar code reader, scan the two-dimensional bar code label on the Value
Assignment sheet.
The system displays the scanned information in the second field in the section labeled
Step 1.
B71495AF 3-13
System Setup
Figure 3.7 Load Calibrator Information (Scanned) Dialog
11 If there are more two-dimensional bar code labels to scan, scan them.
12 Confirm that the scanned calibrator information is correct.
You can confirm the saved calibrator information by selecting CONFIG. > Calibration
Setup > Calibrators > Set Conc Value [F5] or CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General.
If you find that you have scanned the wrong two-dimensional bar code labels, repeat
this procedure from the beginning.
In the section labeled Step 2, the system displays the calibrator position that you have
selected in the Calibration Setup: Calibrators tab (CONFIG. > Calibration Setup >
Calibrators).
13 Confirm the position, and use the Forward and Back icons to change the position if
necessary.
14 To register the calibrator ID in the Calibration Setup: Calibrators tab, select ID Update.
15 Select Set Parameters.
16 Select Close.
17 Select Save [F1].
3-14 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Program Calibrator Concentrations Manually

Use this function to review or change calibrator concentrations for all tests ordered for a
calibrator in a single dialog. Use this function to change all concentrations when the
calibrator lot number changes.
Important
Confirm the calibrator concentration value in the Configuration: You can confirm the
saved calibrator information by selecting CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General. It is
critical that all calibrator values are entered correctly.
For more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
2 Select Edit [F1].
3 Select the calibrator name to edit.

4 Select Set Conc Value [F5].
The system displays the concentration values of the selected calibrator.
Figure 3.8 Set Conc Value Dialog
5 To display or edit a different calibrator, select the calibrator name from Calibrator.
6 Enter the concentration values in Conc for each test (listed in Test Name) for the
calibrator. You can only enter concentration values for tests programmed to the
calibrator in the tab that displays when you select CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General.
7 To review or change the concentration for any other calibrator, repeat steps 5 and 6.
8 Select Close.
9 If a calibrator concentration changes, the system displays a confirmation message.

Select OK.
B71495AF 3-15
System Setup
Program Preset QC Mean and Range
You can confirm the saved calibrator information by selecting CONFIG. > Calibration
Setup > General.
Review the Loading History of Calibrator Information

You can review the loading history of calibration information.

The system displays the Calibration Setup: Calibrators screen.
2 To review the loading history for a calibrator, select the calibrator.

3 Select Calibrator Info. Loading History [F3].
The system displays the Calibrator Info. Loading History dialog.
Figure 3.9 Calibrator Info. Loading History Dialog
The system displays up to 30 of the last loads for each calibrator.
4 Review the list.

5 Select Close.
Program Preset QC Mean and Range

Use this procedure to review and change the QC mean, standard deviation, and range. For
detailed information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
1 Select CONFIG. > QC Setup > Preset.
2 In Test Name, select the test name.
4 Select Edit [F1].
5 In Control, select the control material.
6 In Multi/Single, select Multi or Single.
3-16 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Program a User Menu
7 Use the QC package insert or known values to enter the Mean, SD, and Range. The
system determines that QC is in or out of these preset ranges when the QC Mode is set
to Preset (on the Check tab).
a. In Mean, enter the QC mean.
b. In SD, enter a 1 SD value.
c. In Range, enter the value of the range. The range is the high value minus the low
value.
Note
To print the Mean, SD, and Range of the tests entered, select Print [F8] on the
Preset tab.
Program a User Menu

The User Menu lists 11 basic menus by default. Selecting a menu from the User Menu
enables you to jump directly to the screen of the selected menu. You can edit the contents of
the User Menu as needed.
You can assign an operator-defined menu name, but the system displays the original menu
name outside the User Menu.
Edit the User Menu
1 Select CONFIG. > User Menu. The system displays the default menus.
B71495AF 3-17
System Setup
Program a User Menu
Figure 3.10 User Menu Screen
2 Select Edit [F1].
3 Select a menu to edit.

The system displays the User Menu dialog.
Figure 3.11 User Menu Dialog
4 In Select Screen, select the menu to place in the User Menu.
5 In Display Data, enter an operator-defined menu name. You can enter up to 40

characters on each line.
6 Select Save.
Delete a User Menu

To remove a menu from the User Menu:
1 Select CONFIG. > User Menu.

3-18 B71495AF
3
System Setup
Program a User Menu
2 Select Edit [F1].
3 Select the menu to delete.

The User Menu dialog opens.
4 Select Delete.
The system deletes the selected menu.
5 Select Save [F1].
B71495AF 3-19
System Setup
Program a User Menu
3-20 B71495AF
CHAPTER 4
Sample Programming and Processing
Sample Preparation
Confirm that there is sufficient sample for analysis along with the dead volume. To display
the volume needed for the ordered tests, select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order or STAT >
STAT (Patient) > Test Order. The system displays the sample volume required for ordered
tests at the bottom right-hand side of the screen. The sample volume does not include the
dead volume.
The minimum dead volume required for sample detection varies depending on the sample
cup or tube. For information about dead volumes for tubes and cups, refer to Cups or Tubes
Specifications.
After centrifuging sample tubes, confirm that there is sufficient volume of serum or plasma.
If the serum or plasma level is too low, transfer it to a smaller cup or cup nested (inserted)
in a tube. For validated cups and nested cups available for racks or the STAT table, refer to
Cups or Tubes Specifications.
Follow your laboratory procedure to dispense the sample into the center of the cup or tube.
Confirm that the sample surface is level without bubbles present before analysis.
Prevent sample evaporation and contamination before analysis.
Specimen Preparation
For sample handling, refer to the reagent Instructions for Use.
Warning
If the following requirements are not met, results are affected and system errors
occur.
• Do not have fibrous material or fibrin in the sample, except for whole blood.
• Confirm that no air bubbles are in the samples, including samples transferred to the DxC
700 AU from a Laboratory Automation System.
• Dispense sample volume in the quantity required for analysis and the dead volume. For
information about dead volumes for tubes and cups, refer to Cups or Tubes
Specifications.
• In Test Volume and Methods, you can set the sample volume dilution to 0 μL (default) or
10 μL. When the Dilution is 0 μL, the system does not dilute the sample and it adds an
extra 3 μL per test to the sample volume to ensure dispensing accuracy. For example, if
the sample volume of a test is 3 μL, the system aspirates 6 μL per test and dispenses 3 μL.
If 10 tests are ordered on a sample, the system adds a total of 30 μL to the sample
volume. When the Dilution is 10 μL, the system adds 10 μL of water to the sample and
does not aspirate any extra sample volume per test.
• After sample aspiration, the sample probe is rinsed in the wash well, and a small amount
of water is transferred to the sample when the next test is aspirated. If the initial sample
volume is small, and 20 or more tests are being analyzed on the sample, add an extra 200
μL to the required sample volume to avoid diluting the sample.
B71495AF 4-1
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Sample Tubes and Cups in Racks
• Confirm that a volume of serum or plasma sufficient for analysis plus the needed dead
volume is in a primary tube. The dead volume required in a primary tube is 4 mm above
the non-sample (cells or gel) layer.
• When the serum quantity is small, perform analysis after transferring the sample to a
smaller cup or cup nested (inserted) in a tube. For more information, refer to Cups or
Tubes Specifications.
• When the serum quantity is small, the system can aspirate blood cells below the serum
and results can be affected.
If your laboratory uses different height tubes on a Laboratory Automation System, Beckman
Coulter sets the sample probe to descend to the highest tube at the time of installation. Be
sure the dead volume of tubes meet minimum requirements.
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Sample Tubes and Cups in Racks
Maximum sample volume limits are provided to prevent sample from spilling when the
rack moves from the rack input area to the rack output area on the analyzer. If sample spills
onto the rack belt and lane surfaces, rack jams and rack transfer errors may occur.
Determine the maximum sample volume limits for the validated sample tubes and cups
used in your laboratory. Refer to Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Tubes in Racks and
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Other Containers in Racks.
Use the following instructions to confirm that the sample levels in the tubes and cups do
not exceed the maximum sample volume limits in the before placing the tubes or cups in
racks for analysis.
Maximum Sample Volume Limits in Tubes and Cups

Refer to the applicable tube diagrams in Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Tubes in
Racks and Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Other Containers in Racks while performing
the following steps.
1. Confirm the sample tubes and cups that are being used in your laboratory.
2. Confirm the maximum sample volume limit of the tube or cup by using the applicable
dimensions or volumes specified in the diagrams.
Important
• If the sample level is above the maximum sample volume limit, Beckman Coulter
recommends removing sample until the sample level in the tube or cup is at or below the
recommended level. If a sample exceeding the maximum sample volume limit was not
removed before analysis, inspect the rack transfer lanes on the analyzer after analysis to
determine whether any sample spilled onto the rack transfer lanes. If any sample spilled
onto the rack transfer lanes or racks, clean the area by wiping with an alcohol prep pad
(70% isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
• Confirm that all tubes and cups are pushed completely down into the rack.
4-2 B71495AF
4
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in the Rack

When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, analysis with racks is
not available.
Rack Preparation
Before you start analysis, dispense a sample into sample cups or tubes and set these cups or
tubes in the correct rack. The racks come in five different colors. Each rack color has a
specified purpose or application. Racks are placed on the rack input area. A maximum of 15
racks, or 150 samples can be placed on the rack input area. Racks can be continuously
loaded on the rack input area as space is available.
Rack Types
The system identifies the rack type from the combination of magnets set into the rack
bottom. The rack colors, applications, and magnet combinations are shown in the following
table.
Table 4.1 Rack Color, Application, and Magnet Position
Color Rack Application Magnet
1, 2, 3
White Used to analyze first-run samples and rerun samples.
Blue Used to calculate reagent blanks for creating calibration curves.
Yellow Used to create calibration curves.
Green Used to analyze control samples.
B71495AF 4-3
Table 4.1 Rack Color, Application, and Magnet Position (Continued)

Color Rack Application Magnet
1, 2, 3
Red Used to analyze emergency samples.
The rack positions are numbered 1 to 10. The magnets are located on the bottom of the
rack at the position number 1 end.
Place Samples into each Rack Type

Two options are available to place the samples in the rack:
1. The system analyzes different sample types (serum, urine, other-1, other-2, and whole
blood) in one rack. The system recognizes the sample type with the test order
information. This is the default setting.
2. The system analyzes only the same sample type in one rack. The system recognizes the
sample type by the rack ID range that you assign to each sample type. This is an
optional setting that you can request.
By default, the system analyzes different sample types in one rack, but you can request for a
Beckman Coulter Representative to program the system during installation to analyze only
the same sample type in one rack. To determine if your system has the default setting, look
at the [Rack ID Limit] section of the Analysis Mode screen (CONFIG. > Analysis Mode). You
cannot edit the values in the [Rack ID Limit] section if it is in default mode. For more
information, contact Beckman Coulter.
White Rack (Routine Analysis)

Set the sample cups or tubes according to the sample identification mode.
• Bar Code mode - Samples can be placed in any order.
• Sequential mode - Place cups or tubes in numeric order according to the order without
leaving empty spaces in the rack.
• Rack ID mode - Place samples in sample-number order according to the rack ID and
sample position (1 to 10) in the rack. The sample number equals (rack ID -1) x 10 +
position as shown in the following table.
Table 4.2 Sample Number according to the Rack ID and Position
Sample Number Rack ID Position
1 1 1
12 2 2
25 3 5
4-4 B71495AF
4
Warning
For sequential mode, place samples in numeric sample number order according to the
order without leaving any empty positions in the racks. If there are empty positions in
the racks, the ordered sample number and the sample number determined during
analysis do not coincide, and concordance errors can occur. Beckman Coulter does not
recommend running patient samples in sequential mode as positive patient
identification cannot be maintained.
Blue Rack (Reagent Blank)

Place a sample cup or tube filled with deionized water or diluent in positions according to
the programming in CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > Calibrators <RB Sample Information>. For
more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Yellow Rack (Calibrators)

In Calibration Setup, the calibrator is programmed to a calibrator number (1 to 200).
The system identifies calibrator numbers 1 to 200 by the rack ID and position. For example,
calibrator numbers 1 to 10 are placed in rack ID 0001, calibrator numbers 11 to 20 are
placed in rack ID 0002, and so on.
If you enable calibrator Bar Code Operation, assign a calibrator ID to the calibrator. Place
calibrators with bar code labels in any position in the yellow racks.
Green Rack (Quality Control)

In QC Setup, a QC number (1 to 100) is programmed for a control material.
The system identifies control numbers 1 to 100 by the rack ID and position. For example,
control numbers 1 to 10 are placed in rack ID 0001, control numbers 11 to 20 are placed in
rack ID 0002, and so on.
If you enable QC Bar Code Operation, assign a QC ID to the control sample. Place control
samples with bar code labels in any position in the green racks.
Red Rack (Emergency Analysis)

For bar code mode, place samples in any position in the rack.
For sequential mode, place samples in sequential order by their order number. The system
automatically assigns sample numbers from the tubes or cups detected, so you can leave
empty spaces in the rack.
B71495AF 4-5
For example, if you order three samples and place the samples in positions 1, 3, and 5, the
system assigns E001 to the sample in position 1, E002 to the sample in position 3, and E003
to the sample in position 5.
Warning
When you use red racks for sequential mode, use a test summary to confirm that the
results correspond to the samples as processed in the rack.
Warning
Beckman Coulter recommends using bar code labels for samples to guarantee positive
patient identification.
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack
1 Place each sample in the correct rack.

Racks are color-coded. Each rack color indicates a different type of analysis. You can
place the different sample types (serum, urine, other-1, other-2, and whole blood) in
one rack. This behavior is the default setting. If you want to assign a specific rack ID
range to each sample type, contact Beckman Coulter.
Warning
Insert the sample tubes or cups correctly into the rack. If the tube or cup is not
pushed down to the bottom of the rack, cup detection does not work correctly
and rack jams can occur.
2 Look at each opening in the rack and confirm that you align the bar code label in the
center. The bar code label can only deviate 2 mm from the center. If the bar code label is
not aligned with the opening in the rack, lift it out and place it in correctly.
Warning
For sample tubes with bar code labels, do not rotate the tube while it is in the
rack. Rotating can cause bar code label contamination or damage, resulting in bar
code label read errors. Rotate sample tubes after they have been removed from
the racks.
4-6 B71495AF
4
Figure 4.1 Placing a Sample Cup or Tube in a Rack
1. Direction that rack moves 4. Bar code label

2. NE rack 5. Sample cup
3. The rack ID label is applied to this 6. Center
surface. 7. Bar code label
Warning
Use only NE racks. An NE rack has a window on the side to facilitate a smooth
insertion of different types of sample cups into the rack, and does not
compromise bar code label readability.
B71495AF 4-7
Place Racks on the Rack Input Area
Figure 4.2 Examples of Tubes and Cups Correctly Placed in Racks
1. Small diameter tube with ID 4. Large diameter tube with ID and

2. Large diameter tube with ID Hitachi cup
3. Hitachi cup

The rack input area can hold a maximum of 15 racks (150 samples). Close the top and front
covers immediately after placing the racks on the rack input area. When the top or front
cover is open, the rack input area stops moving and the system does not process the racks.
During MEASURE mode, open the top or front cover to add more racks, and close all covers
after you place the racks on the rack input area.
Warning
Never look directly into the bar code readers. The laser light can cause serious eye
damage.
1 Open the top or front cover of the rack input area.

2 Place the racks on the rack input area.
4-8 B71495AF
4
Figure 4.3 Placing Racks on the Rack Input Area
1. Rack ID label surface 4. Rack input area

2. Top cover 5. Rack
3. Front cover
Figure 4.4 Top View of Rack Input Area
1. Rack identification sensor (white) 2. Rack loading slots (up to 15 racks)
Place the first rack to the right of the positions that are located where the letter A is in
the diagram. The rack input area does not operate correctly when you place it in a
position that is located where the letter A is in the diagram.
3 For calibration and QC, place the blue rack, and then the yellow racks, and then the
green racks. Place the white racks for routine patient samples.
B71495AF 4-9
Order for Routine and Emergency Samples
Figure 4.5 Place Racks on the Rack Input Area
1. Direction that the racks move on the 3. Place in any order.

rack input area. 4. Place in any order.
2. Place a cup filled with deionized 5. Place in any order.
water or diluent in position 1 or 2.
Assign deionized water or diluent to position 1 or 2 in the blue reagent blank rack in RB
Sample Information for each sample type in the Calibration Setup: Calibrators tab
(CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > Calibrators).
Important
When several yellow racks are required for calibration, set the yellow racks one
after the other.
When several green racks are required for QC analysis, set the green racks one after
the other.
The system stops loading racks when it detects an open loading position on the rack
input area.
4 Close the top or front cover of the rack input area.

For each sample to analyze, enter the sample information and the order.
4-10 B71495AF
4
The system uses these orders to process each sample.
To run an emergency sample, order the sample as Emergency, and place the sample in a red
rack. Place the red rack in front of routine white racks on the rack input area.
Enter Manual Orders for Routine and Emergency Samples

Table 4.3 Test Order Tab Options
Option Description
Search by Sample ID Search for samples using the sample ID.
Test Total The system displays the total number of unprocessed first-run and rerun
tests.
Select Auto Rerun Orders The system selects rerun tests using the rerun criteria programmed in
CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters and Rerun Check Parameters. Use
this button when Auto Rerun Order is No in the Flag tab.
Perform Replicates You can perform replicates for system verification such as calibration
linearity checks. The system creates an index for replicate analysis after
you select this button. A maximum of 20 replicates are available per test.
When system verification completes, select Exit Replicates? in the Home
screen to return to normal analysis. The system then creates an index. For
more information, refer to Perform Replicates.
Rerun [F3] The system displays the Rerun dialog. You can order a rerun test by sample
or by batch.
Pending List [F4] The system displays a list of unprocessed first-run and rerun samples.
Batch Entry [F5] You can order the same tests for first-run samples by batch.
Delete Test Order [F6] You can delete the test orders for first-run samples.
Test Dilution [F8] You can specify the dilution or concentration for each test. Program the
dilution and concentration parameters in the Rerun Test Parameters
screen.
Select the test. The test selection turns blue (processed with first-run
sample volume). If needed, select Test Dilution [F8] until the test
selection turns light blue (diluted) or orange (concentrated).
This button is available only in edit mode.
1 Select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order. The system displays the group of tests that you
have selected in the Create Index dialog.
B71495AF 4-11
Figure 4.6 Rack (Patient): Test Order Tab
3 In Sample Kind, select Switch to select Routine or Emergency.

— Routine - Analysis in a white rack
— Emergency - Analysis in a red rack
4 For bar code operation, enter the sample bar code number in Sample ID.
Note
In sequential mode, entering a value in Sample ID is optional. Enter a maximum of

26 alphanumeric characters to identify the sample.
5 If you dilute the sample manually, enter the sample dilution rate in Sample Dilution Rate.
6 Select the tests to run on the sample. The system highlights the tests in blue when it is
ordered. Select the test again to cancel the order. The system highlights tests in gray that
are not available for the selected sample type.
When selecting a panel, either:
— Select Panel to open the panel dialog and select a panel (or multiple panels).
— Use the keyboard to enter a panel number in Panel, and then select Enter.
Each time you select a test, the system updates the Selected Tests and Sample Volume
columns.
4-12 B71495AF
4
Note
When a test that you want to select is not available in the current Group, select the
Change Group Display. The system displays tests for all Groups in the list.
Note
Before a panel is available to order, it is necessary to program panels in the Panel:

Patient Sample tab (CONFIG. > Panel > Patient Sample). You can create a maximum
of 99 panels for each sample type. For more information, refer to Create a Sample
Panel.
Caution
The Sample Volume (μL) indicates the sample dispensing volume that the system
uses for analysis. The Sample Volume (μL) does not include the dead volume.
7 Select the Demographics tab to enter any required patient demographic information.
8 Confirm that the information on the Demographics tab and the Test Order tab is correct,
and then select Save [F2].
9 Repeat steps 2 to 8 to order more samples.
Note
To change the Sample Type for the system that identifies the sample type with rack
ID.
1. Select Close [F1].

2. Select the sample type in Type.
3. Select Edit [F1].
10 Select Close [F1].
Note
Select Pending List [F4] to view a list of samples that have been ordered, but have
not been processed on the analyzer. Select a Sample No. or Sample ID, then select
Go to view the specific sample order.
Enter Batch Orders

To perform the same tests on a group of samples, enter the orders in a single batch.
If you order tests for one sample, the system orders the tests for all of the samples in the
batch. If you enter patient information for a single sample in the Demographics tab, the
system orders the patient information for all samples in the batch. If using bar code mode,
B71495AF 4-13
the Sample ID entered for the first sample automatically increases by one digit for
subsequent samples.
1 Select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order. The system displays the group of tests that you
selected in the Create Index dialog.
2 Select the tests or panel for batch order for one sample. For more information on
manually ordering tests, refer to Enter Manual Orders for Routine and Emergency
Samples.
Note
If bar code mode is in use, enter the first sample ID in the batch.
3 Select Batch Entry [F5].
Figure 4.8 Batch Entry Dialog
4 Select Number of Samples to enter the number of samples required in the batch, or
select Last Sample No. to enter the last sample number in the batch.
5 Select OK.
4-14 B71495AF
4
Delete an Order
You can delete an order before the system processes the sample.
1 Select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order.
2 Select Delete Test Order [F6].
Figure 4.9 Delete Test Order Dialog (Displays with the default setting: The system analyzes
different sample types in one rack)
Figure 4.10 Delete Test Order Dialog (Displays with the optional setting: The system analyzes
only the same sample type in one rack)
3 To delete orders, make selections for Sample Kind and Type. Enter values in Search by
Sample No. or Search by Sample ID, or leave the asterisk to delete all orders for the
selected sample kind.
Note
If a processed sample is included in the Search by Sample No. or Search by Sample

ID, the system does not delete the order for that sample kind. If the system does
not delete the order, the system generates a Failed to delete sample event.
B71495AF 4-15
4 Select Delete.
Download Orders from a Laboratory Information System

You can download orders from a Laboratory Information System. Downloading can be:
• Realtime - The system downloads and executes orders automatically.
• Batch - The system waits for an operator to instruct it to download and execute orders.
(Only for LIS communication with RS232C)
1 Select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order.
2 Select Batch Order from LIS [F7].
Figure 4.12 Batch Order from LIS Dialog
3 In Sample Kind, select the sample kind and type to download from the Laboratory
Information System.
4-16 B71495AF
4
Processing Emergency Samples
4 In Sample No., enter the starting and ending sample numbers to download from the
laboratory information system.
5 Select OK.
A message displays while the system downloads the orders. When the download is
complete, the system closes the message dialog.
Processing Emergency Samples

The system uses red racks for analysis of emergency samples. Process emergency samples
with priority over routine samples by placing the red racks in front of the white racks on
the rack input area. An E sample number prefix in the order and sample results identifies
an emergency sample.
The quickest way to process a sample is from the STAT Table. For more information, refer to
Priority STAT Samples.
Priority STAT Samples

The system uses the STAT table for analysis of priority STAT samples. Priority STAT samples
run on the STAT table and interrupt the routine and emergency samples processing from
the rack input area. A priority STAT is the fastest way to process a sample. A sample number
in the order and sample results that is prefixed by the letter P identifies a priority STAT
sample.
For the STAT table, the sample type is identified when you order a test, not by specifying
positions on the STAT table.
For STAT table operation, there are two sample identification modes: bar code (Bar Code)
and position assignment (Cup Pos.). When you select Cup Pos. in the STAT Table Setting
dialog (STAT > STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), the system allows you to run the
patient samples placed only in the positions assigned for the patient samples. For example,
if you assign the positions 1, 2, and 3 to the patient samples, you can use only these three
positions for the patient samples.
Enter Manual Orders for Priority STAT Samples

If communication with the LIS is not functioning, you can manually order priority STAT
samples in the STAT (Patient): Test Order tab (STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order).
The system cannot process whole blood samples from the STAT table.
1 Select STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order.
B71495AF 4-17
Figure 4.13 STAT (Patient): Test Order Tab
The system displays the group of tests that you have selected in the Create Index dialog.
3 If you have selected the Bar Code option for patient samples in the STAT Table Setting
dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), enter the sample ID (number on the bar
code label) in Sample ID.
4 If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for patient samples in the STAT Table Setting
dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), enter the cup position in Cup Pos.
5 If you dilute the sample manually, enter the sample dilution rate in Sample Dilution Rate.
6 Select the tests to run on the sample. The system highlights the tests in blue when it is
ordered. Select the test again to cancel the order. The system highlights tests in gray that
are not available for the selected sample type.
When selecting a panel, either:
— Select Panel to open the panel dialog and select a panel (or multiple panels).
— Use the keyboard to enter a panel number in Panel, and then select Enter.
Each time you select a test, the system updates the Selected Tests and Sample Volume
columns.
Note
When a test that you want to select is not available in the current Group, select the
Change Group Display. The system displays tests for all Groups in the list.
4-18 B71495AF
4
Note
Before a panel is available to order, it is necessary to program panels in the Panel:

Patient Sample tab (CONFIG. > Panel > Patient Sample). You can create a maximum
of 99 panels for each sample type. For more information, refer to Create a Sample
Panel.
Caution
7 Select the Demographics tab to enter any required patient demographic information.
9 To order another sample, repeat steps 2 to 8.

10 To end the order process, select Close [F1].
Processing Priority STAT Samples

Use the STAT Status screen to run and monitor the progress of priority STAT samples,
reagent blank, calibrators, and control samples on the STAT table.
Table 4.4 Options on the STAT Status Screen
Option Description
Start STAT Starts priority STAT analysis on the STAT table.
STAT Pause Moves the STAT table to Pause. Use this button to load a new sample or remove
[F2] dispensed samples when the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is blinking.
When your system is set to Multiple Loads STAT Table operation (automation systems
only), the STAT Pause [F2] function in the STAT Status screen is disabled except during
PAUSE and REAGENT PAUSE modes.
STAT Check Determines the presence of a cup or tube and reads the sample ID (if the system is using
[F3] bar code mode) for all 22 STAT table positions.
Display Jumps to the STAT: STAT (Patient) tab when a patient position is selected.
Sample
Assignment
[F4]
CAL/QC Displays the calibrators and control samples required for the ordered tests.
Position [F5]
STAT Table Allows you to specify the sample identification mode (Bar Code or Cup Pos.) for patient
Setting [F6] samples, calibration, and QC. Allows you to assign positions 1 through 22 in Sample
Kind as Patient, Cal., QC or Free, and to assign Cal. and QC positions to a calibrator and
control sample.
B71495AF 4-19
Table 4.4 Options on the STAT Status Screen (Continued)

Option Description
Previous Cup Displays the sample cup or tube positions on the STAT table that were analyzed during
Set [F7] the previous run initiated by selecting Start STAT.
This information only displays when you select Cup Pos. in the [Test Order STAT]
section of the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT > STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]).
For more information, refer to Program the Bar Code or Cup Positions Option for
Calibration and QC from the STAT Table.
Sample ID Allows you to edit of the sample ID for the selected position.
Edit [F8]
Processing Priority STAT Samples in Bar Code Mode
1 Select STAT > STAT Status.
Figure 4.14 STAT Status Screen
2 Review the Pos., Kind, and Status columns for available positions on the STAT table.
Note
You can place patient samples only in the positions for which you set the sample
kind to Free (bar-coded samples only) in the STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Table
Setting [F6]). The system displays the available positions as Free (bar-coded
samples only) under the Kind column in the STAT Status screen.
4-20 B71495AF
4
Note
When the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is blinking, select STAT Pause [F2] to
put the STAT table in PAUSE mode. To continue analysis, confirm that the STAT table
cover is closed and select Start STAT in the software interface.
When your system is set to Multiple Loads STAT Table operation (automation
systems only), the STAT Pause [F2] function in the STAT Status screen is disabled
except during PAUSE and REAGENT PAUSE modes.
Important
If the STAT table is in PAUSE mode for an extended time, the analyzer changes to
PAUSE mode. The time for the mode change depends on the reason that the STAT
TABLE ROTATION LED is continuously blinking slowly:
— Sample contamination settings
— Reagent blank or calibrator programmed on the STAT table
— Auto-QC programmed on the STAT table
Important
Do not remove pending reagent blank, calibrators, control samples, or patient

samples from the STAT table. After you select Start STAT in the software interface,
the system generates an event if you remove pending samples from the STAT table.
Caution
When you open the small STAT table cover to load STAT samples, keep the upper
cover closed. This precaution prevents injury and prevents the entire STAT table
from opening.
4 Load the samples in the available positions. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to
rotate the STAT table as required.

7 Review the Error List in the Start STAT dialog.

8 To initiate the automatic STAT table check, select Start. To take corrective actions, select
Cancel.
9 Confirm that the system displays the Cup column as Present for the corresponding
positions, and review the Status and Comment columns.
The amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED blinks until the system completes sample
aspiration. You can open the small STAT table cover when the amber STAT TABLE
ROTATION LED is not blinking to remove existing samples and load new samples. If you
B71495AF 4-21
open the small STAT table cover when the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is
blinking, the system generates a STAT Small Cover Open event.
Processing Priority STAT Samples in Cup Position Mode
Before processing priority STAT samples in Cup Position mode on the STAT table, select
STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order and order the STAT samples. For more information, refer
to Enter Manual Orders for Priority STAT Samples. The system displays the cup position for
each patient sample in the STAT Status tab.

The system displays the STAT Status screen:
Figure 4.15 STAT Status Screen
2 Review the Pos., Kind, Type, and Sample No. columns for the patient samples on the
STAT table.
Note
When the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is blinking, select STAT Pause [F2] to
put the STAT table in PAUSE mode. To continue analysis, confirm that the STAT table
cover is closed and select Start STAT in the software interface.
4-22 B71495AF
4
Perform Quick STAT Operation
Important
If the STAT table is in PAUSE mode for an extended time, the analyzer changes to
PAUSE mode. The time for the mode change depends on the reason that the STAT
TABLE ROTATION LED is continuously blinking slowly:
— Sample contamination settings
— Reagent blank or calibrator programmed on the STAT table
— Auto-QC programmed on the STAT table
Important
Do not remove pending reagent blank, calibrators, control samples, or patient

samples from the STAT table. After you select Start STAT in the software interface,
the system generates an event if you remove pending samples from the STAT table.

4 Load the samples into the corresponding positions for the patient.
Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table as required.

The system displays the Start STAT dialog. If there are errors, the system displays the
list of errors in the dialog.

8 To initiate the STAT table check, select Start, or to take corrective actions, select Cancel.
If there are no errors specific to the STAT table after the STAT table check, the system
starts analysis.
9 If there are STAT table errors, the system displays errors in the Start STAT dialog.
Review the errors, then select Start to start analysis, or select Cancel to perform
corrective actions.
10 Confirm that the system displays Present for the corresponding positions in the Cup
column, and review the Status and Comment columns.
The amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED blinks until the system completes sample
aspiration. You can open the small STAT table cover when the amber STAT TABLE
ROTATION LED is not blinking to remove existing samples and load new samples.

Quick STAT operation provides the fastest STAT sample turnaround time because the STAT
table check is not performed.
B71495AF 4-23
Quick STAT operation is available for patient samples on the STAT table with the following
settings:
• Bar code mode is selected for patient samples. (For more information, refer to the
information about the parameters for the Analysis Mode screen in the DxC 700 AU
Reference Manual.)
• Automatic ACAL and QC are disabled for the test in the ACAL and QC tabs (CONFIG. >
AUTO ACAL/QC Setup > ACAL and QC). (These features are unavailable by default.)
• Automatic rerun is disabled for the STAT table. (To disable automatic rerun for the
STAT table, select Disabled for STAT in the Auto Rerun section in the Analysis Mode
screen (CONFIG. > Analysis Mode.))
When the system is programmed with these settings, the STAT START button on the
analyzer module is on. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Note
Quick STAT operation is available for patient samples only. If the system detects
calibrators or control samples on the STAT table during Quick STAT operation, the
system skips the calibrators or control samples and analyzes patient samples only.
1 Confirm that the STAT START button beside the STAT cover is on. If the STAT START button
is off, the Quick STAT operation is not available.
2 Confirm that the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is off.

4 Place patient samples in any Free positions. To rotate the STAT table as required, press
the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button.
Note
You can place patient samples only in the positions for which you set the sample
kind to Free in STAT Table Setting [F6].
Note
The system completes the analysis faster if you place the patient samples in Free
positions with smaller position numbers.

6 Press the STAT START button (button next to the STAT table on the analyzer module).
The system starts analysis. The amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED begins to blink.
4-24 B71495AF
4
Perform a Rerun
Figure 4.16 STAT START Button for Quick STAT Operation
1. STAT START button 2. STAT TABLE ROTATION LED
Note
You can pause analysis and load more patient samples on the STAT table. Select
STAT Pause [F2] in STAT > STAT Status and confirm that the amber STAT TABLE
ROTATION LED turns off. Place the additional patient samples in available Free
positions with greater position numbers than those for the existing samples. Press
the STAT START button to resume analysis.
Perform a Rerun
You can rerun samples in racks or on the STAT table automatically (Auto Rerun) or
manually (Manual Rerun).
Auto Rerun
Auto Rerun is enabled when you do all of the following:
• Program Auto Rerun to Enabled in the CONFIG.: Analysis Mode screen (CONFIG. >
Analysis Mode).
• Program rerun criteria in the CONFIG.: Rerun Test Parameters screen (CONFIG. > Rerun
Test Parameters).
• Program Auto Rerun Order to Yes in the Rerun Check Parameters: Flag tab (CONFIG. >
Rerun Check Parameters > Flag).
B71495AF 4-25
Perform a Rerun
The system then automatically orders rerun tests using the programmed rerun criteria and
reruns the samples in the first-run white or red rack, or the first-run positions on the STAT
table.
If you select Yes in Rerun Data Over-Writes First-Run Data Automatically in the Rerun Check
Parameters: Flag tab, the system automatically overwrites the first-run data with the rerun
data.
If the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, the Laboratory Information
System determines the rerun criteria. The DxC 700 AU handles samples that have been
processed and transported from the Laboratory Automation System as first-run samples
and analyzes the samples with a rerun order from the Laboratory Information System. The
DxC 700 AU handles samples that have been processed on the STAT table as rerun samples
and analyzes the samples on the STAT table with a rerun order from the Laboratory
Information System. When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System,
Auto Rerun is available only on the STAT table.
Manual Rerun
Manual Rerun is enabled when you set Auto Rerun to Disabled in the CONFIG.: Analysis
Mode screen (CONFIG. > Analysis Mode).
If you program rerun criteria in the Rerun Test Parameters and Rerun Check Parameters
screens (CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters and Rerun Check Parameters), and set Auto Rerun
Order to Yes in the Flag tab, the system automatically selects rerun tests using the
programmed rerun criteria. You can modify the selected rerun tests as required.
If you set Auto Rerun Order to No in the Flag tab, select rerun tests individually, or select
Select Auto Rerun Orders in TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order to get automatically rerun
tests selected using the programmed rerun criteria.
Rerun orders can be generated using rerun criteria programmed in the Rerun Test
Parameters screen and Rerun Check Parameters screen, or sent from the LIS. For more
information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Rerun Samples in the White or Red Rack
Perform the following procedure to rerun samples in white or red racks manually.
Note
Auto Rerun can be enabled or disabled.
Process rerun samples in the white or red rack from the first run, or place the rerun
samples in another white or red rack. If using the same white or red rack from the first run,
and not all samples in the rack have a rerun order, NO TESTS ORDERED FOR THIS SAMPLE
NO. events might occur, depending on the system programming. Contact Beckman Coulter
for more information.
1 Prepare the rerun samples using the protocol of your laboratory.
4-26 B71495AF
4
Perform a Rerun
Note
Refer to Print the Pending List as needed.
Caution
2 Place the rack on the rack input area.
Caution
For Rack ID or Sequential mode, keep the samples in the first-run positions in the
first-run rack to avoid sample concordance errors. For Bar Code mode, you can
place the rerun samples in any order in a new rack.
Note
When you process a rerun that includes all of the samples from the first-run in the
first-run positions in the first-run rack, NO TESTS ORDERED FOR THIS SAMPLE
NO. events occur for the samples without rerun orders.
3 Select Start.
Rerun Samples on the STAT Table
Perform the following procedure to rerun samples on the STAT table when Manual Rerun is
enabled (Auto Rerun is disabled).
1 Prepare the rerun samples using the protocol of your laboratory.
Note
Refer to Print the Pending List as needed.
Caution
3 Review the Pos., Kind, Type, and Status columns. Place the samples in the positions on
the STAT table. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table as
required.
B71495AF 4-27
Perform a Rerun
Caution
For Cup Pos. mode, keep the rerun samples in the first-run positions on the STAT
table to avoid concordance errors. For Bar Code mode, you can keep the rerun
samples in the first-run positions or place the rerun samples in the positions for
which you set the sample kind to Patient or Free in STAT Table Setting [F6]. The
system displays the available positions as Patient or Free under the Kind
column in the STAT Status screen.

6 Select Start to initiate the automatic STAT table check. Select Cancel to take corrective
actions.
7 If there are no errors specific to the STAT table after the STAT check, the system starts
analysis. If there are STAT table errors, review the errors listed in the Start STAT dialog.
Select Start to start analysis, or select Cancel to perform corrective actions.
8 Confirm that the system displays the Cup column as Present for the corresponding
positions, and review the Status and Comment columns.
The amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED keeps blinking until the system completes
sample aspiration. You can open the small STAT table cover to remove or load samples
when the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is not blinking. If you open the small STAT
table cover when the amber STAT TABLE ROTATION LED is blinking, the system
generates a STAT Small Cover Open event.
Print the Pending List
The rerun sample pending list includes the rack ID number, first-run sample number,
sample ID, and patient information.
1 For rack analysis: Select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order.
For STAT analysis: Select STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order.
2 Select Print [F8]. The system displays the Print dialog.
3 In Print List, select Pending List.
4 In List Format, select a list format.

In Reporter, the system displays the Operator Name entered in HOME > Change Operator
[F2]. You can also enter a new operator name or enter a pre-programmed comment by
selecting Select.
5 Select OK. The system prints the pending list.
4-28 B71495AF
4
Perform a Rerun
Order Rerun Tests
1 For rack analysis, select TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order.
For STAT analysis, select STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order.
Table 4.5 Test Order Tab Options for Rerun Tests
Option Description
Search by Sample ID Search for samples using the sample ID.
Test Total The system displays the total number of unprocessed first-run and
rerun tests.
Select Auto Rerun Orders The system selects rerun tests using the rerun criteria programmed in
the Rerun Test Parameters and Rerun Check Parameters screens
(CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters and Rerun Check Parameters).
Use this button when Auto Rerun Order is No in the Flag tab.
Rerun [F3] The system displays the Rerun dialog. You can order a rerun test by
sample or by batch.
Pending List [F4] The system displays a list of unprocessed first-run and rerun samples.
Test Dilution [F8] You can specify the dilution or concentration for each test. Program the
screen. Select the test. The test selection turns blue (normal). If
needed, select Test Dilution [F8] until the test selection turns light
blue (diluted) or orange (concentrated).
Note
The option is available only when the software is in

Editing mode.
2 For rack analysis: In Sample Kind, select Switch to select Routine or Emergency.
For STAT analysis: If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for patient samples in the
STAT Table Setting dialog (STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6]), enter the cup position
number on the STAT table in Cup Pos.
4 In Sample No., enter the sample number. Or, select Search by Sample ID to search the
sample by sample ID.
a. If you select Configuration Parameters > Rerun Check Parameters > Flag and select Yes
in Auto Rerun Order, the system automatically selects rerun tests using the
programmed rerun criteria. If you do not modify the selected rerun tests or
program dilution by sample or test, proceed to step 10.
b. Proceed to step 5 in the following cases:
— The system does not automatically select rerun tests because you set Auto
Rerun Order to No in the Flag tab.
B71495AF 4-29
Perform a Rerun
— You want to modify the selected rerun tests or program dilution of the selected
rerun tests by sample or test.
5 Select Rerun [F3]. The system displays the Rerun dialog. The Rerun dialog displays the
result from the first run and flags (if any) under each test name.
Note
To view tests with auto rerun orders select any of the following:
— RESULT > Sample Status > Rerun [F3]
— RESULT > Detail > Rerun [F3]
— TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order > Rerun [F3]
— STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order > Rerun [F3]
Figure 4.17 Rerun Dialog: Rack Analysis
Figure 4.18 Rerun Dialog: STAT Analysis
4-30 B71495AF
4
Search for Results to View, Print, or Send to LIS
Option Description
Test Dilution You can specify dilution or concentration for each test. Program the
screen.
Sample Dilution Rate Enter the dilution rate (1 to 999) if you manually dilute a sample. The
system calculates the result at the dilution rate.
6 In Sample Dilution Rate, enter the dilution rate (1 to 999) if you manually dilute the
sample.
7 Select rerun tests individually.
Note
To get rerun tests selected using the programmed rerun criteria, you can select
Select Auto Rerun Orders in a Test Order screen (TEST > Rack (Patient) > Test Order
or STAT > STAT (Patient) > Test Order).
8 Select a test if you specify dilution or concentration for each test. Select Test Dilution to
switch among normal (blue), diluted (light blue), and concentrated (orange). The
system dilutes or concentrates the sample for the test using the parameters
programmed in the Rerun Test Parameters screen.
9 Select OK to order the selected rerun tests. Select Cancel to clear the selected rerun
tests.
Note
Select Delete all Rerun Tests for this sample and then select OK to delete all the
rerun tests selected and ordered for the sample.
10 Select Start.

Search for patient samples, reagent blanks, calibrators, and control samples to view, print,
or send to the LIS.
1 Select RESULT > Sample Manager > Main.
Note
The system displays data from the current index by default. If no samples have been
processed on the current index, the system displays a Data Not Found message.
Select OK.
B71495AF 4-31
Figure 4.19 Sample Manager: Main Tab
2 The system displays the data from the current index with all samples selected
(highlighted in blue).
— Select Clear All Samples to clear the selection of all samples from the list.
— Select Select All Samples to highlight all samples the system displays in the list.
— Select Abnormal to display only abnormal data.
— Select Rerun Data to display only rerun data.
To print the selected data from the current index, refer to Print Results.
3 Select Find [F3] to search for data. The system displays the Find dialog.
4-32 B71495AF
4
Figure 4.20 Find Dialog: Patient
4 In Index, select the start index and the last index to search for data in a specific index or
index range.
Note
If you select a specific index, select the same index in both fields.
5 Select Search the designated sample or Search all patient samples.

— Selecting Search the designated sample searches for patient sample, reagent blank,
calibration, and QC.
— Selecting Search all patient samples searches for all of the patient samples selected.
RB/Cal/QC is not available to select.
6 Select Data Not Yet Transferred to LIS and Data Not Yet Printed if necessary.
— Selecting Data Not Yet Transferred to LIS searches only for samples not transferred
to the LIS.
— Selecting Data Not Yet Printed searches only for samples not printed.
7 In Patient, select the sample kind and sample type to search.

— In Search by Sample No., enter the sample number range to search. To search for all
samples, leave the asterisk.
Note
If Search by Sample No. is empty, the system does not use the search criteria for
the search.
B71495AF 4-33
— In Search by Sample ID, enter the sample ID range to search. To search for all
— For Type, select the sample type to search.
8 In RB/Cal/QC, select the sample kind to search.
Note
This procedure is not necessary if you select Search all patient samples.
Figure 4.21 Find Dialog: RB/Cal/QC
— In Search by Sample No., enter the sample number range to search. To search all
Note
If Search by Sample No. is empty, the system does not use the search criteria
for the search.
— In QC/Cal. No., enter the QC number (1 to 100) or the calibrator number (1 to 200).
To search all QC and calibrator numbers, leave the asterisk.
— To search samples with a specific QC or calibrator ID, enter the QC or calibrator bar
code number in Search by Control/Calibrator ID.
9 Select Search by Patient Info. to search by the patient demographics. The system
displays the Search by Patient Info. dialog.
10 Enter the patient demographics to search.

11 Select OK. The system highlights the data in blue.
4-34 B71495AF
4
Note
To print the results, refer to Print Results.
To send the results to a Laboratory Information System, refer to Send Results to LIS.
Print Results
Note
List formats are programmed for your laboratory during installation and as needed.
For more help with formatting a new or existing list format, contact Beckman Coulter.
For more information on the format and print options, refer to the DxC 700 AU
Reference Manual.
1 In the Sample Manager: Main tab (RESULT > Sample Manager > Main), select the results
of patient samples, reagent blanks, calibrators, or control samples that you want to
print.
To use the search feature to select the results, refer to Search for Results to View, Print,
or Send to LIS.
2 Select Print [F8].
3 In List Format, select a list format to print.

In Reporter, the system displays the Operator Name entered in the Operator Name
dialog (when you select HOME > Change Operator [F2]). If necessary, enter a new name
or use Select to enter a pre-programmed comment. Reporter is an option that can be
added to the list format if it is selected in the Print Information tab (CONFIG. > List
Format > Print Information).
4 Select OK. The system prints the report.

To cancel printing, select Print Stop [F8].
Send Results to LIS
Important
Before transferring data to the Laboratory Information System, confirm that the DxC
700 AU is on line and connected to a Laboratory Information System.
The Send to LIS [F7] option is only available when Realtime or Batch for Results Transfer is
programmed in CONFIG. > Online > Setup.
B71495AF 4-35
Perform Replicates
1 In the Sample Manager: Main tab (RESULT > Sample Manager > Main), select the results
of patient samples, reagent blanks, calibrators, or control samples that you want to send
to the LIS.
To use the search feature to select the results, refer to Search for Results to View, Print,
or Send to LIS.
2 Select Send to LIS [F7]. The system displays the Send to LIS dialog.
3 Select OK. The system performs the online transfer.

To stop the transfer, select Stop sending to LIS [F7] and select OK in the Stop Sending to
LIS dialog.
Perform Replicates
You can perform replicates for system verification such as calibration linearity verifications.
This procedure uses primarily the bar code mode. Non-bar code mode is optional.
Replicates do not support the following features:

• Online order and transfer of analysis results with a Laboratory Information System
• Auto rerun
• Sample analysis directly from the track connecting to the Laboratory Automation
System
(Systems connected to the Laboratory Automation System can use only the STAT table
to perform replicates.)
• ISE and LIH tests
• Rerun analysis
• Quick STAT operation
• RB, Calibration, or QC
• Switch to next bottle sequence
Before shifting the system to the replicates analysis:
• Confirm that the current bottles in use (sequence 1) have sufficient tests to perform
the analysis. If not, replace with new bottles.
• Confirm that all reagents used for the replicate mode have valid calibration and QC is
performed, if necessary.
1 Shift the system to the replicates analysis.

a. Confirm that the system is in STANDBY mode.
b. Confirm Output Conc. is selected in the Data Output at Analytical Measuring Range
Error option box under Config > Format.
4-36 B71495AF
4
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.22 Sample Program Format: Suppress Results
Figure 4.23 Sample Program Format: Output Conc.
c. If necessary, select Edit [F1]. Select Output Conc. and then select Save [F1].
d. For rack analysis (using the white or red rack), select Test > Rack (Patient) ＞ Test
Order.
For STAT table analysis, select STAT > STAT (Patient) ＞ Test Order.
The system displays the Test Order tab.
B71495AF 4-37
Perform Replicates
e. Select Perform Replicates.

The system displays the Perform Replicates dialog.
Figure 4.24 Perform Replicates Dialog
f. Select Replicate Order by Replicate Sequence or Replicate Order by Test.

— Replicate Order by Replicate Sequence: Dispensing occurs on each test one by
one in sequential order, and replicates in the same order a specified number of
times, for example, ABCABCABC. A, B, or C represents a unique chemistry.
— Replicate Order by Test: Dispensing replicates for each test a specified number
of times, and continues with subsequent tests in sequential order, for example,
AAAAABBBCC. A, B, or C represents a unique chemistry.
The system applies the selected method for dispensing to all replicates for which
you start analysis in step 8.
g. Select OK.
The system creates an index for replicates.
Note
After creating an index for replicates, the system keeps displaying Exit
Replicates? in the status area until you exit replicates.
4-38 B71495AF
4
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.25 Exit Replicates?
2 Program the test in the Test Order tab.

a. For rack analysis:
1. In Type, select the sample type.

2. For bar code operation, enter the sample bar code number in Sample ID.
Note
In sequential mode, you can optionally enter a value in Sample ID. Enter a
maximum of 26 alphanumeric characters to identify the sample.
3. If you dilute the sample manually, enter the sample dilution rate in Sample
Dilution Rate.
4. Select the tests to run on the sample. The tests selected are highlighted in blue.
b. For STAT table analysis:
1. In Type, select the sample type.

2. If you have selected the Bar Code option for patient samples in the STAT Table
Setting dialog, STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6], enter the sample ID
(number on the bar code label) in Sample ID.
3. If you have selected the Cup Pos. option for patient sample in the STAT Table
Setting dialog, STAT Status > STAT Table Setting [F6], enter the cup position in Cup
Pos.
4. If you dilute the sample manually, enter the sample dilution rate in Sample
Dilution Rate.
5. Select the tests to run on the sample. The tests selected are highlighted in blue.
3 Select Replicates [F7].
B71495AF 4-39
Perform Replicates
4 Enter the number of replicates.
Note
Enter a maximum of 20 sample or test replicates. Refer to the example for each
method selected.
a. If you selected the Replicate Order by Replicate Sequence test in step 1.f, the system
automatically selects Sample Replicates. Enter the number of Sample Replicates.
This entry applies the same number of replicates to all tests ordered. For example,
any one of the following bullets show a valid programming with a total of ≤20
replicates for each sample.
— A (5), B (5), C (5), D (5)
— A (10), B (10)
— A (20)
Figure 4.26 Replicates Dialog with Test Item Replicates Button Selected
b. If you selected Replicate Order by Test in step 1.f, select Sample Replicates or Test
Item Replicates.
— If you selected the Sample Replicates, enter the number of Sample Replicates.
This entry applies the same number of replicates to all tests ordered. For
example, any one of the following bullets show a valid programming with a
total of ≤20 replicates for each sample.
— A (5), B (5), C (5), D (5)
— A (10), B (10)
— A (20)
4-40 B71495AF
4
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.27 Replicates Dialog with Sample Replicates Button Selected
— If you selected Test Item Replicates, enter the number of test replicates for each
selected test. The Replicate number for each selected test can be different. For
example, any one of the following bullets shows a valid programming with a
total of ≤20 replicates for each sample.
— A (5), B (4), C (6), D (2)
— A (10), B (5)
— A (20)
Figure 4.28 Replicates Dialog with Test Item Replicates Button Selected
5 Select OK.
The system displays in the Test Order tab the number of replicates, in parentheses, after
each test.
Note
The system applies the replicate number to all tests ordered. Only selected tests
highlighted in blue are processed.
B71495AF 4-41
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.29 Display of the Number of Sample Replicates in the Test Order Tab
Figure 4.30 Display of the Number of Test Item Replicates in the Test Order Tab
6 Make a selection depending on if you are programming by Sample or programming by

Batch Order.
a. If you are programming by Sample, complete the following steps:
1. Select Save [F2].

2. To program more samples, repeat steps 2 to 6.
b. If you are programming by Batch Order, complete the following steps:
1. Select Batch Entry [F5].

2. Select Number of Samples to enter the number of samples required in the batch,
or select Last Sample No. to enter the number of the last sample in the batch.
3. Select OK.
4. To program more batch orders, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Note
To review programming, select Pending List [F4].
8 To start analysis, select Start for Rack Analysis, or select STAT Start in the software
interface for STAT table analysis.
9 Confirm the analysis results.

a. Confirm the statistics (SD and mean) obtained from replicates.
1. Select Result > Sample Manager.

2. Select the Data Statistics tab. The system displays the Main tab.
4-42 B71495AF
4
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.31 Data Statistics: Main Tab
3. Select the index range in Index.
Note
If you cannot find the index or the index is grayed out, perform the
following substeps to get the desired index.
a. Select Result > Sample Manager.

b. Select Find [F3].
c. Select the Data Replicates box. (Search only the data measured by
Replicates.)
B71495AF 4-43
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.32 Data Statistics: Search Results
d. Select the index range in Index.

e. Select OK.
f. Select the Data Statistics tab. The system displays the Main tab.
4. Select Search all samples or Search the designated sample.
5. If you select Search all samples, and you search the results with a specific sample
ID, enter the Sample ID in Search by Sample ID.
6. If you select Search the designated sample, set the search conditions in the tab.
a. In Sample Kind, select the sample kind to search.

b. Enter a specific sample number or sample ID to search, as required.
— The Search by Sample No. and Search by Sample ID fields default to
search all (indicated by the *) sample numbers and ID numbers.
— If you want to select a range of samples, enter a specific range for
Sample No. The search is not available for sample ID range.
c. In Type, select the sample type to search.
7. Select the Statistics tab to display the data statistics in the Statistics tab.
4-44 B71495AF
4
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.33 Data Statistics: Statistics Tab
The data statistics include the number of data points, mean, SD, CV (%), range,
and maximum and minimum results.
a. Select Test Name to display tests in test number order from 1 to 120. Select
Number of Data to display tests from the highest to lowest number of data
points. Select CV (%) to display tests from the highest to lowest CV.
b. Select up to 12 tests to display data statistics in the Chart View, Data View,
or Histogram tabs.
b. Confirm the analysis results in the Sample Manager (Result > Sample Manager),
Sample Status (Result > Sample Status), and Reaction Monitor (Result > Sample
Manager > Reaction Monitor) screens.
The system displays the number of replicates in parentheses after each test or sample
number, for example, ALT(2) or 0001(2).
10 Exit replicates.
a. Select HOME in STANDBY mode.
b. Select Exit Replicates? in the status area.
B71495AF 4-45
Perform Replicates
Figure 4.34 Replicates Home Screen
The system displays the Replicates dialog.
Figure 4.35 Replicates Dialog
c. Select OK.
The system creates an index and the Exit Replicates? button no longer displays in the
status area.
11 If you have changed to non-bar code mode, program the sample identification mode
back to the original setting: CONFIG. > Analysis Mode.
12 If you have performed step 1.d, program the Analytical Measuring Range Error Option
back to the original setting: CONFIG. > Format > Sample Program Format.
4-46 B71495AF
CHAPTER 5
System Monitoring and Results
Monitoring Analysis
The system status is continuously updated while the system is operating. Progress is
constantly monitored.
Monitor Results
Confirm that daily reagent blank, calibration, and QC results are acceptable before reporting
sample results. Review all results including reagent blank, calibration, QC, and samples for
flags. Take corrective actions before reporting any results with flags. Select EVENT to review
any generated events and take corrective actions for them.
For more information on monitoring the results, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
For more information on troubleshooting and corrective actions, refer to Troubleshooting

Reagents, Calibrators, Control Samples, and Patient Samples.
Identifying Sample Kinds and Types by Sample Data Prefix
Note
The system displays the sample data prefix in front of the sample number.
Table 5.1 Sample Data Prefix

Kind Type Sample Data Prefix
Routine Serum (None)
Urine U
Other-1 X
Other-2 Y
Whole Blood W
Emergency Sample Serum E
Urine UE
Other-1 XE
Other-2 YE
Whole Blood WE
STAT Sample Serum P
Urine UP
Other-1 XP
Other-2 YP
QC Q
B71495AF 5-1
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.1 Sample Data Prefix (Continued)

Kind Type Sample Data Prefix
CAL A
RB R
Note
Rerun samples are identified on the Sample Status screen (RESULT > Sample Status)
with 0001 (Rerun), on the Realtime Display screen (RESULT > Realtime Display) with
0001-R, and on print reports with (R) by the rerun tests.
Sample Status Screen

Select Sample Status to view sample information, estimated time of completion, and results.
1 Select RESULT > Sample Status.

The system displays the Results: Sample Status screen.
Figure 5.1 Results: Sample Status Screen
Table 5.2 Sample Status Screen Items

Item Description
View mode Displays the current view mode, Static or Realtime.
Sample No. The sample number highlighted in the rack color.
Cup Position The rack ID and cup position highlighted in the rack color.
Sample ID The sample ID (number on the bar code label).
5-2 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.2 Sample Status Screen Items (Continued)

Item Description
Order The time the cup in the rack passed the cup detector on the rack transport
belt.
Status In Process during sample analysis, or Done after analysis is complete.

Results The estimated completion time during sample analysis, or Error if the
results have a flag.
Find [F2]
Displays the Find dialog. Search for samples by sample number, sample ID,
or patient name.
Note
To search by patient name, enter Patient Name as a title in

the <Patient Information> section of the Sample Program
Format screen (CONFIG. > Format > Sample Program
Format). For Representation-1, select the number for the
entry.
To search by another patient demographic, enter the name

of the demographic as a title in the <Patient Information>
section of the Sample Program Format screen. For
Representation-2, select the number for the entry. When
you program Representation-2, you cannot search by sample
ID.
For more information, refer to the description of the Format

menu in the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Rerun [F3] Displays the Rerun dialog. You can order a rerun test for the samples that
you select.
Switch to Static View Switches between Switch to Static View [F4] and Switch to Realtime
[F4] View [F4]. Selecting Switch to Static View [F4] temporarily prevents the
sample status list from being updated. Use this function to review the status
or
of processed samples. The sample status list does not reflect any updates on
Switch to Realtime the sample status while Switch to Static View [F4] is selected. Selecting
View [F4] Switch to Realtime View [F4] resumes updating the sample status list.
Reaction Monitor Displays the Reaction Monitor screen.

[F6]
Sample Manager Shortcut to the Results: Sample Manager screen (RESULT > Sample
Manager). For more information, refer to Search for Results to View, Print,
or Send to LIS.
ISE Calibration Shortcut to the ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab (MAINT. > ISE
Maintenance > Calibration). For more information, refer to Inspect the
ISE Status.
B71495AF 5-3
Monitoring Analysis
Note
The system displays the sorting order of the list by highlighting the title of the field
for Sample No., Cup Position, Sample ID, Order, Status, Results, or Calibrator Name /
Control Name.
Note
You can program two operator-defined patient demographic items. For more
2 Select a sample, and then select Detail to view detailed sample information.
The system displays the test name with the result when the result is complete or an
estimated completion time for tests currently in progress.
Note
You can open the Detail tab by selecting the sample.
Figure 5.2 Results : Detail Screen
3 Select Realtime Display to view the sample results.

The system displays tests without flags in black, and tests with flags in red. The All tab
displays the samples in completion order when all tests ordered on the sample are
complete. The Quick tab displays results from the STAT table only. The Quick tab
displays the ISE tests, and tests with only an R1 reagent with read points before P10,
when the tests are complete. The ISE tab displays the ISE tests when the ISE tests are
complete.
5-4 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.3 Realtime Display: All Tab

The Home screen displays a color-coded overview of the system. The system monitors the
status of the incubator, reagent refrigerators, the STAT table, deionized water tank, wash
solution tanks, waste tanks, printer, and LIS communication.
The system monitors the ISE module and reagents when the ISE module is installed.
The colors of the system components indicate the status.

Table 5.3 Analyzer Status
Color Status
Green No errors.
Yellow Non-fatal error. You can start analysis.
Red Fatal error. You cannot start analysis.
1 Select HOME.
The system displays the Home (Analyzer Status) screen.
B71495AF 5-5
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.4 Home (Analyzer Status) Screen
1. Analyzer top status 4. ISE reagents status

2. Rack feeder status 5. Printer, LIS, and PROService status
3. Analyzer tanks status
2 Confirm that system components are within acceptable limits (green). Investigate any
yellow or red conditions.
a. Inspect the analyzer top status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Analyzer Top Status.
b. Inspect the rack feeder status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Rack Feeder Status.
c. Inspect the analyzer tanks status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to Analyzer Tanks Status.
d. Inspect the ISE reagents status. Investigate any yellow or red conditions. For more
information, refer to ISE Reagents Status.
e. Inspect the printer, LIS, and PROService status. Investigate any red conditions. For
more information, refer to Printer, LIS, and PROService Status.
5-6 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
Analyzer Top Status
Figure 5.5 Analyzer Top Status
Reagent Refrigerator (R1 and R2) Status

Table 5.4 Reagent Refrigerator Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow The temperature is outside the normal temperature range (4 °C to 12 °C).
Red The R1 or R2 refrigerator cover is open or a reagent check is required.
Lamp: displays the number of hours that the lamp has been on.
Coolant: displays the coolant temperature.
Incubator Status
Table 5.5 Incubator Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow The temperature is outside the normal temperature range (37 °C ± 0.3 °C), or a
cuvette failed the photocal.
Red A cuvette failed the photocal.
Note
If a cuvette failed the photocal, the status can be yellow or red, depending on the
system programming by Beckman Coulter.
Bath temp. displays the incubator temperature.
STAT Table Status

Table 5.6 STAT Table Status
Color Status
Green Normal
B71495AF 5-7
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.6 STAT Table Status (Continued)

Color Status
Yellow The temperature is outside the normal temperature range (4 °C to 12 °C).
Red The small or large STAT table cover is open.
ISE Module (Optional) Status

Table 5.7 ISE Module Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow The ISE is in Stop status.
Red The ISE cover is open, or the ISE is busy (performing maintenance).
ISE displays the ISE status (Stop, Ready, or Measure).
Rack Feeder Status
Note
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, the system does
not display the rack feeder module.
Figure 5.6 Rack Feeder Status
1. Sample aspiration position 5. Rack input area

2. Middle rack position 6. Rack output area
3. Sample ID read position 7. Auto rerun rack feeder
4. Auto rerun sample aspiration position 8. Rack buffer area
Auto Rerun Rack Feeder Status

Table 5.8 Auto Rerun Rack Feeder Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Red Error
5-8 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.8 Auto Rerun Rack Feeder Status (Continued)

Color Status
Text Enabled Auto Rerun is programmed to Enabled.
Disabled Auto Rerun is programmed to Disabled
(unavailable).
Error The auto rerun rack feeder has an error.
Rack Output Area Status

Table 5.9 Rack Output Area Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Red The rack output area is full, or there is a mechanical
error.
Text Rack full The rack output area is full.
- The rack output area is available.
Rack Position Status

The color depends on the rack type. If a rack is not present, the system displays the position
in gray. If a rack is present, the system displays the rack ID of the rack.
Analyzer Tanks Status
Figure 5.7 Analyzer Tanks Status
Deionized Water Tank, Diluted Wash Solution Tank, Wash Solution Tank, and Wash Solution
Reservoir Status
The system displays the status of the liquid volume in the deionized water tank (D.I. Water),
diluted wash solution tank (Diluted Wash Sol.), wash solution tank (Wash Solution), and
wash solution reservoir (Wash Sol. Reservoir).
Table 5.10 Deionized Water Tank, Diluted Wash Solution Tank, and Wash Solution Reservoir
Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow Over-full
Red Insufficient
B71495AF 5-9
Monitoring Analysis
Note
The status becomes over-full when the top float sensor in the tank moves up to the
maximum position. The status becomes insufficient when the bottom float sensor in the
tank moves down to the minimum position.
Table 5.11 Wash Solution Tank

Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow Insufficient
Red The bottle is removed or the sliding tray is away from the sensor.
Concentrated Liquid Waste Tank, Diluted Liquid Waste Tank, and Vacuum Tank Status
The system displays the status of the liquid volume in the concentrated liquid waste tank
(Conc. Waste), diluted liquid waste tank (Waste), and vacuum tank.
Table 5.12 Concentrated Liquid Waste Tank, Diluted Liquid Waste Tank, and Vacuum Tank
Status
Color Status
Green Normal
Red Full
Note
Contact Beckman Coulter if the system displays red for any of these tanks.
Printer, LIS, and PROService Status
Figure 5.8 Printer, LIS, and PROService Status
Note
When the item is gray, the feature is not enabled.
Note
Some printer errors cause the system to display the printer in red, a red message on the
Home screen, and a print error in the Start dialog. While printing, Printer Control [F5] is
displayed in the function button area on the Home screen. To clear the error and
resume normal operation, select Printer Control [F5] for options to resume (print any
information that did not print) or cancel the print.
5-10 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
Table 5.13 Item Status

Item Color
Green Yellow Red Blue
Printer Normal Real-time or batch Error -
printing
LIS (RS232C) Normal Real-time or batch Error due to real- -
processing time online
session being
aborted during
MEASURE mode
LIS (TCP /IP) Connected Real-time or batch All of the ports -
processing are not
connected.
PROService - Not running
• Running • Running
• There is no • There are
downloadable downloadable
file. files. Select the
button to initiate
the download.
Remote Desktop Sharing
Remote assistance is available on your DxC 700 AU after you sign up for the PROService
agreement. For more information on the PROService agreement, contact Beckman Coulter.
Remote Desktop Sharing allows a Beckman Coulter Support Representative to view and
control the DxC 700 AU software screen with your permission. A notification is displayed on
your console when a Beckman Coulter Support Representative requests to start Remote
Desktop Sharing.
1 Select OK to accept the Remote Desktop Sharing request. A Beckman Coulter Support
Representative views and controls the DxC 700 AU software screen.
2 Select Cancel to reject the Remote Desktop Sharing request. A Beckman Coulter Support
Representative does not view or control the DxC 700 AU software screen.
ISE Reagents Status
The system displays the status of liquid volume in the ISE Reference Solution bottle, ISE
MID Standard Solution bottle, ISE Buffer Solution bottle. For more information, refer to
Replace the ISE Reagents.
B71495AF 5-11
Monitoring Analysis
Figure 5.9 ISE Reagents Status
Table 5.14 ISE Reagents Status

Color Status
Green Normal
Yellow Insufficient
If you select the REF, MID, or BUF button, the system displays the Reagent Management: ISE
tab (REAGENT > Reagent Management > ISE).
Inspect the ISE Status
5-12 B71495AF
5
Monitoring Analysis
2 Review the ISE calibration information.

a. Inspect the ISE status.
Table 5.15 ISE Status
READY Green Ready to start analysis or maintenance.
BUSY Red Operating.
MEASURE Green Analysis is in progress (ISE).
STOP Yellow The ISE is in Stop status. Select ISE Ready [F4] to return
the ISE to Ready status.
INITIAL Yellow The ISE is initializing.
b. Inspect the electrode status. The electrode status indicates if the most recent slope
value is in range for Na, K, and Cl.
Table 5.16 Electrode Status
Color Description
Green The slope value is within the acceptable range, and ISE calibration was
performed within 24 hours.
Yellow
— The slope value is not within the acceptable range.
— ISE calibration has not been performed within 24 hours. The system
uses the most recent ISE calibration results.
Gray No calibration data exists for the electrode.
B71495AF 5-13
Monitoring Analysis
c. Inspect the reagent status. The reagent status indicates if the ISE Buffer Solution,
ISE MID Standard Solution, and ISE Reference Solution are sufficient.
Table 5.17 ISE Reagent Status
Color Description
Green The reagent level is above the reagent low level sensor, indicating reagent
is sufficient.
Yellow The reagent is below the reagent low level sensor, indicating reagent is not
sufficient.
3 Inspect the <Result> table. The <Result> table contains records of slope values that the
system obtains from calibration. You can also view slope charts in graph form for Na, K,
and Cl.
a. The numbers in the Date/Time column indicate the dates and times for the
calibrations.
b. The values in the Slope column indicate the calibration slopes for Na, K, and Cl. A
larger slope value indicates a steeper slope (a larger potential).
Confirm that the results fall within the ranges listed in the <Acceptable Calibration
Range> table that is displayed below the <Result> table.
c. The values in the MID Solution Factor column indicate the values that the system
obtains from the concentration of the ISE MID Standard Solution to establish a
reference for measuring Na, K, and Cl ion concentrations.
d. To view slope charts in graph form, select Graph Display [F5].
Figure 5.12 ISE Maintenance: Calibration Tab (Graph Display)
e. To inspect the slope chart for each sample type, select Switch to alternate between
Serum and Urine.
5-14 B71495AF
5
Disable a Test
The system displays the 30 most recent slope values in the chart. Identify the Na, K,
and Cl slope charts by color. On the left of the chart, the system displays the
maximum and minimum Na, K, and Cl slope values.
Although Cl slope values are negative values, the slope chart displays their absolute
values.
4 To view the <Result> table again, select Data Display [F5].
Disable a Test
You can prevent a test from being performed on patient samples even after the test has
been ordered. This function is useful when the preceding calibration or QC fails for a test
and you want to make the test unavailable (disabled) on patient samples. The unavailable
(disabled) test remains available for reagent blank, calibration, and QC.
You can make a test unavailable (disabled) or available (enabled) during MEASURE mode by
selecting the test and then selecting OK in the Disabled Tests dialog.
The system displays and prints the unavailable (disabled) test with a / flag, indicating that
the test was ordered but not performed.
Settings in the Disabled Tests dialog are active until you create a new index or shut down
the system (End Process). You can also enable a test that has been disabled. For more
information, refer to Enable a Test That Has Been Disabled.
1 Select Disabled Tests [F7] in the Home screen.

The system displays the Disabled Tests dialog.
Figure 5.13 Disabled Tests Dialog
2 Select tests to make unavailable (disabled). The system displays the unavailable
(disabled) tests in blue.
3 Select OK to save the settings.

B71495AF 5-15
Review Results for Flags and Events
Note
If one or more tests are disabled, the system displays a Some tests are
disabled message in the ERROR MESSAGE section.
Enable a Test That Has Been Disabled
1 Select Disabled Test [F7].
2 Select the test that has been disabled.

Disabled tests are highlighted in blue. The system removes the highlighting for the test.
3 Select OK to save the settings.

After the system generates results, review them for analytical validity.
Review the results using the Sample Status screen or the printout. For more information,
refer to Sample Status Screen.
Review all results for flags and events, and confirm that all corrective actions are taken.
Review Results for Flags

If a problem occurs during analysis, the system appends a flag to the analysis results.
Review all results carefully for flags and take the corrective action.
For more information, refer to Flags.
Review Events
Review events that occur during analysis:
To display events, select EVENT.
5-16 B71495AF
5
Figure 5.14 Event Log Screen
The Level column displays the event level (numbers and color).
Table 5.18 Event Level
Level Color Description
Level 1 Red A fatal system abnormality exists.
Level 2 Yellow An abnormality influencing the data exists.
Level 3 Green No system abnormality. The system displays the operation log.
The Count (at the top-right) indicates the quantity of events within the specified date range.
The system can store and display a maximum of 4,096 cases. You can scroll using the scroll
bar.
From the Event Log screen, you can select:

• Copy to Disk [F2] - Saves the event logs in CSV format to external memory device or CD-
R.
• Filter [F3] - Selects the condition for filtering the log display.
• Remove External Memory [F4] - Prepares to remove the flash drive or external memory
device.
• Details [F6] - Select an event (highlights in blue), and select Details [F6], to display a
description of the event and possible causes and corrective actions in the EVENT
DETAILS tab.
• Refresh [F7] - Returns the screen to the most recent logs.
• Print [F8] - Prints a list of the events in the filtered log display.
B71495AF 5-17
Note
The Event log detail is only available in the Event Log. DxC 700 AU Instructions for Use
and DxC 700 AU Reference Manual do not contain event log descriptions and corrective
actions.
Interpreting Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis (LIH) Results

Sample Specific LIH
Each sample prints with a flag for Normal (N) through Abnormal High (ABN-H) and
Abnormal Low (ABN-L) for levels of:
• Lipemia (LIP)
• Icterus (ICT)
• Hemolysis (HEM)
The system generates each flag determined by the parameters in the Test Volume and
Methods: LIH tab (CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > LIH) for the LIH test.
Table 5.19 Sample Specific LIH Flags
Name Flags
LIP (lipemia) N, +, ++, +++, ++++, +++++, ABN-H, ABN-L
ICT (icterus) N, +, ++, +++, ++++, +++++, ABN-H, ABN-L
HEM (hemolysis) N, +, ++, +++, ++++, +++++, ABN-H, ABN-L
A result of ABN-H (abnormal high) or ABN-L (abnormal low) means that the mathematical
logic in determining the amount of interference has failed in one or more internal
evaluations. Visually inspect the sample to determine the amount of lipemia, icterus, and
hemolysis present in the sample.
Test Specific LIH
When the level of interfering substances exceeds the criteria programmed for a specific test
in the Test Volume and Methods: General or ISE tabs (CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods >
General or ISE), the system attaches an l, i, or h flag to the result affected by lipemia, icterus,
or hemolysis.
When LIH testing is not performed on a sample, the system attaches an n flag to the result.
The n flag differentiates LIH testing not being performed, and LIH not influencing the test.
The system typically generates an n flag when the LIH reagent is empty, or the LIH test was
not ordered.
5-18 B71495AF
5
LIH Reagent IFU
Warning
The concentrations listed in the table are for reference. Depending on the matrix
effect with an individual serum sample, some results may not meet the listed
concentrations.
Table 5.20 Approximate Concentration of Chromatic Substance

Flag LIP (mg/dL ICT (mg/dL HEM (mg/dL Hemoglobin)
Intralipid) Bilirubin)
N <40 <2.5 <50
+ 40 to 99 2.5 to 4.9 50 to 99
++ 100 to 199 5.0 to 9.9 100 to 199
+++ 200 to 299 10.0 to 19.9 200 to 299
++++ 300 to 500 20 to 40 300 to 500
+++++ >500 >40 >500
Figure 5.15 Example of LIH Evaluation
According to the Direct Bilirubin IFU (example), Interfering Substances are:

• Hemolysis: No significant interference up to 10 mg/dL Hemolysate
• Lipemia: No significant interference up to 300 mg/dL Intralipid
Note
The interference information from the Direct Bilirubin IFU (example) is provided as an
example. For the current interference information on direct bilirubin, refer to the Direct
Bilirubin IFU.
According to the LIH Reagent IFU Table:

• A hemoglobin rating of ++ is equivalent to 100 to 199 mg/dL in the sample. Since the
Direct Bilirubin IFU indicates no significant interference only up to 10 mg/dL, the
system attaches an h flag in the printout to the DBIL result to indicate that the
performance of this test could have been affected by hemolysis.
• A lipemia rating of + is equivalent to 40 to 99 mg/dL of Intralipid in the sample. Since
the Direct Bilirubin IFU indicates no significant interference up to 300 mg/dL, the
system does not attach an l flag to the DBIL result.
B71495AF 5-19
Reagent Management
Reagent Management
Reagents
Most Beckman Coulter reagents are liquid and ready to place in the reagent refrigerator
after removing the cap. If a reagent requires preparation, refer to the reagent IFU before
loading the reagent into the reagent refrigerator.
The system can use four sizes of reagent bottles:

• 15 mL
• 30 mL
• 60 mL
• 120 mL
Table 5.21 Adapter and Partition Part Numbers
Part Name Part Number
15 mL reagent bottle adapter C22533 (2pcs), C22534 (20 pcs)
30 mL reagent bottle adapter C22535 (2pcs), C22536 (20 pcs)
R1 Removable Partition MU852600 (20pcs)
R2 Removable Partition MU825800 (20pcs)
The R1 and R2 reagent trays use partitions among the 15 mL, 30 mL, 60 mL, and 120 mL
bottles, and adapters to hold 15 mL and 30 mL reagent bottles securely in position.
The DxC 700 AU contains two reagent refrigerators, R1 and R2. You can use the 15 mL and
30 mL bottle adaptors in either refrigerator. Partitions, however, are specific to each
refrigerator and cannot be interchanged. The partitions for the R1 refrigerator are taller
than the ones for the R2.
Replace adapters when the pins are damaged, or when the adapter no longer clicks into
place on the reagent tray.
The R1 refrigerator holds up to 60 reagent bottles, and the R2 refrigerator holds up to 48.
120 mL reagent bottles occupy two positions on the reagent tray, and reduce the maximum
quantity of bottles respectively.
You can continue to use your current adapter without interruption, because there is no
difference in performance between the current white reagent adapter and the new blue
reagent adapter.
Commercial Reagent Bottles

Commercial reagent bottles not sold by Beckman Coulter are available in the Japan and Asia
markets.
If the transparency of the commercial reagent bottle is too high for the bottle sensor to
detect, apply a label as shown in Figure 5.16 Apply a Label to a Reagent Bottle. The part
number for the labels is MU987900.
5-20 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.16 Apply a Label to a Reagent Bottle
1. Label 2. Reagent bottle
When you use commercial reagent bottles, the test count displayed on the Reagent
Management screen can differ from the remaining test count. The system uses the liquid
level in the bottle to calculate the test count. Because the bottle is different from the
Beckman Coulter reagent bottles, the calculation may be incorrect.
Fill Reagent Bottles
Caution
Bubbles in the reagent bottle can interfere with analysis. Inspect the reagent bottles
for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a cotton-tipped applicator before loading the
reagent.
Caution
can affect results.
Caution
When you fill Beckman Coulter bottles with reagent, wash solution, or deionized
water, do not exceed the maximum volume. The maximum volume depends on the
bottle size. If a reagent bottle is filled over the maximum liquid level limit, bubbles
can occur and cause a level detection error.
B71495AF 5-21
Reagent Management
Figure 5.17 Maximum Liquid Level
1. 15 mL bottle 6. 12 mm
2. 8 mm 7. Maximum liquid level
3. 30 mL bottle 8. 120 mL bottle
4. 4 mm 9. 10 mm
5. 60 mL bottle
Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray

The 30-mL and 15-mL bottles require reagent tray adapters.
Note
Beckman Coulter recommends installing adapters while the system is in STANDBY and
not during REAGENT PAUSE.
1 Insert the short pin of the adapter into the hole in the reagent tray.
5-22 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.18 Insert Adapter
2 Align the long pin of the adapter with the position of the oval hole in the reagent tray.
3 Press the adapter down until you feel a click.
4 Confirm that the adapter is secure on the reagent tray. The top of the reagent tray (with
the position numbers) must be level with the top of the adapter protrusion.
Figure 5.19 Confirm Adapter Placement in Reagent Tray
1. R1 5. Top of the reagent tray with the

2. R2 position number
3. Adapter protrusion 6. Top of the reagent tray with the
4. Adapter protrusion position number
Remove Adapters from the Reagent Tray

Replace adapters when the pins appear damaged, or the adapter no longer clicks when you
place it on the reagent tray.
1 Hold the reagent tray so that reagents do not spill.

2 Lift the adapter in the direction shown in Figure 5.20 Remove Adapter from the Reagent
Tray.
B71495AF 5-23
Reagent Management
Figure 5.20 Remove Adapter from the Reagent Tray
Assign a Reagent Position

You can place reagents that have bar code labels in any available (not assigned) position on
the reagent tray. For reagents without bar code labels, assign the reagent to fixed positions.
Place reagents without bar code labels in the correct assigned positions.
1 Select REAGENT > Reagent Management > Details.

The system displays the Reagent Management: Details tab. The system indicates
assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk highlighted in blue in the column to the left
of the Pos. column.
Note
Before assigning a position, confirm that the reagent status is Checked. If the
reagent status is Unchecked, select Reagent Check [F5], and then select Reset.
5-24 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
Figure 5.21 Reagent Management: Details Tab
2 In Reagent Display, select Position.
3 In Content, select R1 to assign a position in the R1 refrigerator.
4 Select an open position to assign to the reagent.

5 Select Edit [F1].
The system displays the Edit dialog for the selected position.
Figure 5.22 Edit Dialog (Fixed Reagent)
6 Select Fixed Reagent.

b. In Type, the system displays R1 (R1-1) or R2 (R2-1). If necessary, select R1 (R1-1) or R1
(R1-2).
B71495AF 5-25
Reagent Management
c. (Optional) In Lot No., enter a lot number according to your laboratory procedure.
d. (Optional) In Bottle No. (SN), enter a bottle number according to your laboratory
procedure.
e. In Bottle Size, select the reagent bottle size.
f. Select OK.
7 If the reagent has an R2 bottle, repeat steps 3 to 6 with Content selected for R2.
8 Confirm that the system indicates assigned (fixed) positions with an asterisk in the
column to the left of the Pos. column.

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog.
10 Select Check Specified positions, and then select the positions that you assigned.
11 Select Start.
The system performs a reagent check at the specified positions, and updates the test
count on the Details tab.
Edit a Reagent ID
Edit the reagent ID after a reagent ID read error occurs on a reagent bottle with a bar code.
A notification event occurs during the reagent check, and the system displays Reagent ID
Read Error in the Comment column in Reagent Management > Details until the reagent ID
is edited, or the reagent bottle is removed from the refrigerator.
1 Select REAGENT > Reagent Management > Details.
2 In Reagent Display, select Position.
3 Place the cursor on the position with the reagent ID read error.
4 Select ID Edit.
Figure 5.23 ID Edit Dialog
5 Type in the 20-digit reagent ID from the reagent bottle. Select OK.
The system updates the onboard stability, expiration, lot number, and bottle number
with a No Volume to Process comment.
5-26 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
7 Select Check specified positions from the Reagent Check dialog.
8 Select both the R1 and R2 positions for the reagent with the edited reagent ID.
9 The system performs the reagent check and updates the RB Stability Remaining and Cal
Stability Remaining.
Replace or Add Reagents in MEASURE Mode

In MEASURE mode, you can replace reagents bottles when they become empty or add new
reagent bottles.
Note
During reagent blank, calibrator, or control sample analysis, you cannot shift the system
to REAGENT PAUSE mode to replace or add reagents.
The system checks the volumes remaining in the reagent bottles at every aspiration. When
the volumes reach the alarm test level, the system generates a Rx Reagent
Insufficient (test, p) event.
Rx Reagent tray R1 or R2
Test The name of the reagent
P The reagent position
Important
Always replace empty reagent bottles or add new reagent bottles to the position
assigned in the Load dialog (which displays when you select Load [F2]). Load the
reagent bottle in the position that the orange stripe indicates close to the TRAY
ROTATION button for R1 or R2.
Important
Prepare the R1 and R2 reagent trays with partitions and adapters for 30 mL and 15 mL
bottle sizes in advance. Note the empty bottle positions and bottle size based on
adapters to facilitate adding new reagent bottles in MEASURE mode. The small size of
the reagent loading area in MEASURE mode makes it more difficult to add partitions or
adapters during MEASURE mode. Refer to Reagents or Add Adapters to the Reagent
Tray.
B71495AF 5-27
Reagent Management
Caution
For fixed reagent positions, the system does not read the reagent ID. It identifies the
reagent as a reagent assigned to the position. Confirm that the correct reagent is in
the assigned position.
Caution
Do not leave the system paused for an extended time. When you pause the analyzer
for an extended time, the concentration of the samples in the sample cups increases
from evaporation and the evaporation can affect results.
Caution
Do not remove or add racks while the system is paused, as it can cause concordance
errors.
The system displays the analyzer mode as PAUSE until the system completes all
samples in progress. When the analyzer changes to PAUSE mode, you can add reagent
and perform a reagent check.
Important
After replacing or adding a reagent in MEASURE mode, you can perform a calibration or
quality control (QC) from the STAT table, if necessary.
Be aware that if you complete either the STAT table calibration step or the STAT table
QC step later in this procedure, the system continues to load the racks on the Rack
Input Area after the STAT table status changes to Dispensed.
1 If you need to verify the results of calibration and quality control before restarting
patient sample processing, complete the following sub-steps:
a. Select Feeder Stop.
b. Select OK.
c. Wait until the system is in MEASURE 2 mode.
d. Remove all of the racks from the rack input area.

5-28 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
1. Load [F2]
3 Select Load [F2].

The system displays the Load dialog.
Figure 5.25 Load Dialog
4 If you are replacing empty reagent bottles, select Insufficient and expires soon and select
Test, then select the tests to replace.
The system highlights the selected fields in blue.
5 If you are adding new reagent bottles, select All Bottles and select Position, then select
empty positions to add the bottles to.
B71495AF 5-29
Reagent Management
Important
Make all selections for loading reagent bottles before selecting Load.
If Load [F2] is selected during the 5-minute transition to REAGENT PAUSE mode, the
original selections are canceled. Only the selections from the final Load [F2] dialog
are registered, and only these reagent bottle(s) can be replaced.
6 Select Load.
The system closes the Load dialog. The system shifts from MEASURE to REAGENT PAUSE
mode. It takes a maximum of 5 minutes for the system to shift completely to REAGENT
PAUSE mode.
Important
While the system shifts from MEASURE mode to REAGENT PAUSE mode, the system
displays MEASURE REAG. PAUSE xx min. in the status area. When the system
shifts completely to REAGENT PAUSE mode the system displays MEASURE REAG.
PAUSE in the status area.
xx min. The remaining minutes for the system to shift completely into REAGENT PAUSE
mode.
Note
If the system remains in REAGENT PAUSE mode for more than 15 minutes, the
system mode shifts to PAUSE mode. The reagent that is loading during the mode
shift is available after the mode shift.
Note
To confirm the positions and the reagents to replace or add, select List Display [F7],
then select the Display positions selected for loading box.
The system displays the list on the screen.
Select Close to close the dialog.
Note
To print the list of reagents to load, select the Details tab, then select Print [F8].
The system displays the Print dialog.
Select the Only load positions box, then select OK.
7 Prepare the reagent bottles to replace or add.

8 The system rotates the reagent tray(s) to the orange stripe for loading near the TRAY
ROTATION button for R1 and/or R2. Open the small reagent refrigerator cover after the
system displays MEASURE REAG. PAUSE.
5-30 B71495AF
5
Reagent Management
Caution
To avoid injury by the moving components, do not open the upper cover.
Caution
Do not open the large reagent cover. If you open the large reagent cover during
REAGENT PAUSE mode, the system goes into PAUSE mode or STOP mode. If the
system is in PAUSE mode, you cannot perform a reagent check or restart
MEASURE mode when the system displays MEASURE => PAUSE in the status area.
Wait until the system displays PAUSE in the status area (up to 22 minutes). If the
system changes to STOP mode, all samples in progress are aborted. Select the
Reset button to reset the system to STANDBY mode. You need to reload
incomplete samples for processing.
Caution
Do not open the small reagent refrigerator cover while the ROTATION LED (amber
LED) by the TRAY ROTATION button is blinking. The ROTATION LED (amber LED)
blinks when the reagent components are moving.
9 Replace or add the correct reagent bottle.

10 Close the small reagent refrigerator cover.
11 If you have more reagents to replace or add, press the TRAY ROTATION button.
The system rotates the reagent tray until the next position for loading the reagent
moves to the orange stripe close to the TRAY ROTATION button for R1 or R2.
12 Repeat steps 8 to 11 until you replace or add all bottles.

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog. Check loaded positions is selected.
14 Select Start.
15 Perform a calibration from the STAT table, if necessary.
Note
You cannot perform a calibration or quality control QC from racks.
For more information about performing a calibration, refer to Order and Perform
Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table or Order and Perform Calibration and Quality
16 Perform QC from the STAT table, if necessary.

For more information about performing a calibration, refer to Order and Perform
Quality Control (QC) from the STAT Table or Order and Perform Calibration and Quality
B71495AF 5-31
ISE Reagent Management
If you did not perform step 1 at the beginning of this procedure, the system continues to
load the racks from the Rack Input Area.
Important
If the calibration or quality control fails, rerun the samples that measure after
calibration or quality control.
17 Restart analysis.
— If you did not perform either the STAT table calibration step or the STAT table QC
step, select Start.
— If you performed either the STAT table calibration or the STAT table QC and
completed step 1 at the beginning of this procedure, verify the calibration or
quality control result. Then reload the racks and select Start if the results of the
calibration and quality control are acceptable.
Monitor the Remaining Volumes of the ISE Reagents

To review the remaining quantity of each ISE reagent, select REAGENT > Reagent
Management > ISE.
5-32 B71495AF
5
The system displays the remaining volumes (in number of tests), by the blue indicator bar
and number.
The indicator represents the full amount of reagent in the bottle, then decreases by
increment.
The number represents the number of tests that are available with the remaining ISE
reagent.
The system displays "> xxx" before the number of tests decreases to the number listed in
the following table, Number of Tests to Start the Count Down.
When the number of tests decreases to the number listed in the following table, Number of
Tests to Start the Count Down, the system begins to display the number of available tests
and then counts down by increment.
Table 5.22 Number of Tests to Start the Count Down
Serum Tests Urine Tests
ISE Reference Solution 408 300
ISE MID Standard Solution 123 48
ISE Buffer Solution 94 66
Number of Tests to Generate an Event for Insufficient ISE Reagent Volume

You can program the number of tests that generates an event for insufficient ISE reagent
volume. You can program the number up to the number listed in the following table,
Maximum Tests to Generate an Event. The default number is 32 for all ISE reagents.
Table 5.23 Maximum Tests to Generate an Event
Maximum Number of Tests
ISE Reference Solution 300
ISE MID Standard Solution 48
ISE Buffer Solution 66
Onboard Stability Period for ISE Reagents

You can program the onboard stability period for ISE reagents.
Program the ISE Parameters (Onboard Stability Period and Alarm Tests)
2 Select ISE Parameter Setting [F4].

The system displays the ISE Parameter Setting dialog.
B71495AF 5-33
Figure 5.27 ISE Parameter Setting Dialog
3 Enter the number of days and hours for each ISE reagent in Onboard Stability Period.
Note
Refer to the reagent IFU.
4 Enter the number of tests to generate an event for insufficient ISE reagent for each ISE
reagent in Alarm Tests.
Replace ISE Reagents in MEASURE Mode

You can replace ISE reagents in MEASURE mode if the number of tests remaining becomes
insufficient. Replace the reagent before the bottle empties. For onboard stability claims for
the ISE reagents, refer to the reagent IFU.
Caution
ISE Reference Solution is highly concentrated. Do not allow the ISE Reference Solution
(including that left in bottle, cap, and aspiration tubing) to contact the ISE Buffer
Solution or ISE MID Standard Solution.
Caution
can affect results.
Materials Required:
• ISE Buffer Solution
• ISE Reference Solution

5-34 B71495AF
5
1. ISE Tab 3. ISE Status

2. ISE Maintenance

The system displays the Replace ISE Reagent Dialog.
Figure 5.29 Replace ISE Reagent Dialog
3 When the system is in MEASURE mode, the system displays a dialog with a message of
Unable to replace ISE reagent bottles during MEASURE mode. Move to
Reagent PAUSE mode?
Select Yes.
The system goes into REAGENT PAUSE mode. It takes a maximum 5 minutes to complete
transition to REAGENT PAUSE mode, then the system turns off the ISE operation LED.
For more information about the ISE operation LED, refer to ISE Reagent Bottles.
B71495AF 5-35
Caution
Do not remove an ISE reagent bottle from the analyzer while the system is in
MEASURE mode (while the LED is blinking). If you remove an ISE reagent bottle,
the system pauses the ISE analysis.

5 Confirm that the ISE operation LED is off.
7 Select the Previous arrow or Next arrow to select the ISE reagent to be replaced.
8 Place the cursor in the ID field. If the cursor is not in the ID field, select ID.
9 Scan the bar code label on the bottle with a manual bar code reader.
The system displays the lot number, expiration date, and volume.
Note
If a manual bar code reader is not available, use the keyboard to enter the lot
number and expiration date.
Note
Confirm that the lot number and expiration date are consistent with the label on
the bottle.
10 Place the new bottle of reagent next to the analyzer and remove the cap.
11 Pull out the reagent bottle to replace.
The system changes ISE status to STOP.
Note
The system generates a NO ISE xxx SOLUTION BOTTLE event (xxx is the solution
replaced). Select the Event Clear button to clear the event.
12 Loosen the cap of the reagent bottle and remove the aspiration tubing.
Important
Do not touch the aspiration tubing.
Dispose of the old reagent according to your laboratory procedure.
13 Place the aspiration tubing in the new bottle and tighten the cap.
14 Place the new bottle on the analyzer and push the bottle into position.
5-36 B71495AF
5
15 To load an additional ISE Reagent bottle, repeat steps 7 to 14.

16 Select OK. The system closes the Replace ISE Reagent dialog.
17 The system displays BUSY in ISE status. Wait until the system displays Ready in ISE
Status.
18 Select ISE Maintenance. Refer to Figure 5.28 Reagent Management: ISE Tab.
The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Maintenance tab.
Note
When you select ISE Maintenance in this tab, you go directly to the ISE
Maintenance: Maintenance tab. You do not have to go to the Home screen first.
buttons.
Note
If the system displays the ISE Busy message, wait until the preparation for replacing
ISE reagent is finished.
20 If you have replaced:

1. The ISE Buffer Solution
a. Select Buffer Prime.
The system displays the Buffer Prime dialog.

b. Select OK.

2. The ISE MID Standard Solution or the ISE Reference Solution
a. Select MID/REF Prime.
The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.

b. Select OK.

23 Calibrate the ISE.
24 Select Start to restart analysis from REAGENT PAUSE mode.
B71495AF 5-37
System Shutdown (End Process)
System Shutdown (End Process)

Shutting down the system (an End Process) turns off the analyzer lamp and the computer.
The system maintains the refrigerator, incubator, and STAT table temperatures. The ISE
module performs an automatic prime with ISE MID Standard Solution every hour to keep
the electrodes conditioned.
You can initiate a system shutdown after you start a W2 or photocal. If you initiate a system
shutdown after you start a W2 or photocal, the W2 or photocal completes, and then the
system shuts down. For more information, refer to Perform a W2 or Perform a Photocal.
1 Select END.
The system displays the End dialog.
Figure 5.30 End Dialog
2 Review the next auto-on time.

a. To set an auto-on time select Yes for Auto Start up.
b. In Date and Time, select the date and time for the system to turn on.
c. To turn off the auto-on time, in Auto Start up select No.
Note
Beckman Coulter programs Auto Preparation in the System Maintenance menu

during installation. Programming options include a daily time for Auto On and Auto
Preparation. The Auto Preparation is the weekly photocal.
3 Select Yes. The system shuts down.
Important
Follow your laboratory procedure for turning off the deionized water supply.
5-38 B71495AF
5
Stop Feeder
Stop Feeder
You can stop the rack input area to insert an emergency or routine rack before other racks
during analysis.
Even after you stop the rack input area, the system continues to analyze samples in the
racks that the rack input area has already fed.
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, selecting Stop Feeder
does not stop the supply of samples to the system. For more information, refer to the
Laboratory Automation System manual.
Caution
Do not leave the rack input area stopped for an extended time. When you stop the
rack input area for an extended time, the concentration of the samples in the sample
cups increases from evaporation and can affect results.
Stop the Rack Input Area
1 Select Stop Feeder. The system displays the Stop Feeder dialog.
2 Select OK. The system displays the rack feed operation stop message. Racks that were
moved from the rack input area continue analysis.
Restart Analysis After Selecting Stop Feeder
1 When the rack input area is stopped, use normal ordering procedures. For more
information, refer to Order for Routine and Emergency Samples.
2 Select Start. The system displays the Start dialog.
3 Select Start. The system restarts analysis.
Stop Analysis
Select Stop to stop analysis.
Caution
If you stop the system during MEASURE mode, any data that is not complete is lost
and you must reanalyze the samples.
B71495AF 5-39
Power Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button
Caution
If you select Stop, press the ANALYZER STOP button or a power loss occurs, sample
can remain in the sample probe, and reagents can remain in the cuvettes. Perform a
W1 to clean the sample probe and cuvettes after you restart the system. For more
information, refer to Perform a W1.
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, selecting Stop stops
sample aspiration for the samples being routed to the DxC 700 AU. For more information,
refer to the Laboratory Automation System manual.
1 Select Stop during analysis operation. The system displays the Stop dialog with a
confirmation message.
2 Select OK. All analysis operation stops, and the system changes to STOP mode.
3 Remove racks from the rack transport belts.
Return to STANDBY Mode After Stopping Analysis

After you stop analysis, you can return the system to STANDBY mode.
1 After you select Stop to stop analysis, select Reset.

The system displays the Reset dialog.
2 Select OK.
The system returns to STANDBY mode, ready to perform sample analysis.

When the system is in operation, you can turn off the system power as needed for
troubleshooting.
1 Press the ANALYZER STOP button (black). The operation of the analyzer and the ISE
module immediately stop.
The computer remains On and must be turned off.
2 Select [Ctrl] + [ALT] + [Delete] from the keyboard to display the windows screen.
3 Select the red shutdown button to turn off the computer.

4 Remove all racks from the rack transport belts.
5 To turn off the system power completely, turn off the main breaker, which is located on
the left side of the analyzer module.
5-40 B71495AF
5
Identify and Reanalyze Samples after a Cuvette Overflow
Return to STANDBY Mode After Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button
1 Turn on the main breaker.

2 Press the RESET button (white) to turn on the main power, and then wait 5 seconds.
3 Press the ON button (green). The lamp turns on and the software loads. The system
displays a dialog to confirm retrieving the database.
4 Select OK.
5 In the New Index dialog, select Index to continue analysis in the current index.
6 The system is in WARM UP mode for 1.5 hours. After the required 20-minute lamp warm
up time, wait until the temperature of the cuvette wheel is 37 °C, and then select MAINT.
> Analyzer Maintenance. Select Standby [F4] to return to STANDBY mode.
7 Perform a W1. For more information, refer to Perform a W1.

A cuvette overflow could have occurred 60 minutes before the system generates the
Photometry error during cuvette wash (###) event. The results measured during
the 60 minutes before the event are invalid and must be reanalyzed.
The analyzer changes to STOP mode immediately after the system generates the
Photometry error during cuvette wash (###) event.
Note
For example, in Photometry error during cuvette wash (###), the ### is the
cuvette number (1 to 165) with a photometric error.
Warning
The tests performed during the 60 minutes before the Photometry error during
cuvette wash (###) event can have an incorrect result caused by the overflow.
The results are invalid and must be reanalyzed. If you have reported results or
transferred the results to the Laboratory Information System, take corrective actions
according to your laboratory procedure.
The 60-minute timeframe is the time that the analyzer was in MEASURE mode. If the
analyzer went into STANDBY mode and did not remain in MEASURE mode for 60
consecutive minutes before the event, add STANDBY mode time to the 60-minute
timeframe. For example, if the analyzer was in STANDBY mode for 20 minutes total,
add 20 minutes to the 60 minutes and search for samples affected by the overflow in
the past 80 minutes.
Search for samples affected by the overflow.
B71495AF 5-41
1 Select EVENT.
Figure 5.31 Event Log Screen
2 Search for the event message Photometry error during cuvette wash (###).
3 Note the date and time of the event.

For example: 2015/03/21 11:32 PHOTOMETRY ERROR DURING CUVETTE WASH
(36)
4 Search for the MEASURE START messages. Calculate the time between the Photometry
error during cuvette wash (###) event and the most recent MEASURE START
message.
— If the time between the event and measure message is 60 minutes or longer, the
timeframe for searching samples with invalid data is 60 minutes.
— If the time between the event and the measure message is shorter than 60 minutes,
determine the time in MEASURE mode, and add it to the next time in MEASURE
mode, and continue adding the time until the total time in MEASURE mode is 60
minutes. Add the total time in STANDBY between the MEASURE modes and the
Photometry error during cuvette wash (###) event, and add it to 60
minutes. The result is the timeframe for searching samples with invalid data.
5 Specify the start date and time for the search to identify all the affected indexes. In the
following example, the timeframe for the search is 82 minutes (22 minutes of STANDBY
time between 10:33 and 10:55 is added to 60 minutes of MEASURE time). Calculate
backwards from the Photometry error during cuvette wash (###) event
(2015/03/21 11:32) by 82 minutes to obtain the starting date and time for the search.
The starting date and time for the search is then 2015/03/21 10:10.
5-42 B71495AF
5
The affected indexes include the index that was generated immediately before the
starting date and time and all the indexes after the starting date and time. In this
example, the two indexes in bold type are the affected indexes.
2015/03/21 11:32 PHOTOMETRY ERROR DURING CUVETTE WASH (36)
2015/03/21 10:55 MEASURE START
2015/03/21 10:43 INDEX UPDATED (2015/03/21 10:43)
2015/03/21 10:33 STANDBY
2015/03/21 09:23 INDEX UPDATED (2015/03/21 09:23)
2015/03/21 09:10 STANDBY
Note
This information is only an example. Typically, a new index is created once a day or
once a shift.
The ending search date and time is the time when the system generated the
Photometry error during cuvette wash (###) event. In this example, the time
the system generated the event is 2015/03/21 11:32.
6 Select RESULT > Sample Manager > Reaction Monitor > Main.
Figure 5.32 Reaction Monitor: Main Tab
B71495AF 5-43
7 In Index, select the affected index or the oldest index among the affected indexes
obtained in step 5. In this example, select 2015/03/21 09:23.
8 Select all of the available boxes for sample types and kinds that the system has
processed.
9 Select Search Condition [F5].
Figure 5.33 Search Condition Dialog
10 Select Range of Date.
11 Enter the starting date and time for search obtained in step 5 in From. In this example,
enter 10/19/2015 11:06.
12 Enter the ending date and time for search obtained in step 5 in To. In this example, enter
10/22/2015 13:06.
If you do not specify the date range, the system selects all samples within the index.
13 Select Sample No..
14 Select OK.
15 Select the General tab.
5-44 B71495AF
5
Figure 5.34 Reaction Monitor: General Tab
16 Select List Display [F3]. The system displays a list of samples with invalid data.
Reanalyze these samples.
Figure 5.35 List Display Dialog
17 Repeat steps 6 through 16 for all affected indexes.
Copy the List of Sample Results with Invalid Data

Precautions for using external storage:
B71495AF 5-45
• Inspect for viruses on a separate computer for CD-Rs or USB flash drives and confirm
that no viruses are detected after saving data.
• When using a CD-R, write data on the CD-R and set it to unrecordable.
Note
Virus pattern files are information files necessary for virus detection. Update
antivirus software with the latest virus pattern files from the antivirus software
manufacturer regularly. Contact the antivirus manufacturer if needed.
1 Select Output from the List Display dialog. The system displays the Output dialog.
Figure 5.36 Output Dialog
2 In [Select Media], select the media.
3 Select OK. The system displays the Data Output dialog.
4 Select OK. The Data Output dialog displays the save progress. The name of the saved file
is MeasureList_YYYYMMDD_HHMM.csv, with YYYYMMDD_HHMM as the name of the index.
YYYYMMDD_HHMM is the output date and time.
Note
The system does not include pending samples in this list.
5 Select OK to return to the List Display dialog. Remove the media.
6 Data is saved as a csv file. Use a separate computer to open the file and view or print the
list of samples with invalid data.
Print the List
1 Select Print from the List Display dialog.
5-46 B71495AF
5
Replace Reagent Probe Cleaning Solution-1 (Optional Configuration) in MEASURE Mode
Figure 5.37 Print Dialog
2 Select OK.
3 Select Close.
Replace Reagent Probe Cleaning Solution-1 (Optional Configuration) in MEASURE

Mode
When you are using the optional configuration for reagent probe cleaning solution, you can
replace reagent probe cleaning solution-1 (CLN-1) bottles when they are empty in
MEASURE mode.
Note
During reagent blank, calibrator, or control sample analysis, you cannot shift the system
to REAGENT PAUSE mode to replace reagent probe cleaning solution-1.
The system checks the volume remaining in each of the reagent probe cleaning solution-1
bottles at every aspiration. When the volumes reach the alarm test level, the system
generates a Rx Probe Cleaning Solution Insufficient (CLN-1) event.
Rx Reagent tray R1 or R2
CLN-1 The reagent probe cleaning solution-1
Important
Always replace empty bottles to the position assigned in the Load dialog (which displays
when you select Load [F2]). Load the reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle in the
position that the orange stripe indicates close to the Tray Rotation button for R1 or R2.
Caution
As the fixed positions are assigned for the reagent probe cleaning solution-1, the
system does not read the ID bar code. It identifies the reagent probe cleaning
solution-1 as a cleaning solution assigned to the position. Confirm that the correct
reagent probe cleaning solution-1 is in the assigned position.
B71495AF 5-47
Caution
Do not leave the system paused for an extended time. When you pause the analyzer
for an extended time, the concentration of the samples in the sample cups increases
from evaporation and the evaporation can affect results.
Caution
Do not remove or add racks while the system is paused, as it can cause concordance
errors.
The system displays the analyzer mode as PAUSE until the system completes all
samples in progress. When the analyzer changes to PAUSE mode, you can add reagent
and perform a reagent check.

1. Load [F2]
2 Select Load [F2].

The system displays the Load dialog.
5-48 B71495AF
5
Figure 5.39 Load Dialog
3 If you are replacing empty reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottles, select Insufficient
and expires soon and select Test, then select CLN-1 to replace.
Important
Make all selections for loading reagent bottles before selecting Load.
If Load [F2] is selected during the 5-minute transition to REAGENT PAUSE mode, the
original selections are canceled. Only the selections from the final Load [F2] dialog
are registered, and only these reagent bottles can be replaced.
4 Select Load.
The system closes the Load dialog. The system shifts from MEASURE to REAGENT PAUSE
mode. It takes a maximum of 5 minutes for the system to shift completely to REAGENT
PAUSE mode.
Important
While the system shifts from MEASURE mode to REAGENT PAUSE mode, the system
displays MEASURE REAG. PAUSE xx min. in the status area. When the system
shifts completely to REAGENT PAUSE mode, the system displays MEASURE REAG.
PAUSE in the status area.
xx min. The remaining minutes for the system to shift completely into REAGENT PAUSE
mode.
B71495AF 5-49
Note
To confirm the positions and the reagent probe cleaning solution-1 to replace or
add, select List Display [F7], then select the Display positions selected for loading
box.
The system displays the list on the screen.
Select Close to close the dialog.
Note
To print the list of reagent probe cleaning solution-1 to load, select the Details tab,
then select Print [F8].
The system displays the Print dialog.
Select the Only load positions box, then select OK.
5 Prepare the reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle to replace.

6 The system rotates the reagent trays to the orange stripe for loading close to the Tray
Rotation button for R1 and R2 or both. Open the small reagent refrigerator cover after
the system displays MEASURE REAG. PAUSE.
Caution
To avoid injury by the moving components, do not open the upper cover.
Caution
Do not open the large reagent cover. If you open the large reagent cover during
REAGENT PAUSE mode, the system goes into PAUSE mode or STOP mode. If the
system is in PAUSE mode, you cannot perform a reagent check or restart
MEASURE mode when the system displays MEASURE => PAUSE in the status area.
Wait until the system displays PAUSE in the status area (up to 22 minutes). If the
system changes to STOP mode, all samples in progress are aborted. Select the
Reset button to reset the system to STANDBY mode. You need to reload
incomplete samples for processing.
Caution
Do not open the small reagent refrigerator cover while the ROTATION LED (amber
LED) by the TRAY ROTATION button is blinking. The ROTATION LED (amber LED)
blinks when the reagent components are moving.
7 Replace the correct reagent probe cleaning solution-1 bottle.

8 Close the small reagent refrigerator cover.
5-50 B71495AF
5
9 If you have more reagent probe cleaning solution to replace, press the Tray Rotation
button.
The system rotates the reagent tray until the next position for loading the reagent
moves to the orange stripe close to the Tray Rotation button for R1 or R2.
10 Repeat steps 7 to 10 until you replace or add all bottles.

The system displays the Reagent Check dialog. Check loaded positions is selected.
12 Select Start.
The system performs the reagent check.
13 Select Start to restart the analysis.
B71495AF 5-51
5-52 B71495AF
CHAPTER 6
Maintenance
Introduction
The maintenance frequency described in this chapter is determined by analysis of 4,000 or
less tests per day.
Increase the amount of maintenance required depending on the quantity of tests and local
environmental conditions.
Manage the periodic ISE maintenance schedule either periodically or by the quantity of
samples analyzed. The ISE maintenance frequency described in this chapter is determined
by analysis of 200 ISE samples per day.
Calibration for all tests may be required after replacement of key parts such as syringes or
probes. After any part replacement or significant maintenance, Beckman Coulter
recommends that you perform QC analysis. If any shifts are observed, calibrate all onboard
tests.
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions
Warning
Operate the analyzer with the covers down. If you need the covers up during
maintenance, keep all body parts away from the probes and other moving parts of
the analyzer. Serious injury can occur and you can damage the analyzer.
Warning
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats
when performing any procedure. To avoid injury, observe and follow all the warnings
and cautions throughout this manual.
Caution
Failure to perform maintenance according to the instructions within this manual can
cause problems with system performance and invalidate the service agreement.
Caution
If you do not perform scheduled maintenance or maintenance is overdue, abnormal

data can result. Perform all scheduled maintenance along with regular preventative
maintenance.
B71495AF 6-1
Maintenance
Maintenance Warnings and Cautions
Caution
When you press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button the first time after you select a
maintenance procedure option, the system initializes. To avoid injury, do not touch
any moving parts until the system indicates that the analyzer is ready (as indicated by
events, modes, and LEDs).
6-2 B71495AF
B71495AF
Maintenance Schedule (All Countries and Regions Except Japan)

Mark procedures off as you complete the maintenance procedure.
Important
For Japan, refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the ISE Addendum.
Table 6.1 Daily Inspection and Preparation

Daily Inspection and Preparation Month and Year:
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks
Inspect the Wash Solution Roller Pump for Leaks

Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars
Replace the Deionized Water or Diluent in the Pre-dilution

Bottle
Replace the Sample Probe Wash Solutions
Table 6.2 Daily Maintenance

Daily Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the ISE (ISE Option)
Calibrate the ISE (ISE Option)
Table 6.3 Weekly Maintenance

Weekly Maintenance Month and Year:
Maintenance
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars
Perform a W2
6-3
6-4 Table 6.3 Weekly Maintenance (Continued)

Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance Month and Year:
Perform a Photocal
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottle
Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes (ISE Option)
Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line (ISE Option)
Table 6.4 Every Two Weeks or 3,000 Samples (ISE Option)

Every Two Weeks or 3,000 Samples (ISE Option) Month and Year:
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors,
Nozzles, and Sample Pot (ISE Option)
Table 6.5 Monthly Maintenance

Monthly Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash
Wells, and Whole Blood Wash Well
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells
Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube

Mounting Joints
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter,
and Sample Probe Filter
Table 6.6 Monthly, Every Two months, or Every Three Months (ISE Option): The maintenance frequency depends on the amount of samples
processed per day in your laboratory. For more information, refer to Replace ISE Tubing.
Monthly, Every Two months, or Every Three Months (ISE Month and Year:
Option)
Replace ISE Tubing
B71495AF
Table 6.7 Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option)
B71495AF
Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option) Month and Year:
Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution (ISE
Option)
Table 6.8 Every Three Months Maintenance

Every Three Months Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Air Filters
Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing
Table 6.9 Every Three Months or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option)
Every Three Months or Every 20,000 Samples (ISE Option) Month and Year:

Manually Clean the Drain Well (ISE Option)
Table 6.10 Every 6 Months Maintenance

Every 6 Months Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel
Table 6.11 Every 6 Months or Every 40,000 Samples (ISE Option)

Every 6 Months or Every 40,000 Samples (ISE Option) Month and Year:
Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode
Table 6.12 Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples (ISE Option)
Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples (ISE Option) Month and Year:
Maintenance
Procedure: Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing (ISE
Option)
6-5
6-6 Table 6.13 Yearly Maintenance

Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance Month and Year:
Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting
Joint
Table 6.14 As Needed Maintenance

As Needed Maintenance Month and Year:
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes
Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe
Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing
Replace the Mix Bars
Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting

Joints
Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe
Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case
Replace the Wash Syringe
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators and STAT

Table Compartment
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes
Perform a W1
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes
Replace the Photometer Lamp

B71495AF
Replace the Wash Solution Tank

Table 6.14 As Needed Maintenance (Continued)
B71495AF
As Needed Maintenance Month and Year:

Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter,
and O-ring
Clean the Rack
Clean the Rack Input and Output Areas
Save Parameters
Online Software Updates (Optional)
Table 6.15 As Needed Maintenance (ISE Option)

As Needed Maintenance (ISE Option) Month and Year:
Replace the Sample Pot
Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)
Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode
Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)
Replace the ISE Mix Bar
Perform CRS Calibration (Optional)
Manually Clean the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
Maintenance
6-7
Maintenance
Program the Operator Name
Program the Operator Name

To record the operator initials or name of the operator performing the maintenance
procedure in the Maintenance History, enter the operator initials or name in Home >
Change Operator [F2] before performing the maintenance procedure. The operator initials
or name is included in the maintenance history record when the maintenance history
record is copied to an external memory device or CD-R. For more information, refer to View
Maintenance History and Copy Maintenance History Record to External Memory Device or
CD-R.
To enter the operator initials or name for the person performing the maintenance
procedure, perform the following procedure in advance:
1 Select HOME.
2 Select Change Operator [F2].
Figure 6.1 Change Operator Dialog
Note
The operator initials or name entered in Home > Change Operator [F2] displays
from Maintenance History [F2] in the Analyzer Maintenance and ISE Maintenance
screens. The operator initials or name is included in the maintenance history record
when the maintenance history record is copied to an external memory device or
CD-R. Refer to View Maintenance History and Copy Maintenance History Record to
External Memory Device or CD-R.
3 For Operator Name, enter the initials or name of the operator, or select Select to choose
the name of the operator from Comment Master, then select OK.
4 Select OK.
Maintenance Log
The Maintenance Log displays the maintenance frequency, the maintenance procedure, the
date the maintenance was performed, and the next date the maintenance is due.
6-8 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
Confirm the Maintenance Schedule

To confirm the maintenance schedule:
or
Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
Figure 6.2 Analyzer Maintenance: Maintenance Tab
1. Display pending procedures only 4. Next Due (Cycle Count)

2. Procedures due soon 5. Maintenance operation buttons
3. Maintenance log
Note
The system begins to display daily procedures in yellow 3 hours before the
maintenance is due.
The system displays the maintenance procedures that are overdue or about to expire in
yellow. The system displays the number of times some components have been used in
the Next Due (Cycle Count) column. Select Update to reset the count after the
component has been replaced.
B71495AF 6-9
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
2 Confirm the maintenance procedure to perform. Identify maintenance procedures that

are overdue or about to expire:
— To display the overdue procedures, select Display pending Procedures only.
— To display the maintenance procedure about to expire, select Procedures due soon.
Note
If you select either Display pending Procedures only or Procedures due soon, the
system does not list the unscheduled and as needed procedures.
Note
The system displays the number 0, 1, or 2 at the end of each procedure in the
maintenance log.
The number indicates whether to calibrate or perform QC after performing the

maintenance procedure.
0 A calibration and QC are not necessary after maintenance.
1 Perform QC, review the data, and recalibrate if necessary.
2 Perform calibration and QC for all tests.
Add a Maintenance Procedure

Operators can add procedures to the Maintenance Log.
The system is preprogrammed with maintenance procedures specified by Beckman Coulter.
1 Select a blank row from the Maintenance Log.

2 Select Edit Maintenance [F1]. The system displays the Edit Maintenance dialog.
Figure 6.3 Edit Maintenance Dialog
3 In Maintenance, enter the procedure name.
4 In Frequency, select the performance interval (Day, Week, Month, or Year). Enter the
interval value from 1 to 180.
6-10 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
5 Select OK. The system displays the added maintenance procedure in the Maintenance
Log according to the frequency selected.
Delete a Maintenance Procedure

Operators can delete maintenance procedures programmed by operators.
You cannot delete maintenance procedures preprogrammed by Beckman Coulter.
If you delete any maintenance procedure, the system deletes the history data also.
1 Select the maintenance procedure to delete.

2 Select Edit Maintenance [F1]. The system displays the Edit Maintenance dialog.
3 Delete the maintenance name in the Maintenance column.

4 Select OK. The system displays a confirmation message dialog.
5 Select OK.
Update the Maintenance Log

After you perform maintenance, update the Maintenance Log.
or
2 Select the maintenance procedure that you performed in the maintenance log.
Note
You can select multiple maintenance procedures to update all the records
simultaneously.
3 Select Update. The system displays the Update dialog.
4 Select OK.
Approve the Maintenance Record

Follow your laboratory guidelines or procedures and approve the maintenance record. The
laboratory administrator performs this task.
B71495AF 6-11
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
or
2 Select the maintenance procedure in the maintenance log to approve the record.
Note
You can select multiple maintenance procedures to approve all the records
simultaneously.
3 Select Approval. The system displays the Approval dialog.
4 In Approver, enter a name of the approver with a maximum of 20 characters.
5 Select OK.
View Maintenance History

The system maintains a list of the 1,000 most recently completed maintenance procedures.
1 Select the maintenance procedure to view from the Maintenance Log.

2 Select Maintenance History [F2].
The system opens the Maintenance History dialog for the selected maintenance
procedure. The system displays the last thousand maintenance dates, next due date,
operator name, approved date, approver name, and cycle count for the syringe. The
operator name is the name entered in Home > Change Operator [F2]. For instructions to
enter the operator name, refer to Program the Operator Name.
Figure 6.4 Maintenance History Dialog
3 Select OK.
6-12 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Maintenance Log
Copy Maintenance History Record to External Memory Device or CD-R
1 Select Maintenance History [F2].
2 Select Copy to Disk. The system opens the Copy to Disk dialog.
Figure 6.5 Copy to Disk Dialog
3 Select External Memory Device or CD-R.
4 Connect the external memory device or insert CD-R media.

5 Select Display Item or All Items.
6 When you select All Items, select Analyzer or ISE.
7 Select OK. The system saves the history data in CSV form.
8 Remove the external memory device or CD-R media.
View Maintenance Schedule

The Maintenance Schedule dialog displays scheduled maintenance procedures and status
for the current month, preceding month, and following month.
Select Maintenance Schedule [F3]. The system opens the Maintenance Schedule dialog.
B71495AF 6-13
Maintenance
Accessing Maintenance Operations
Figure 6.6 Maintenance Schedule Dialog
If you select ISE, the dialog also displays the ISE maintenance procedures. The colors on the
grid indicate the status of the maintenance procedure.
Accessing Maintenance Operations

To perform many of the analyzer and ISE maintenance procedures, you need to access the
maintenance operation buttons. The overall process is the same for all maintenance
procedures, and the maintenance procedure instructs what specific maintenance operation
button is required.
Figure 6.7 Analyzer Maintenance Operation Buttons
1. Analyzer Maintenance box 2. Maintenance operation buttons

6-14 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance
Figure 6.8 ISE Maintenance Operation Buttons
1. ISE Maintenance box 2. Maintenance operation buttons
or
buttons.
or
Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance operation
buttons.
3 Select the maintenance operation button according to the maintenance procedure.

Table 6.16 Weekly Analyzer Maintenance
Maintenance Procedure Part Part Number
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Bars alcohol)
Stylet 0.2φ (diameter) MU941300
B71495AF 6-15
Maintenance
Table 6.16 Weekly Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Perform a W2 1N hydrochloric acid Commercial item
(0.5%)
1:10 (Outside Japan)
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle (3 bottles) MU960500

ISE Cleaning Solution
• Cleaning Solution • For Japan, refer to the ISE
Addendum.
Hitachi Cup
• MU853200
• Sample Cup 2.5 mL
Perform a Photocal - -
Clean the Pre-dilution Bottle Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%)
(Japan)
60 mL reagent bottle MU960500
Table 6.17 Monthly Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Sample Probe Wash Sodium hypochlorite solution
Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, (0.5%)
and Whole Blood Wash Well • Commercial item (Japan)
(Japan)
Cotton-tipped applicator Commercial item

Disposable pipette Commercial item
6-16 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Table 6.17 Monthly Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%)
(Japan)

Disposable pipette Commercial item
Clean the Wash Nozzle Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Component and Inspect the Tube tissue
Mounting Joints
Sonicator Commercial item
Stylet φ0.3 (diameter) if the ZM022700
sonicator is not available
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Deionized Water Filter, and tissue
Sample Probe Filter
Basin Commercial item
Extra deionized water tank, filled MU959600
with 5 L of deionized water
(1.0%)
1:5 (Outside Japan)
(Japan)
Table 6.18 Every Three Months Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Air Filters Air filters
• MU853100 (96 x 126 mm)
• MU959300 (140 x 140 mm)
Vacuum Commercial item

Replace the Wash Solution Roller Roller pump tubing MU962300
Pump Tubing
B71495AF 6-17
Maintenance
Table 6.19 Six-Month Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the Cuvettes and the 2% Wash solution OSR0001
Cuvette Wheel
Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Plastic containers to hold Commercial item
cuvettes in the sonicator
Note
The sonicator is available through Beckman Coulter. Contact Beckman Coulter for more
information.
Table 6.20 Yearly Analyzer Maintenance

Replace the O-rings in the Water O-rings MU963800
Supply Tube Mounting Joint
tissue
Pair of tweezers Commercial item
Table 6.21 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance

Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Probes alcohol)
Stylet φ0.3 (diameter) ZM022700
Replace a Sample or Reagent Sample probe MU993400
Probe
Reagent probe MU995800
Replace the Sample or Reagent Sample probe tubing MU851900
Probe Tubing
R1 probe tubing MU852000
R2 probe tubing MU852100
Replace the Mix Bars R1/S: Spiral shape mix bar MU959900
R2: L shape mix bar MU826700
Replace the Packing in the Wash Packing B03860
Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints
Pair of tweezers Commercial item
Replace the Sample Syringe or S Syringe B44676
Reagent Syringe
R Syringe B69039
6-18 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Table 6.21 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

tissue
Replace the Wash Syringe R Syringe B69039
Seal Assembly B69043
tissue
Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
alcohol)
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Refrigerators and STAT Table tissue
Compartment
alcohol)
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Anti-static brushes (2 pieces) MU852500
Brushes
alcohol)
Perform a W1 - -
Replace Rack ID Labels Rack ID Label, 0001 x 14, 0002 x C12434
3, 0003 x 3
Multi Rack ID Label C12435
Rack ID Label, 0001-0040 C12436
Rack ID Label, 0001-0100 C12437
Rack ID Label, 0101-0200 C12438
Rack ID Label, 0201-0300 C12439
Rack ID Label, 0301-0400 C12440
Rack ID Label, 0401-0500 C12441
Rack ID Label, 0501-0600 C12442
Rack ID Label, 0601-0700 C12443
Rack ID Label, 0701-0800 C12444
Rack ID Label, 0801-0900 C12445
Rack ID Label, 0901-1000 C12446
Clean or Replace Individual 5 x 5 mm Cuvettes MU846500
Cuvettes
tissue
2% Wash solution OSR0001
Plastic container Commercial item
B71495AF 6-19
Maintenance
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions
Table 6.21 As Needed Analyzer Maintenance (Continued)

Replace the Photometer Lamp Photometer lamp MU988800
Replace the Wash Solution Tank Wash solution ODR2000
Replace the Deionized Water Sample Probe Filter ZM307900
Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-
Deionized Water Filter ZM307900
ring
O-ring MU963700
Clean the Rack Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
tissue
Clean the Rack Input and Output Clean, dry, lint-free absorbent Commercial item
Areas tissue
alcohol)
Save Parameters - -
Online Software Updates - -
(Optional)
Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions

Table 6.22 Sodium Hypochlorite Solution
Effective Chlorite Concentration for Maintenance Dilution Ratio of 5% chlorite concentration:
Solutions
Cleaning Solution (Outside Japan)
Sodium hypochlorite solution (5%) (Japan)
0.5% 1:10
1.0% 1:5
Caution
For each procedure, prepare a fresh sodium hypochlorite solution to maintain

effective cleaning. Without effective cleaning, analysis results can be affected.
Table 6.23 Wash Solution

Dilution for Maintenance Solutions Dilution Ratio (Wash Solution)
1% 1:100
2% 1:50
6-20 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Note
Follow your laboratory procedure for replacing the diluted wash solution in the bottles.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the diluted wash solution daily.
Weekly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures weekly.
• Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars
• Perform a W2
• Perform a Photocal
• Clean the Pre-dilution Bottle
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars
Note
If the sample probe or mix bars are contaminated or stained, carryover between
samples can occur. Clean the sample probe and mix bars weekly to prevent
contamination and to provide correct analysis and results.
Clean the Sample Probe
For more information on materials required, refer to Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance.
Materials Required:
• Stylet 0.2φ (diameter)


4 Unscrew the connector above the sample probe.
Important
Do not bend or damage the sample probe when you replace it.
B71495AF 6-21
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.9 Remove the Sample Probe for Cleaning
1. Connector 3. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button

2. Sample probe
5 After all the liquid drips from the probe, lift the probe from the arm.
6 Wipe the tip of the probe with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
7 Carefully insert the stylet into the probe to remove any potential obstruction.
8 Reinstall the probe into the arm, attach the connector to the top of the probe, and
tighten the connector.
buttons.
11 Select Replace Sample Probe. The system displays the Replace Sample Probe dialog.
12 For Times, enter 3, and then select OK.
13 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Confirm that a thin straight stream of water is
dispensed from the probe, and that the water does not spray or dispense at an angle. If
the water sprays or dispenses at an angle occurs, replace the probe. For more
6-22 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.10 Sample and Reagent Probes
1. Correct flow 2. Incorrect flow
15 Update the Maintenance Log. For more information, refer to Update the Maintenance
Log.
Clean the Mix Bars
Materials Required:
2 Lift the mix bars up to remove them and wipe them with an alcohol prep pad (70%
Isopropyl alcohol).
B71495AF 6-23
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.11 Remove the Mix Bars for Cleaning
1. R1/S mix bar component 3. R2 mix bar component

2. Mix bar 4. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button
Caution
When cleaning the mix bars, confirm that the mix bars are not bent and that the
coating is not scratched. Replace the mix bars if they are damaged. When
inserting the mix bars into the mix bar component, do not scratch the mix bars.
Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample and/or reagent carryover and
affect results.
3 Insert the six mix bars in the positions labeled R1/S and the three mix bars in the
positions labeled R2 for each mix bar component.
Caution
Do not scratch the mix bar when inserting the mix bar into the mix bar
component. Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample or reagent
carryover and affect results.
Rotate each mix bar slightly to insert completely.
6-24 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.12 Mix Bars
1. Spiral-shaped mix bar 3. Silver

2. L-shaped mix bar 4. Green
Caution
The shapes of the mix bars differ between mix bar component. Placing the spiral
and L-shaped mix bars in the wrong mix bar component can affect analysis results.
The following are the correct placements of each type of mix bar:
— R1 and S positions: Spiral-shaped mix bar
— R2 positions: L-shaped mix bar
buttons.
5 Select Replace Mix Bar. The system displays the Replace Mix Bar dialog.
6 Select R1 Mix Component.
8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Watch the R1/S mix bar component perform a
sequence to confirm correct operation. If an abnormal noise occurs during mixing,
replace the mix bar. For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
12 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Watch the R2 mix bar component perform a
sequence to confirm correct operation. If an abnormal noise occurs during mixing,
replace the mix bar. For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.

B71495AF 6-25
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Log.
Perform a W2
To obtain correct analysis results, clean the cuvettes once a week. The sample probe,
reagent probes, mix bars, and waste lines are thoroughly cleaned during the W2 process.
The W2 prepares the cuvettes for the photocal by thoroughly cleaning them. The sample
probe, reagent probes, mix bars, and waste lines also benefit from the cleaning procedure.
Perform a photocal to inspect the integrity of the cuvettes. Clean or replace cuvettes that
show an abnormal value during a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a
Photocal.
The W2 is accomplished by running 1N hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution

(0.5%) through the system.
• Each week, alternate the cleaning solution for use.
• The sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) removes stains formed by protein deposits
left in the cuvettes.
• The 1N hydrochloric acid removes a small quantity of inorganic substances.
A W2 takes about 30 minutes to complete from start to finish.
Warning
The mixing of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid causes the
formation of chlorine gas, which is highly toxic. Do not mix sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid. Confirm that all W2 cleaning solution
containers on the analyzer contain the same cleaning solution. Clearly label
containers designated for sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid
and confirm that all positions requiring W2 cleaners contain the same cleaning
solution.
Warning
to handle hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). If the
hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts skin or clothes,
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the hydrochloric acid or sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
6-26 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Warning
Do not spill cleaning solution on the system. If cleaning solution is spilled on the
system, follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
Caution
For each procedure, prepare a fresh sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). Prepare a
fresh solution to maintain effective cleaning. Without effective cleaning, analysis
results can be affected.
The ISE Enhanced Cleaning procedure is optional during the W2. To run the ISE Enhanced
Cleaning procedure separately from the W2, refer to Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line.
Materials Required:
• Three 60-mL bottles labeled with either of the following solutions:
— 1N hydrochloric acid
— Sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%)
• Cleaning Solutions:
— Approximately 180 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid or 180 mL of sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%)
Materials required for ISE (optional module) Enhanced Cleaning during W2:
• Hitachi Cup

3 Fill the 60-mL bottles with approximately 60 mL of the cleaning solution selected for
the procedure of the week. If sodium hypochlorite solution was used previously for the
W2, use hydrochloric acid for the current procedure.
Do not fill into the neck of the bottle.
Warning
The mixing of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid causes
the formation of chlorine gas, which is highly toxic. Do not mix sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and hydrochloric acid. Confirm that all W2 cleaning
solution containers on the analyzer contain the same cleaning solution. Clearly
label containers designated for sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) and
hydrochloric acid and confirm that all positions requiring W2 cleaners contain the
same cleaning solution.
B71495AF 6-27
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance

5 Place the bottles in the W2 positions labeled W2, 64. Det.-1/W2, and 61. Diluent/W2. If
a photocal is also selected, close the upper cover.
Figure 6.13 W2 Positions
1. W2 3. 61. Diluent/W2
2. 64. Det. -1/W2
Warning
Do not spill cleaning solution on the system. If cleaning solution is spilled on the
system, follow your laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
6 Fill a Hitachi cup with 1.5 mL ISE Cleaning Solution if ISE Cleaning (Enhanced) is
selected. Place the cup in the CLEAN position on the STAT table.
8 Select W2 [F6]. The system displays the W2 dialog.
6-28 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Figure 6.14 W2 Dialog
9 Decide whether to start the photocal immediately when the W2 is complete, without
operator input. Also, the weekly ISE Cleaning (Enhanced) procedure can be run with the
W2 without adding any time to the procedure.
• If you want to start the photocal after the W2 completes, select After W2 ends,
perform the Photocal.
• To start the ISE cleaning procedure during the W2, select ISE Cleaning (Enhanced).
10 Select OK. The W2 starts and takes 30 minutes to complete. You can view the time
countdown in the mode display area. If you selected After W2 ends, perform the
Photocal in step 9, the photocal starts automatically. If you did not select After W2 ends,
perform the Photocal, when the W2 completes, the analyzer enters STANDBY mode.
Caution
The cleaning solution bottles can generate gas. After the W2 is complete,
immediately remove the W2 cleaning solution bottles from the system.
11 Open the upper cover and remove all maintenance materials used for the W2
procedure. Put the diluent and detergent bottles back on the system.
12 The Maintenance Log is automatically updated.
Perform a Photocal
When the W2 is finished, perform a photocal. You can start the photocal from the W2
dialog. If you selected the photocal in the W2 procedure, refer to View the Photocal Results.
The photocal confirms the integrity of the cuvettes. The photocal detects dirt, stains, or
scratches and identifies cuvettes that require cleaning or replacing.
B71495AF 6-29
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
If you did not select the photocal with the W2 procedure, you can start the photocal using
the following procedure.
Important
For optimal results, only perform a photocal measurement when the photometer lamp
is stabilized after the system starts up. The photometer lamp needs approximately 20
minutes to stabilize (warm up) after the system starts up.
1 Confirm that the system is in STANDBY mode.


5 Select Photocal [F7]. The system displays the Photocal dialog.
Figure 6.15 Photocal Dialog
6 Select ALL Cuvettes to perform the photocal.
Note
If individual cuvettes fail, the cuvette might need cleaning or replacement. To

perform a photocal on an individual cuvette after it was cleaned or replaced, select
Cuvette No., and enter the cuvette number.
6-30 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
7 Select OK. The photocal starts. The photocal takes 30 minutes to complete. The system
automatically moves to STANDBY mode after the photocal is complete. The Maintenance
Log is automatically updated.
Note
For a specific cuvette, the photocal takes approximately 7 minutes.
Note
The system automatically saves the first photocal value after you update the
maintenance log for Replace a Photometer Lamp in the Consumables tab. The
system uses this photocal value as the reference value in Photocal Monitor > Detail
[F5] > Graph.
View the Photocal Results
If a cuvette fails the photocal, the system generates an audible alarm. Perform the following
corrective action.
1 Select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance > Photocal Monitor.

— If all the cuvettes pass (no color highlights), continue with step 7 to print results if
required.
— If a cuvette fails, continue with step 2.
Figure 6.16 Photocal Monitor
2 Clean or replace any cuvettes failing the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
B71495AF 6-31
Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
— The system displays cuvettes with a Mean Check Error in yellow. The cuvette is
probably dirty and can be cleaned. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace
Individual Cuvettes.
— The system displays cuvettes with a Cuvette Check Error in purple. The cuvette is
probably scratched and needs replacement. For more information, refer to Clean or
Replace Individual Cuvettes.
3 Replace the photometer lamp if any cuvettes failed the Lamp Check.
— The system displays cuvettes with a Lamp Check Error in red. The photometer
lamp is deteriorating and needs replacement. For more information, refer to
Replace the Photometer Lamp.
4 Select the Maintenance tab.

5 Select Photocal [F7]. The system displays the Photocal dialog.
— Repeat the photocal on each cuvette that failed the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
Select Cuvette No., and enter the cuvette number to check. The photocal takes
approximately 7 minutes to complete.
— Repeat the photocal on all cuvettes if any cuvettes failed the Lamp Check and the
lamp was replaced, or numerous cuvettes failed the Mean Check or Cuvette Check.
Select All Cuvettes in the Photocal Start dialog. The photocal takes 30 minutes to
complete.
6 If any cuvettes fail the photocal again, repeat steps 1 to 5.
Note
If a cuvette fails the photocal after cleaning, replace the cuvette with a new cuvette
and repeat the photocal.
7 If you need to print the photocal results, select Print [F8]. The system displays the Print
dialog.
1. Select All Cuvettes or Cuvette Error.

2. Select OK.
8 Confirm that all cuvettes have passed the photocal.

Clean the Pre-dilution Bottle

When the pre-dilution bottle remains on the analyzer without being periodically cleaned,
bacterial contamination can occur.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the pre-dilution
bottle once each week.
6-32 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Sodium hypochlorite solution
• Extra 60 mL bottles (optional)


4 Remove the pre-dilution bottle from the analyzer and discard the deionized water. The
pre-dilution bottle is located outside of the R1 refrigerator in the position labeled 61.
Diluent/W2.
5 Wash the pre-dilution bottle by filling it with sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%).
6 Rinse the bottle well using deionized water to remove any sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%) residue which can affect analysis results.
Note
Beckman Coulter recommends allowing the pre-dilution bottle to air dry completely
before reuse. Use two 60 mL bottles for pre-dilution and alternate the bottles
weekly.
7 Fill the bottle with deionized water and place it on the analyzer.
8 Close the upper cover of the analyzer.
Log.
Monthly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures monthly.
• Clean the Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and Whole Blood Wash
Well
• Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells
• Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints
• Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter
B71495AF 6-33
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Clean the Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and Whole Blood Wash Well
Dirty wash wells can cause incorrectly cleaned probes, which can then contaminate
reagents or samples.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the wash wells
monthly.
Figure 6.17 Reagent and Sample Probe Wash Wells
1. Reagent probes 4. Reagent probe wash wells

2. Sample probe 5. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button
3. Sample probe wash well
Figure 6.18 Whole Blood Wash Well
1. Whole blood wash well
6-34 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Cotton-tipped applicator
• Disposable pipette


buttons.
6 Select Clean Wash Well. The system displays the Clean Wash Well dialog.
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The sample and reagent probes initialize. All
probes move from their home positions over the wash wells to the cuvettes.
Caution
Do not spill sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash well. Follow your
laboratory procedure to wipe up spills immediately.
Important
While cleaning the interior of the wash well, avoid touching the sample probe and
reagent probe.
9 Using a pipette, dispense the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into each sample
probe wash well, reagent probe wash wells, and whole blood wash well.
10 Use a cotton-tipped applicator to clean each well. Use a different cotton-tipped

applicator for each wash well to avoid any contamination.
11 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. All probes move back to the home position over
the wash wells.
13 Select OK.
B71495AF 6-35
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
14 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. After initialization, the system primes water
through the probes and wash wells. Inspect the probe wash wells visually for correct
drainage. If drainage is poor, repeat steps 5 to 13.

Log.
Clean the Mix Bar Wash Wells

In normal operation, the mix bar wash wells clean the outside surface of each mix bar by
washing in 1% wash solution and then rinsing with deionized water.
Dirty wash wells can cause incorrectly cleaned mix bars, which can cause carryover
problems.
To maintain the reliability of the analyzer and prevent contamination, clean the wash wells
monthly.
Materials Required:
• Disposable pipette


4 Manually turn the mix bar component so that the mix bars are not over the wash wells.
6-36 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.19 Mix Bar Wash Wells

2. Mix bar wash well 5. Mix bar wash well
3. Mix bar 6. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button
Caution
Do not spill sodium hypochlorite solution outside the wash well. Follow your
5 Using a pipette, dispense the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into each mix bar
wash well.
6 Use a cotton-tipped applicator to clean each well. Use a different cotton-tipped

applicator for each wash well to avoid any contamination.
7 Turn the mix bar components so that the mix bars are over the mix bar wash wells.
buttons.
B71495AF 6-37
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.20 Replace Mix Bar Dialog
13 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The R1/S mix bar component initializes and
performs a sequence.
14 Visually inspect the mix bar wash wells for correct water drainage. If drainage is poor,
repeat steps 3 to 12.
18 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The R2 mix bar component initializes and
performs a sequence.
19 Visually inspect the mix bar wash wells for correct water drainage. If drainage is poor,
repeat steps 3 to 17.

Log.
Clean the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints
The wash nozzle component includes nine nozzles that aspirate liquid out of the cuvettes,
dispense diluted wash solution and deionized water into the cuvettes, and dry the cuvettes.
If any of the nozzles become clogged, their functionality can suffer, resulting in inefficient
cleaning of the cuvettes.
6-38 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Inspect the mounting joints for cracks or leaks. If any damage exists, the aspiration and
dispense by nozzles can be affected.
Materials Required:
• Sonicator filled with deionized water
• Stylet φ0.3 (diameter) when the sonicator is not available
Remove the Wash Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints


4 Open the rear cover of the analyzer module.
buttons.
7 Select Replace Wash Nozzle. The system displays the Replace Wash Nozzle dialog.
8 Select OK.
9 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The liquid drains from the tubing.
Note
Before loosening a manifold, drain the water remaining in the wash nozzles. If you
loosen any manifold without draining the remaining water, the water spills out of
the nozzle. If the water spills onto the cuvettes, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the
Cuvette Wheel.
B71495AF 6-39
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.21 Wash Nozzle Component and Tube Mounting Joints
1. Wash nozzle 5. Manifolds

2. Knob 6. Rear cover
3. Positioning screws
4. Water supply tube mounting joint
(Six O-rings installed inside the joint)
10 Loosen the four manifolds and remove them from their mounting positions.
6-40 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Important
Six O-rings are inside the water supply tube mounting joint of the wash nozzle
component. After removing the manifold, confirm that there are six O-rings seated
inside the six grooves in the manifold base.
Figure 6.22 Manifold Base of the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. Manifold base 2. O-ring
If an O-ring is missing, inspect the manifold to confirm that the O-ring is not
attached to the surface of the manifold. If it cannot be found, install a new O-ring in
the groove in the manifold base. For more information, refer to Replace the O-rings
in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint.
Important
Inspect the packing inside each manifold of the three tube mounting joints. If the
packing is damaged, replace the packing. For more information, refer to Replace the
Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints.
11 Loosen the knob holding the wash nozzle component in position.

12 Lift the wash nozzle component up over the positioning screws. Do not bump or bend
the nozzles.
B71495AF 6-41
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Important
Do not loosen or remove the positioning screws on either side of the knob when
you loosen the knob on the wash nozzle component. The positioning screws are
used for positioning the wash nozzle component.
Figure 6.23 Wash Nozzle Component
1. Wash nozzle joint 3. Wash nozzle joint

2. Tubing 4. Wash nozzle
6-42 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
13 Remove the wash nozzle component along with the tubing and inspect the joints for
cracks. If a crack is found, contact Beckman Coulter to have the cracked joint replaced.
Clean and Inspect the Wash Nozzle Component
Important
Do not damage the nozzles when using a sonicator to clean the wash nozzle
component.
1 Sonicate the wash nozzle component in deionized water for 15 minutes. Only submerge
the nozzle portion. Do not get the springs above the nozzles wet. If water does get into
the springs, dry them well using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue, or canned air.
After cleaning the nozzles in water, wipe any drops using a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
Note
Beckman Coulter recommends using a sonicator for cleaning the nozzles. If a

sonicator is not available, clean the interior of each nozzle using the supplied stylet
and deionized water.
Figure 6.24 Sonicate Wash Nozzle Component
2 Remove the wash nozzle component from the sonicator, and dry thoroughly with a
clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
3 Inspect the O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joint. Confirm that all six O-
rings are correctly inserted in individual grooves. Confirm that the O-rings are not
ripped or over-stretched. Look for dust or detergent crystals around each O-ring. If
faults are found with the O-rings, replace the O-rings.
B71495AF 6-43
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
For more information, refer to Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting
Joint.
4 Return the wash nozzle component to its original position. Place the wash nozzle
component over the positioning screws, then tighten the knob to hold the wash nozzle
component in position.
Important
Do not hit the nozzle tips on the cuvette wheel cover when installing the wash
nozzle component.
5 Return each of the manifolds to their original position. Match the colored dot on the
manifold with the one next to its position. Tighten the manifolds without cross
threading them. Confirm that the manifolds are finger-tight to prevent a cuvette wheel
overflow, but do not over-tighten.
6-44 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Important
To avoid system damage and to perform tests correctly:

— When you install the manifolds, confirm that the manifolds are in the correct, color-
coded positions. Firmly tighten the manifolds.
— Confirm that all tubing from the nozzles to the tube mounting joints are connected.
— Do not damage any of the joints or tubing. Damaged components can cause leaks and
can contaminate or flood the cuvette wheel.
6 Select Prime Wash Nozzle. The system displays the Prime Wash Nozzle dialog.
8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The air in the tubing is purged as the wash
nozzle component moves up and down.
Important
Confirm that the wash nozzle component moves freely without interference and
that no leaks occur. If leaks occur, remove the water supply manifold, and confirm
that there are six O-rings correctly placed in the grooves. Inspect each O-ring, and
replace damaged O-rings.
9 Close the upper and rear covers.

Log.
B71495AF 6-45
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter
The deionized water filter and sample probe filter are used to prevent particles from
entering the internal deionized water system. Clean the deionized water tank to avoid
bacterial contamination of the system.
Materials Required:
• Basin
• Sonicator filled with deionized water
• Extra deionized water tank, filled with 5 L of deionized water
Important
Before you start this procedure, turn off the system. If this procedure is performed with
the system on (in STANDBY mode), the system supplies deionized water through the
supply tubing, the float sensor in the deionized water tank activates, and water drains
continuously from the tubing.
Important
Always use new gloves for this procedure to prevent the deionized water tank from
becoming contaminated from previously used gloves.
1 To shut down the system, select END. For more information, refer to System Shutdown
(End Process).

3 Position a basin on the floor under the deionized water tank to catch spilled water.
6-46 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.25 Deionized Water Tank
1. Float sensor connector 4. Basin

2. Deionized water tank 5. Deionized water drainage tubing
3. Quick disconnect joints
4 Unplug the black float sensor connector 868.

5 Press the gray buttons of the quick disconnect joints on the front of the tank and remove
the tubing.
Important
When the float sensor and tubing are removed from the tank, deionized water can
drip. If the deionized water drips, immediately wipe off the water with a clean, dry
lint-free absorbent tissue.
6 Pull the deionized water tank out of the analyzer. Confirm that the tubing clears the top
of the tank and wrap them in a clean absorbent tissue.
7 Unscrew the cap of the tank and remove the float sensor and water supply tubing.
B71495AF 6-47
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.26 Float Sensor and Water Supply Tubing
1. Cap 3. Deionized water tank

2. Float sensor 4. Water supply tubing
8 Discard the deionized water in the tank.

9 Clean the tank with sodium hypochlorite solution (1.0%).
10 Rinse the tank thoroughly using deionized water and set aside and allow the tank to dry.
11 Clean float sensor and the exterior part of the tubing with deionized water.
12 Remove the deionized water filter from the case attached to the water supply tubing
over the basin by unscrewing it. Water drips from it.
6-48 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.27 Deionized Water Filter
1. Water supply tubing 4. Quick disconnect joints

2. Deionized water filter case 5. Basin
3. Deionized water filter 6. Filter case cap
13 Locate the sample probe filter case directly to the left of the deionized water tank and
remove it from the bracket.
14 Press the gray button of the quick disconnect joints and pull to remove the tubing from
the top and bottom of the filter case.
15 Unscrew the filter case over the basin and remove the sample probe filter.
Important
When working with the sample probe filter, do not lose the O-ring.
B71495AF 6-49
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Figure 6.28 Sample Probe Filter
1. Tubing 4. Bracket
2. Quick disconnect joint 5. Basin
3. Sample probe filter case 6. Quick disconnect button
Clean the Deionized Water Filter and Sample Probe Filter
1 Place the deionized water filter and the sample probe filter in the sonicator filled with
deionized water.
2 Sonicate the filters for 10 minutes.

3 Reinsert the clean deionized water filter into its case and tighten the cap.
4 Reinsert the clean sample probe filter into the filter case.
Important
When working with the sample probe filter, do not lose the O-ring.
Figure 6.29 Sample Probe Filter
6-50 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
1. Filter positioning insert 3. O-ring

2. Sample probe filter
5 Tighten the filter case firmly.
Caution
Do not connect the filter case to the joints upside down. If you connect the filter
case upside down, debris can cause data errors.
6 Reconnect the quick disconnects by forcing the tubing into their connections until you
hear a distinct click.
7 Push the filter case into the metal bracket.
Replace the Deionized Water Tank
1 Fill the clean tank with 5 L of deionized water.
Important
Fill the deionized water tank with 5 L of deionized water before turning the system
on. If the deionized water tank is empty and the pump turns on, a malfunction can
result when the system is turned on.
2 Place the float sensor into the deionized water tank. Tighten the cap.
3 Place the tank into the system and reinsert all water supply tubing into the top of the
tank. Push the tank into place.
4 Reconnect each quick disconnect to the tank by forcing the tubing into its connection
until you hear a distinct click.
5 Reconnect the float sensor connector 868.

6 Wipe any spilled water from the analyzer surface and remove the basin.
7 Press the ON button (green). The system powers on and initializes, enters into WARM
UP for 20 minutes, and then enters STANDBY.
Perform a Prime Washing Line
B71495AF 6-51
Maintenance
Every Three Months Maintenance
buttons.
6 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Watch the sample probe tubing, reagent probe
tubing, and water supply tubing for the wash nozzle component as the system performs
the prime. Repeat the prime until all bubbles are removed from the tubing by pressing
the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button.

Log.

Perform the following procedures every three months:
• Clean the Air Filters
• Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing
Clean the Air Filters

The air filters prohibit dust and other contaminates from entering the analyzer.
Caution
Do not run the analyzer without filters in position. If filters are missing, heaters and
the power supplies get dusty, which can cause a short circuit and fire.
Materials Required:
• Air filters
• Vacuum
(End Process).
6-52 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
3 Press the ANALYZER STOP button (black) to completely turn off the power, including the
fans. An analyzer stop is necessary to avoid the risk of the fans bringing dust into the
analyzer while the filters are removed.
4 Remove the air filter at the back of the system.

6 Remove the air filter.
Figure 6.30 Air Filter Locations
1. Air filter 2. Air filter (located at the back of the

analyzer module)
7 Vacuum the dust from the filters or clean the filters with water and allow the filters to
completely dry.
Replace the air filters if they are torn.
The air filters can be cleaned with a vacuum without being removed from the analyzer.
If the filter is moved from its original position after cleaning, reposition the filter to its
original flat condition and position.
Important
If you are cleaning the filters with water, confirm that the filters are completely dry
before replacing them on the system to avoid moisture from getting into the
system.
8 Replace the filters in their original positions.

B71495AF 6-53
Maintenance
up time, wait until the temperature of the cuvette wheel is 37 °C.
14 Select Standby [F4] to return to STANDBY mode.
Log.
Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing

The roller pump tubing deteriorates gradually caused by abrasion and vibration by the
roller pump. If the roller pump tubing is used for an extended period, it does not function
correctly. Replace the roller pump tubing with a new one every 3 months.
Caution
When replacing the roller pump tubing, wear appropriate PPE to prevent your hands
from contacting the wash solution. Do not let the wash solution drip on the
surrounding area. If the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area
Materials Required:
• Roller pump tubing
Perform the following procedure to avoid wash solution leaking from the connection tubing
while the wash solution roller pump tubing is disconnected.


buttons.
6-54 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
6 Select Replace Roller Pump tubing. The system displays the Replace Roller Pump Tubing
dialog.
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The roller pump rotates in the reverse direction
to drain the wash solution back to the wash solution reservoir.
9 Remove the tubing from the roller pump.
1. Normal rotation direction of roller 2. Roller pump tubing

pump 3. Roller pump
10 Remove the roller pump tubing from the relay tubing by unscrewing the connectors.
B71495AF 6-55
Maintenance
Six-Month Maintenance
Figure 6.32 Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing
1. Roller pump tubing 4. Relay tubing

2. Roller pump 5. Connectors
3. ID numbers 6. DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button
11 Connect the connectors of the new roller pump tubing to each relay tubing.
12 Stretch the roller pump tubing around the roller pump, and slide the connectors into
the grooves under the roller pump. Confirm that the ID numbers on the relay tubing
match the ID numbers on the roller pump plate.
13 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The roller pump rotates in the normal direction
to fill the tubing with wash solution.

Log.
Perform the following procedures every six months.
• Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel
Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel

To maintain correct operation of the photometry system, the cuvettes and the wheel must
be clean. The cuvette wheel has 165 cuvettes.
6-56 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
The cuvettes are checked weekly during the photocal procedure. This procedure is
performed every 6 months to keep the cuvettes in optimal condition. Perform this
procedure every 6 months or if a wheel overflow occurs. In the US market, Beckman Coulter
performs this procedure as part of the preventive maintenance.
Materials Required:
• Sonicator
• Plastic containers to hold cuvettes in the sonicator
Caution
Cuvettes with the same outer dimensions might have different interior dimensions.
The DxC 700 AU uses cuvette PN MU846500 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 5
mm. These cuvettes are different from the other AU systems. Do not use a cuvette
from another AU system on the DxC 700 AU. Use of a cuvette other than the DxC 700
AU cuvette on the DxC 700 AU causes erroneous results.
1. For DxC 700 AU (PN MU846500 5 mm x 5 2. Example for other AU system

mm)
Remove the Cuvette Wheel
Perform this procedure on a work surface protected with clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue.


5 Loosen the knob of the wash nozzle component. Without disconnecting the tubing,
remove the nozzle portion and hang it on the hook.
B71495AF 6-57
Maintenance
Important
When hanging the wash nozzle component on the hook, do not damage the wash
nozzles. Avoid contact between the wash nozzles and the cuvette wheel cover.
Do not loosen or remove the positioning screws on either side of the knob when
you loosen the knob on the wash nozzle component. The positioning screws are
used for positioning the wash nozzle component.
Figure 6.34 Remove Wash Nozzle Component
1. Hook 4. Knob
2. Wash nozzle component 5. Rear cover
3. Positioning screws
6 Manually rotate the mix bar components approximately 60 degrees so the mix bars are
not over the cuvette wheel cover.
6-58 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.35 Rotate Mix Bar Components

2. Cuvette wheel cover 5. Mix bar
3. Positioning pin of cuvette wheel 6. Mix bar wash well
cover (under R2 mix bar
component)
7 Carefully lift the cuvette wheel cover and remove it from the analyzer.
Important
When removing the cuvette wheel cover, do not damage the sample probe, reagent
probes, or mix bars.
8 Remove the two black screws located on the cuvette wheel, refer to 3 in Figure 6.36
Remove the Cuvette Wheel. Tighten the screws into the two holes in the cuvette wheel,
refer to 2 in Figure 6.36 Remove the Cuvette Wheel.
9 Loosen the second set of black screws securing the cuvette wheel, refer to 4 in Figure
6.36 Remove the Cuvette Wheel.
B71495AF 6-59
Maintenance
Figure 6.36 Remove the Cuvette Wheel
1. Holes (one hole is between cuvette 2. Black screws

numbers 1 and 17, the other hole is 3. Screws securing the cuvette wheel
between cuvette numbers 83 and 4. Positioning pins
100)
Caution
Do not loosen or remove the positioning pins. The positioning pins keep the
cuvette wheel in correct alignment. Incorrect results or system errors can occur.
10 Use the two screws as handles, and lift the cuvette wheel carefully from the analyzer.
Caution
When removing the cuvette wheel, do not touch the peripheral components.
Caution
When handling cuvettes, do not scratch the cuvettes. If a cuvette is scratched, the
photometric data is inaccurate, and the cuvette must be replaced.
Caution
To maintain correct photometric analysis, do not get fingerprints on the

photometric surface of the cuvettes. Always wear gloves when handling the
cuvettes.
6-60 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Caution
Cuvettes with the same outer dimensions might have different interior
dimensions. The DxC 700 AU uses cuvette PN MU846500 with an interior
dimension of 5 mm x 5 mm. These cuvettes are different from the other AU
systems. Do not use a cuvette from another AU system on the DxC 700 AU. Use of
a cuvette other than the DxC 700 AU cuvette on the DxC 700 AU causes erroneous
results.
1. For DxC 700 AU (PN MU846500 5 mm x 5 mm)

2. Example for other AU system
Remove the Cuvettes from the Wheel

Perform this procedure over a protected work surface.
Use the reverse end of a cotton-tipped applicator to push each cuvette from the bottom
to remove it from the wheel. Remove all 165 cuvettes.
Figure 6.38 Remove a Cuvette
1. Cuvette 3. Photometric face

2. Cotton-tipped applicator 4. Frosted glass face
B71495AF 6-61
Maintenance
Procedure: Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel
Caution
2 Submerge all cuvettes in a plastic container filled with 2% wash solution.
Important
Do not use wash solution to clean the cuvette wheel. If the wash solution is used to
clean the cuvette wheel, the metallic plating on the wheel can be removed.
3 Sonicate for 15 minutes.

4 Thoroughly rinse the cuvettes in deionized water, or sonicate them in deionized water
for 10 minutes to remove any residual wash solution.
5 Allow the cuvettes to dry completely.
Important
Use one of the following cuvette drying methods:

— Allow cuvettes to air dry.
— Use an oven with the heat set under 50 °C (122 °F).
— Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
6 Rinse the cuvette wheel with deionized water and dry thoroughly with a clean, dry, lint-
free absorbent tissue.
7 Insert the cuvettes into the wheel. Confirm that each cuvette is gently pushed down
completely into the wheel.
Caution
Caution
Confirm that 165 cuvettes are correctly installed in the cuvette wheel. If one of
the cuvettes is missing, the mixture, reagent, or wash solution spills into the
cuvette wheel, causing a cuvette wheel overflow and preventing successful
analysis.
6-62 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
Caution
Do not scratch the cuvettes when replacing cuvettes on the cuvette wheel. Never
touch the photometric surface of a cuvette. If the photometric surface is stained,
analysis data is inaccurate. Wear gloves when handling the cuvettes.
8 Dry the incubation bath with a lint-free absorbent tissue if the incubation bath is wet.
The incubation bath is only wet if a cuvette overflow occurs.
9 Put the cuvette wheel back in the original position by aligning the cuvette numbers on
the wheel with the cuvette numbers on the incubation bath of the analyzer.
10 Remove the two screws used as handles to remove the wheel and return to the
positions on the cuvette wheel.
11 Tighten the two black screws securing the cuvette wheel.

12 Put the cuvette wheel cover and wash nozzle component back in the original positions.
Rotate the mix bar components so the mix bars are over the cuvette wheel.
13 Close the upper and rear covers.

Log.
16 Perform a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a Photocal.
Caution
After cleaning cuvettes, perform a photocal to confirm that the cuvettes were
cleaned correctly.
Important
To obtain optimal analysis data, do not start the photocal until the lamp is stable
after turning on the system. The lamp requires 20 minutes to stabilize after you
press the ON button (green).

Yearly Maintenance
Perform the following procedures yearly.
• Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
B71495AF 6-63
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
Replace the O-rings in the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint

Replace each O-ring in the water supply tube mounting joint with a new one yearly.
When installing the water supply tube mounting joint of the wash nozzle component,
inspect the following items.
• All six O-rings are seated in a groove, refer to Figure 6.39 Manifold Base of the Water
Supply Tube Mounting Joint.
• Particles such as dust or wash solution crystals are not be observed on or around the
O-rings.
Figure 6.39 Manifold Base of the Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. O-ring
Materials Required:
• O-rings
• Pair of tweezers


buttons.
6-64 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Yearly Maintenance
7 Select OK.
8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The liquid drains from the tubing.
Note
Cuvette Wheel.
9 Loosen the manifold for the water supply tube mounting joint and remove from the
mounting position.
Figure 6.40 Water Supply Tube Mounting Joint
1. Wash nozzle component 3. Rear cover

2. Water supply tube mounting joint
(Six O-rings are installed inside the
joint)
10 Using a pair of tweezers, remove each O-ring from the groove. Wipe away any
crystallization or foreign matter found around O-ring grooves.
11 Set new O-rings into the grooves.

12 Put the manifold back into its position on the analyzer. Tighten the manifold without
cross threading and do not over tighten. For more information, refer to Clean the Wash
Nozzle Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints.
B71495AF 6-65
Maintenance
As Needed Maintenance
16 Confirm that there are no leaks from the tube mounting joint. If you detect a leak,
unscrew the manifold for the water supply tube mounting joint, and confirm that the O-
rings are installed correctly.
Important
If you use the O-rings for a long time without cleaning or if you put the joint
manifold back without the O-rings correctly set, wash solution crystals can form,
causing errors with the cuvettes. Inspect the O-rings along with the monthly
maintenance of the wash nozzle component.
17 Close the rear cover.

Log.
Perform the following procedures as needed:
• Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes
• Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe
• Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing
• Replace the Mix Bars
• Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints
• Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe
• Replace the Wash Syringe
• Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators and STAT Table Compartment
• Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes
• Perform a W1
• Replace Rack ID Labels
• Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes
• Replace the Photometer Lamp
• Replace the Wash Solution Tank
• Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-ring
• Clean the Rack
• Clean the Rack Input and Output Areas
• Save Parameters
• Online Software Updates (Optional)
6-66 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes
Caution
If reagent probes are contaminated or stained, carryover between reagents can occur.
To prevent contamination and to provide correct analysis and results, clean the
reagent probes as needed.
The cleaning procedure for each probe is identical.
Materials Required:
• Stylet φ0.3 (diameter)

buttons.
5 Select Replace Reagent Probe/Syringe. The system displays the Replace Reagent Probe/
Syringe dialog.
6 Select the R1, R2, or R1,R2 box. For Times, enter 3, and then select OK.

8 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. When you press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
button, the selected probe initializes, then drains the deionized water in the probe.
9 Unscrew the connector above the probe. Allow the fluid to drain completely.
Important
When handling the probe, do not bend or damage the probe tip.
10 Lift the probe from the arm.

11 Wipe the tip of the probe with an alcohol prep pad.
12 Carefully insert the stylet into the probe tip to remove the obstruction.
13 Return the probe to its arm and tighten the connector over the top.
B71495AF 6-67
Maintenance
14 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Watch the dispense to confirm that you
reinstalled the probe correctly.
15 If the water is spraying or not dispensing straight from the probe tip, replace the probe.
For more information, refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.

Log.
Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe

The probes deliver precise quantities of sample or reagent to the cuvettes. Clogged, bent, or
damaged probes affect correct analysis.
If cleaning does not remove contamination from the probes, replace the probes.
Materials Required:
• Sample probe
• Reagent probe
Important
Confirm that the sample or reagent probe is above the wash well and then replace it
with a new one. Deionized water drips from the probe tip as the connector is
unscrewed.
Important
When handling the probe, do not bend or damage the probe tip.


4 Unscrew the connector above the probe.
6-68 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.41 Remove a Sample or Reagent Probe
1. Reagent probe connectors 3. Sample probe connector

2. Reagent probes 4. Sample probe
5 Allow water to drip from the probe, then lift the probe from the arm.
6 Place the new probe into its position and tighten the connector over the top. Firmly
tighten the connector so that no leaks occur.
Note
If the probe connector does not fit, confirm that you are replacing the correct probe
type. The sample probe has a smaller diameter than the reagent probe.
buttons.
9 Select the option for the probe you are replacing.

Table 6.24 Probe Options
Probe Maintenance Operation Button
Sample probe Replace Sample Probe
Reagent probe Replace Reagent Probe/Syringe
The system displays a dialog for the selected maintenance operation button.
10 If replacing a reagent probe, select R1, R2, or R1,R2.

B71495AF 6-69
Maintenance
12 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Deionized water is dispensed from the probe
tip. Confirm that the deionized water is dispensed in a thin straight stream, and does
not spray or dispense at an angle.

Log.
Replace the Sample or Reagent Probe Tubing

Replace the sample or reagent probe tubing if the tubing leaks or breaks.
Replace the sample probe or reagent probe tubing using the same procedure.
Materials Required:
• Sample probe tubing
• R1 probe tubing
• R2 probe tubing
Important
Before disconnecting the tubing, confirm that the probe is positioned over the wash
well. Dripping from the probe can occur.


4 Loosen the connectors on both sides of the probe tubing to remove it.
6-70 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.42 Probe Tubing
1. R2 probe tubing 3. Sample probe tubing

2. R1 probe tubing
5 Tighten the new tubing connectors to secure both ends of the probe tubing. Tighten the
connectors firmly so that no liquid leaks.
buttons.
10 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Confirm that the tubing is not leaking and that
the probe is dispensing correctly.

Log.
Replace the Mix Bars

Replace the mix bars if they are stained, damaged, or if the fluororesin coating is chipped.
B71495AF 6-71
Maintenance
Materials Required:
• S and R1: Spiral shape mix bar
• R2: L shape mix bar

Caution
Do not operate the mix bar component when replacing a mix bar. Replacement of the
mix bar during operation can cause an injury.


4 Pull out the mix bar to be replaced.
6-72 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.44 Remove a Mix Bar

2. Mix bar
5 Insert a new mix bar in the correct position: the spiral-shaped mix bar in the position
labeled R1/S and the L-shaped mix bar in the position labeled R2. Rotate the mix bar
slightly to insert it completely.
Caution
Do not scratch the mix bar when inserting the mix bar into the mix bar
component. Scratched or damaged mix bars can cause sample or reagent
carryover and affect results.

B71495AF 6-73
Maintenance
Caution
The shapes of the mix bars differ between mix bar component. Placing the spiral
and L-shaped mix bars in the wrong mix bar component can affect analysis results.
The following are the correct placements of each type of mix bar:
— R1 and S positions: Spiral-shaped mix bar
— R2 positions: L-shaped mix bar
buttons.
9 Select the required mix bar component. The R1 Mix Component is for R1/S mix bars,
and the R2 Mix Component is for R2 mix bars.
11 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The selected mix bar component initializes and
performs a sequence three times.

Log.
Replace the Packing in the Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joints

When inspecting the wash nozzle tube mounting joints, replace the packing if it is
overstretched, cracked, or torn.
Materials Required:
• Packing
• Pair of tweezers

6-74 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
buttons.
7 Select OK.
8 The liquid drains from the tubing.
Note
Cuvette Wheel.
9 Remove all the wash nozzle tube mounting joints.

10 Remove the packing with tweezers from each tube mounting joint.
11 Install new packing on each tube mounting joint.
Important
Place the packing in the groove of each tube mounting joint.
Figure 6.46 Wash Nozzle Tube Mounting Joint
1. Packing of the tube mounting joint
12 Install all the wash nozzle tube mounting joints into their original positions.
B71495AF 6-75
Maintenance
Important
Install the tube mounting joints in the correct positions. The tube mounting joints
are color-coded to match where the placement of each joint belongs on the
analyzer.
Important
Tighten the cap of each tube mounting joint firmly when replacing the tube
mounting joints, otherwise leaks can result.
14 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Confirm that the wash nozzle component is
operating correctly.
15 Close the rear cover.

Log.
Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe

For replacing a wash syringe, refer to Replace the Wash Syringe.
For replacing the ISE buffer syringe, refer to Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case.
The procedures for replacing the sample syringe and reagent syringes are identical.
If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found with a syringe, replace the syringe.
If syringe performance is questionable because of abnormal data, remove and inspect the
syringe.
Replace a syringe if:

• Pulling on the piston does not come with smooth resistance. A damaged syringe has a
pulling movement that is too hard or too loose.
• The syringe leaks even after correct installation.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing syringes every 400,000 cycles. Replacement of
syringes every 400,000 cycles provides continuous and reliable syringe performance
without unexpected system down-time. To confirm the number of cycles, refer to the Next
Due (Cycle Count) column in Replace the Sample/Reagent Syringe in Analyzer
Replace a damaged syringe immediately, even if 400,000 cycles have not passed since the
syringe was replaced.
6-76 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Beckman Coulter recommends running control samples after replacing a syringe to confirm
the performance of the new syringe.
Materials Required:
• Sample syringe (S syringe)
• Reagent syringe (R syringe)
Caution
If you install the incorrect syringe, incorrect results are obtained.
Figure 6.47 Sample Syringe and Reagent Syringe
1. Sample Syringe (Yellow) 2. Reagent Syringe (Blue)
Remove the Syringe

B71495AF 6-77
Maintenance
Figure 6.48 Location of Sample Syringe and Reagent Syringes
1. R2 reagent syringe (blue) 3. S sample syringe (yellow)

2. R1 reagent syringe (blue)
3 Loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut to remove the syringe from
the mounting grooves.
Figure 6.49 Remove the Syringe
1. Top fixing nut 3. Syringe

2. Bottom piston fixing screw 4. Mounting grooves
6-78 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
4 Pull the syringe forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
Caution
Important
When removing the syringe, hold the bottom with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue. Do not bend the tubing when removing the syringe.
5 Loosen the connectors on the top and side of the syringe to remove the tubing.
Note
Some fluid may drip.
Install a New Syringe
1 Obtain a new syringe.

2 Screw the connectors on the top and side tubing. Do not over-tighten.
3 Install the syringe into the mounting groove. Align the syringe piston into the drive
shaft.
B71495AF 6-79
Maintenance
Figure 6.50 Install the Syringe
1. Top fixing nut 3. Syringe

2. Bottom piston fixing screw 4. Mounting grooves
Caution
Do not allow a strong alkali, such as the wash solution, to contact the syringe. If a
strong alkali contacts the syringe, cracks can occur.
6-80 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
If a strong alkali contacts the syringe, remove the syringe and rinse it with water.
4 Tighten the top fixing nut until you hear a clicking sound.
5 Tighten the bottom piston fixing screw.
Caution
Do not tighten the bottom piston fixing screw first, and do not press the piston
when you tighten the bottom fixing screw.
Prime the New Syringe
buttons.
4 After replacing the syringe, select the maintenance operation button. The system
displays a dialog for the selected maintenance operation button.
Table 6.25 Syringes and Corresponding Maintenance Operation Buttons
Syringe Maintenance Operation Button
Sample syringe (S syringe) Replace Sample Syringe
R1 or R2 reagent syringe (R syringe) Replace Reagent Probe/Syringe
5 In the dialog, select the quantity of cycle times, and then select OK.
Table 6.26 Sample and Reagent Prime Cycle Times
Maintenance Operation Button Setting
Replace Sample Syringe Times setting is preset at 260

Replace Reagent Probe/Syringe
For Unit, select R1 or R2
For Times, select 5 or more
7 For the reagent syringe and tubing: If there are bubbles in the syringe after the prime,
repeat the prime until all bubbles are cleared. If you cannot clear the bubbles after the
prime, perform the corrective actions. For more information, refer to Corrective Actions
if Prime Fails for Reagent Syringe.
or
B71495AF 6-81
Maintenance
For the sample syringe and tubing: If the prime fails (air is still detected), the system
displays a Sample Syringe Prime Incomplete event. Repeat the prime. If the
system generates the event again, replace the syringe.
Note
The sample syringe prime can take from 12 to 44 minutes to complete. The sample
syringe primes until all air bubbles are removed and no air is detected by the
pressure change detection method of the system.
8 Close the right front door of the analyzer module.

Log.
Corrective Actions if Prime Fails for Reagent Syringe
Caution
Important
3 Slowly move the syringe piston up and down by hand. Confirm that there are no
bubbles on the syringe tip.
If bubbles are there, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
6-82 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
4 Reinstall the syringe into the mounting groove. Align the syringe piston into the drive
shaft.
Caution

Log.
Replace the Wash Syringe

If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found with a syringe, replace the syringe.
syringe.
B71495AF 6-83
Maintenance
Replace a syringe if:

• Pulling on the piston does not come with smooth resistance. A damaged syringe has a
pulling movement that is too hard or too loose.
• The syringe leaks even after correct installation.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing syringes every 400,000 cycles. Replacement of
syringes every 400,000 cycles provides continuous and reliable syringe performance
without unexpected system down-time. To confirm the number of cycles, refer to the Next
Due (Cycle Count) column in Replace the Wash Syringe in Analyzer Maintenance:
Maintenance tab.
Replace a damaged syringe immediately, even if 400,000 cycles have not passed since the
syringe was replaced.
Beckman Coulter recommends running control samples after replacing a syringe to confirm
the performance of the new syringe.
Materials Required:
• R Syringe
• Seal Assembly (Silver screw with packing)
Figure 6.51 Wash Syringe
1. Wash syringe 3. Piston

2. Seal assembly
Remove the Wash Syringe
6-84 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.52 Location of Wash Syringe
1. Wash syringe

B71495AF 6-85
Maintenance
Figure 6.53 Remove the Wash Syringe
1. Top fixing nut 3. Mounting grooves

2. Wash syringe 4. Bottom piston fixing screw
Important
6 Loosen the connector on the top of the syringe to remove the tubing.
Note
Deionized water drips.
Install a New Wash Syringe
1 Prepare a new wash syringe by attaching a new seal assembly to a new R syringe.
6-86 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.54 Seal Assembly
1. Silver screw 2. Packing
2 Screw the connector on to the top of the tubing. Do not over-tighten.

3 To dry the wash syringe, seal assembly, and tubing, wipe the deionized water that
dripped with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue.
4 Install the syringe into the mounting groove. Align the syringe piston into the drive
shaft.
B71495AF 6-87
Maintenance
Caution
Prime the New Wash Syringe
buttons.
3 Select Replace Wash Syringe. The system displays the Replace Wash Syringe dialog.
6 Watch the syringe prime and confirm that it is not leaking. If there is leaking, repeat the
Install a New Wash Syringe procedure.
Remove the Air Inside the Wash Syringe
1 Select Replace Sample Syringe. The system displays the Replace Sample Syringe dialog.
2 Confirm that Times is set to 260, and then select OK.
4 Confirm that the air is primed out of the syringe.
6-88 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
5 If bubbles are still present, tap the top of the wash syringe with your finger.
Caution
Do not touch the moving piston. Injury can result if your finger is caught in the
syringe component.
It is not necessary to remove bubbles around the seal assembly or small bubbles less
than 1 mm in diameter. Small bubbles have no effect on the accuracy of the syringe
dispensing.

Log.
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators and STAT Table Compartment
Condensation forms inside the reagent refrigerators and STAT table compartment, caused
by exposure to the outside air.
Keep the reagent refrigerator covers and STAT table compartment cover in position to
diminish the amount of condensation formed.
Clean the interior of refrigerators or compartment when a reagent or sample is spilled, or

as needed after inspection.
Caution
When you wipe the bar code reader glass window inside the reagent refrigerators and
STAT table compartment, clean up and dry the glass window completely. If the glass
window is smudged from wiping, reagent ID or sample ID read errors can occur.
Materials Required:
Clean the Interior of the Reagent Refrigerators

B71495AF 6-89
Maintenance

4 Remove the reagent refrigerator covers.
5 Remove the reagents along with the reagent tray from each refrigerator by lifting the
white securing pins until they unclip from the base. Lift the tray up from the center, and
gently place the tray in a safe place.
6 Wipe off the condensation and stains on the wall, bottom, and central area inside the
reagent refrigerators with a dry, clean absorbent tissue.
7 Wipe the same components again with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) to
clean the refrigerator. Then, rinse with deionized water and dry with a clean, dry, lint-
free absorbent tissue.
8 Place the reagents and reagent tray to its original position for each refrigerator. Set the
tray onto the metal pin. Press down on the white securing pins to secure the reagent
tray.
9 Place the reagent refrigerator covers to the original positions.

Log.
Clean the Interior of the STAT Table Compartment


4 Remove the large STAT table cover.
5 Remove the STAT table by lifting the white securing pins until they unclip from the base.
Lift the table up from the center, and gently place the table in a safe place.
6 Wipe off the condensation and stains on the wall, bottom, and central area inside the
STAT table compartment with a dry, clean absorbent tissue. Also wipe off the
condensation and stains on the removed STAT table.
7 Wipe the wall, bottom, and central area inside the STAT table compartment and the
STAT table with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol).
6-90 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
8 Place the STAT table in the STAT table compartment. Align the guide hole on the STAT
table with the guide pin and then press down on the white securing pins to secure the
STAT table.
9 Place the STAT table cover in the original position.

Log.
Clean or Replace the Anti-static Brushes

Anti-static brushes reduce the chance of static electricity affecting a sample by removing
static electricity before sampling takes place.
Caution
To avoid infection, always wear gloves to clean or replace the anti-static brushes.
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, the anti-static brushes
are not part of the analyzer.
Materials Required:
• Anti-static brushes


4 Remove the dark acrylic cover from the rack feeder module.
5 Loosen the fixing screw at the top of the anti-static brush, and remove the anti-static
brush.
B71495AF 6-91
Maintenance
Figure 6.55 Anti-static Brush
1. Anti-static brush 2. Fixing screw
6 Follow the same procedure with the brush component on the other side of the rack
transport.
7 Clean any stains on the brushes with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) from
the base to the end of the bristle tips.
8 If the anti-static brushes are still stained after cleaning or indicate wear, replace them.
9 Dispose of the old brushes in a receptacle for biohazard waste.
10 Reinstall the anti-static brush and tighten the fixing screw on top.
11 Put the dark acrylic cover back on the rack feeder.
Log.
Perform a W1
If the analyzer was put into STOP mode during analysis, reagents and sample remain in the
cuvettes for longer than normal operation. A W1 cleans the entire cuvette wheel
automatically using the wash nozzle component.
6-92 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
4 Select W1 [F5]. The system displays the W1 dialog.
5 Select OK. The system starts the W1. The W1 takes approximately 19 minutes. After the
W1 is complete, the system automatically updates the maintenance log.
Replace Rack ID Labels

If a rack ID label is scratched, stained, or deteriorated, an ID read error results. Replace the
rack ID label with a new one.
Important
Rack ID labels can deteriorate with time. If a rack ID read error occurs on an older label
and the label shows no anomalies, the label is assumed to have deteriorated from
discoloration or reduction in reflectivity. If the rack ID label is deteriorated, replace all
the labels that have been used for the same time as the concerned label.
• The bar code label is faint, or scratched caused by abrasion or scraping.
• A label is stained or blurred caused by adhesion of foreign matters (liquid or solid).
• A label is peeled or torn.
Materials Required:
• New Rack ID labels
Important
If it is difficult to remove a label, dampen the label with water and use a tool to scrape it
off, such as a razor blade or scissors.
Never use an organic solvent such as ethyl alcohol (ethanol). Organic solvents alter the
quality of the plastic surface on a rack.
If you use water, wipe the water off completely so that no moisture remains on the
rack.
Do not scratch the rack surface.
1 Remove the rack ID label.
B71495AF 6-93
Maintenance
Figure 6.56 Rack ID Label on a Rack
2 Attach a new rack ID label on the rack. Place the label on the beveled edge of the rack
with the numbers on the left (when looking at the rack).
Caution
When replacing rack ID labels, do not use labels with the same rack ID on more
than one rack. Using duplicate rack IDs can cause concordance errors between
samples.
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes
Caution
Confirm that 165 cuvettes are correctly installed in the cuvette wheel. If one of the
cuvettes is missing, the mixture, reagent, or wash solution spills into the cuvette
wheel, causing a cuvette wheel overflow and preventing successful analysis.
Caution
Do not scratch the cuvettes when replacing cuvettes on the cuvette wheel. Never
touch the photometric surface of a cuvette. If the photometric surface is stained,
analysis data is inaccurate. Wear gloves when handling the cuvettes.
6-94 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Note
Cuvettes with the same outer dimensions might have different interior dimensions. The
DxC 700 AU uses cuvette PN MU846500 with an interior dimension of 5 mm x 5 mm.
These cuvettes are different from the other AU systems. Do not use a cuvette from
another AU system on the DxC 700 AU. Use of a cuvette other than the DxC 700 AU
cuvette on the DxC 700 AU causes erroneous results.
1. For DxC 700 AU (PN MU846500 5 mm x 5 mm)

2. Example for other AU system
Clean or replace individual cuvettes that fail the weekly photocal procedure. If only a few
cuvettes need cleaning or replacing after a cuvette wheel overflow, you can use this
procedure.
Materials Required:
• Cuvettes
• Plastic container
• Sonicator


5 Loosen the knob of the wash nozzle component. Without disconnecting the tubing,
remove the nozzle portion from its stand and hang it on the nearby hook.
B71495AF 6-95
Maintenance
6 Manually rotate the mix bar components approximately 60 degrees so they are not over
the cuvette cover.
7 Lift the cuvette wheel cover, carefully remove it from the analyzer, and set it aside.
8 Locate the failed cuvette. Every 17th cuvette is numbered.

9 Using two cotton-tipped applicators, gently insert them in the cuvette to be removed
and pull up.
An alternate method is to use two applicators to pinch the cuvette and pull up.
6-96 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Note
If you have difficulty inserting the applicators into the cuvette or lifting the cuvette
with the applicators, dampen the cotton tip with deionized water before using the
applicators.
Figure 6.58 Removing the Cuvette
10 Determine if the cuvette needs replacing or cleaning.

— To replace individual cuvettes: Insert the new cuvette into the wheel. Gently push
the cuvette completely into the wheel.
— To clean individual cuvettes: Sonicate cuvettes in a 2% Wash Solution for 15
minutes. If a sonicator is not available, soak them in a 5% Wash Solution overnight.
Rinse the cuvette in deionized water. Allow the cuvettes to completely dry.
B71495AF 6-97
Maintenance
11 Put the new or cleaned cuvette into its position. Gently push the cuvette completely into
the wheel.
12 Put the cuvette wheel cover back in its original position.

13 Manually turn the mix bar components back to their original position.
14 Put the wash nozzle component back in its original position.
6-98 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
buttons.
17 Select Prime Washing Line. The system displays the Prime Washing Line dialog. Select
OK.
18 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. Watch as the wash nozzle component moves,
and confirm that the downward motion is not inhibited.
20 Perform a photocal on the individual cuvette. For more information, refer to Perform a
Photocal.
Replace the Photometer Lamp

Over time, the intensity of the photometer lamp diminishes, and results are affected.
Beckman Coulter recommends replacing the photometer lamp every 1,000 hours.
Replacement of the lamp at 1,000 hours ensures continuous and reliable lamp performance
without unexpected system down-time.
Replace the lamp when a cuvette displays in orange for a Lamp Check Error in the Photocal
Monitor tab, or when troubleshooting indicates the need for a new lamp, even if 1,000
hours have not passed since the lamp was replaced.
After replacing the lamp, the system requires a photocal to evaluate the quality and
intensity of the new lamp.
B71495AF 6-99
Maintenance
Warning
To prevent electric hazards, shut down the system (End Process) before replacing the
photometer lamp. For more information, refer to System Shutdown (End Process).
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after the system completes the shutdown process. Do
not touch the lamp with your bare hands until the photometer lamp has cooled down
completely. The lamp is hot and can cause burns.
Important
Never touch the glass of the photometer lamp with your bare hands. If oil from skin or
fingerprints are left on the glass, wipe them off with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent
tissue.
Materials Required:
• Photometer lamp
(End Process).
3 Allow the lamp to cool for a minimum of 5 minutes.

5 Remove the lamp cover.
Important
Do not bump the cover against the reagent probe when removing the lamp cover.
6 Loosen the two knobs on the terminals, then disconnect the lamp lead wires.
6-100 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
1. Knobs 3. Lamp lead wires

2. Lamp holder
7 Remove the lamp by turning the lamp holder counterclockwise, then pulling the lamp
from the lamp receptacle. Handle the lamp by the lead wires.
Important
Never touch the glass of the photometer lamp with your bare hands. If oil from skin
or fingerprints are left on the glass, wipe them off with a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
B71495AF 6-101
Maintenance
1. Photometer lamp 2. Lamp holder
8 Remove the lamp holder and collar from the lamp and keep them for future use.
1. Lamp holder 5. Notch

2. Collar 6. Lamp
3. Collar notch 7. Lamp receptacle
4. Guide key 8. Protrusion
9 Obtain a new lamp. Handle the lamp using only the wires. If you touch the bulb, you can
damage it.
6-102 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
10 Slide the collar along the lead wires with the opening of the notch toward the rear of the
lamp. Align the notched collar with the notch of the guide key of the lamp.
11 Insert the lamp into the receptacle with the notches lined up on the top. Slide the
notches into the keyed protrusion of the receptacle.
12 Slide the lamp holder along the wires behind the lamp and tighten to hold it in position.
Caution
Confirm that the lamp holder is securely in position. If the lamp holder is loose,
accurate analysis data is not obtained.
13 Connect the lead wires to the terminals and tighten with the knobs. Each lead wire can
be connected to either terminal.
B71495AF 6-103
Maintenance
14 Put the lamp cover back in its original position.

16 Press the ON button (green). The system powers up and initializes.
Important
After replacing the lamp, perform a photocal to confirm that the lamp does not
have any defects. To obtain accurate analysis data, wait 20 minutes to stabilize the
lamp after turning on the system, then perform the photocal.
17 Select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance > Consumables. The system displays the Analyzer
Maintenance: Consumables tab.
18 Select Replace a Photometer Lamp.
19 Select Change. The system displays the Change dialog.
20 Select OK to indicate the lamp was replaced and reset the lamp used time.
Note
The system automatically saves the first photocal value after you update the
maintenance log for Replace a Photometer Lamp in the Consumables tab. The
system uses this photocal value as the reference value in Photocal Monitor > Detail
[F5] >Graph.
21 Allow the lamp 20 minutes to warm up and come to the correct intensity before
continuing to the next step.

6-104 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Errors can occur after the photocal. If numerous cuvettes fail the photocal, the lamp was
incorrectly replaced or the lamp is defective. If only a few cuvettes fail the photocal, the
cuvettes are dirty or stained. Clean the cuvettes. If the system still reports an error after
cleaning, replace the cuvettes. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace
Individual Cuvettes.
24 Run QC before processing samples.

Analyze QC data, and recalibrate if necessary.
Replace the Wash Solution Tank

The system automatically supplies the wash solution from the wash solution tank to the
wash solution reservoir.
The wash solution tank has a capacity of 5 liters.
The system can continue analysis after the wash solution tank becomes empty if there is
sufficient wash solution in the wash solution reservoir.
The system consumes the wash solution approximately 0.5 liter to perform analysis of
4,000 tests.
Inspect the volume of wash solution remaining in the wash solution reservoir, and replace
the empty wash solution tank with a new one before the wash solution reservoir becomes
empty.
Warning
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), such as gloves, eye shields, and lab coats,
to handle a solution. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more information.
• If the solution contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with water. Seek medical
attention.
• If the solution contacts skin or clothes, rinse the affected area thoroughly with water.
• If the wash solution splashes or spills outside the tank, follow your laboratory procedure
to wipe up spills immediately.
• If any spill is left untreated, it can generate toxic gas and can cause parts of the analyzer
to corrode.
Materials Required:
• Wash solution tank containing 5 liters of wash solution

2 Place a new wash solution tank next to the analyzer and remove the cap.
3 Carefully pull the sliding tray forward to reach the wash solution tank cap.
B71495AF 6-105
Maintenance
4 Loosen the tank cap, and remove the cap and aspiration tubing from the tank.
Important
The aspiration tubing can drip when you remove it from the tank. Follow your
5 Replace the tank with a new wash solution tank.

6 Insert the aspiration tubing in the tank, and tighten the cap.
7 Push the sliding tray back into place.
Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-ring
Materials Required:
• Sample Probe Filter
• Deionized Water Filter
• O-ring
For information on how to remove the filters, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
Figure 6.62 Parts in the Sample Probe Filter Case
1. Filter positioning insert 3. O-ring

2. Sample probe filter
6-106 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.63 Deionized Water Filter
1. Water supply tubing 4. Quick disconnect joints

2. Deionized water filter case 5. Basin
3. Deionized water filter 6. Filter case cap
2 When the filters are removed for cleaning, inspect them. If the filters cannot be cleaned
successfully, replace them.
3 Replace the O-ring. For more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
Log.
Clean the Rack

Inspect the rack before using it for analysis. If the rack is dirty or sticky, it might cause a
rack jam. Clean the rack.
B71495AF 6-107
Maintenance
Figure 6.64 Dirty Rack
If the rack ID label is peeling, it can also cause a rack jam. Replace the rack ID label. Refer to
Replace Rack ID Labels.
When the rack is damaged, or the magnet on the bottom of the rack is missing, replace the
rack.
Figure 6.65 Damaged Rack and Rack with a Missing Magnet
1. Rack without supporting metal bar 2. Rack with a missing magnet
Materials Required:
• Hot water
Wipe the racks with lint-free absorbent tissue moistened with hot water.
Tip
Handle the racks with care to keep racks clean.
6-108 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
— Do not fill the cup or tube completely to the top with sample. The sample surface in
the cup or tube must be lower than 15 mm from the top of the cup or tube.
— Keep clean or replace the anti-static brush if it gets dirty. Refer to Clean or Replace the
Anti-static Brushes.
— Carefully place the cups or tubes filled with sample into the racks to avoid sample
spilling from the cup or tube onto the rack. Beckman Coulter recommends using a rack
tray when the sample racks are loaded on the rack feeder module.
— When disposing of sample cups or tubes, do not turn the rack upside down with the
cups or tubes in the rack as sample can drip onto the rack.
Clean the Rack Input and Output Areas

Materials Required:
• Hot water
Caution
When you clean the rack input and output areas, do not touch the sensors.

2 Open the upper and front covers of the rack input area.
3 Wipe the areas with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free absorbent
tissue moistened with hot water.
Figure 6.66 Rack Input Area
1. Wipe this area
B71495AF 6-109
Maintenance
4 Close the upper and front cover of the rack input area.
5 Loosen two silver screws, then remove the cover over the rack buffer area and auto
rerun rack feeder.
6 Wipe the bottom and sides of the rack buffer area, auto rerun rack feeder, and rack
output area with an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) or lint-free absorbent
tissue moistened with hot water.
7 Place the cover over the rack buffer area and auto rerun rack feeder, then tighten the
silver screws.
Figure 6.67 Rack Output Area, Auto Rerun Rack Feeder, and Rack Buffer Area
1. Wipe the bottom and sides of these

areas.
Save Parameters
Beckman Coulter recommends saving parameters when programming changes are made or
following your laboratory procedures.
If multiple DxC 700 AUs are in the laboratory, Beckman Coulter recommends saving the
parameter files for each DxC 700 AU to external media.
Online Software Updates (Optional)

Online software updates are available on your DxC 700 AU after you sign up for the
PROService agreement. For details on the PROService agreement, contact Beckman Coulter.
6-110 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
A notification is displayed on your console every time software updates are available. You
can initiate software updates by giving permission to install.
The installation takes a maximum of one hour to complete.
The system indicates the PROService icon on the Home screen in blue and shows the text of
"New file available" below the PROService title.
Install Software Updates
1 Confirm that the system is in WARM UP, STANDBY or STOP mode.

2 Select HOME. The system displays the Home screen.
3 Select PROService. The system displays the Available Installer dialog.
Figure 6.68 Available Installer Dialog
4 Select Install for System Software. The system displays the Available Installer dialog to
confirm that you want to download the new software.
5 Select OK.
The system displays the Available Installer dialog to inform you that installing software
updates requires rebooting the computer and indicates the estimated time to complete
the installation.
6 Select Install. The system performs an End process, and then shuts down.
7 Press the ON button (green).

The computer starts up and displays the SoftwareInstallationTool dialog.
8 Select Install. The system displays a progress bar indicating how much of the installation
has completed.
When the installation is completed, the system displays a dialog informing you that the
installation has completed.
9 Select OK. The system displays an entry field asking you to enter your name and check
the Approve box.
10 Type in your name and select the Approve box.
11 Select OK.
B71495AF 6-111
Maintenance
The system displays the SoftwareInstallationTool Dialog asking you to reboot the
computer.
12 Select OK.
The system restarts.
13 Wait until the system shifts to STANDBY mode.

15 Perform a calibration and QC for all tests.
16 Confirm the results of photocal, calibration, and QC to be sure the system works
correctly.
Note
You can confirm the software update by selecting Approval History [F2] in MAINT. >
Version Information.
Recover the System from a Failed Software Update
If the installation of the software updates fails, the system displays the following message:
Figure 6.69 Software Installation Tool Dialog
To reinstall the current version of the software:
1 Select OK. The system starts to reinstall and displays a progress bar indicating how
much of the installation has completed.
When the installation is completed, the system displays a dialog informing you that the
installation has completed.
2 Select OK. The system displays the SoftwareInstallationTool Dialog asking to reboot the
computer.
3 Press the ON button (green).
Note
Press the ON button before you select OK in the dialog.
4 Select OK.
The system restarts.
6-112 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance (All Countries and Regions Except Japan)
5 Wait until the system shifts to STANDBY mode.

7 Perform a calibration and QC for all tests.
8 Confirm the results of photocal, calibration, and QC to be sure the system works
correctly.
ISE Maintenance (All Countries and Regions Except Japan)
Important
For Japan, refer to Maintenance in the ISE Addendum.
ISE Tubing Block Diagram
Figure 6.70 ISE Tubing Block Diagram
1. Level sensor connector 11. ISE Reference Solution

2. Mixing motor connector 12. MID Standard roller pump
3. Liquid level sensor 13. MID Standard roller pump tubing
4. Nozzle 14. ISE MID Standard Solution
5. Sample pot 15. Buffer syringe
6. Mix bar 16. ISE Buffer Solution
7. Electrode block (inlet) 17. Waste solution
8. Electrode 18. Mixture aspiration roller pump tubing
9. REF solution tubing 19. Mixture aspiration roller pump
10. REF electrode block 20. Drain well
B71495AF 6-113
Maintenance
Parts List for ISE Maintenance
21. Flow cell tubing

Table 6.27 Daily ISE Maintenance
Clean the ISE ISE Cleaning Solution
Addendum.
Hitachi Cup
• MU853200
Calibrate the ISE ISE High Serum Standard

• AUH1015 (US)
• 66316 (Outside US and
Japan)
ISE Low Serum Standard

• AUH1014 (US)
Japan)
ISE High Urine Standard

• AUH1016 (US)
Japan)
ISE Low Urine Standard

• AUH1016 (US)
Japan)
Hitachi Cup (4 cups)

• MU853200
Table 6.28 Weekly ISE Maintenance

Selectivity Check for the Na and ISE (K+) and (Na+) Selectivity
• AUH1018 (US)
K Electrodes Check Solution
Japan)
Hitachi Cup (2 cups)

• MU853200
6-114 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Table 6.28 Weekly ISE Maintenance (Continued)

Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode ISE Cleaning Solution
Line
Addendum.
Hitachi Cup
• MU853200
Table 6.29 Every Two Weeks or 3,000 Samples ISE Maintenance

Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Alcohol prep pads (70% Isopropyl Commercial item
Liquid Level Sensors, Nozzles, alcohol)
and Sample Pot
tissue
1% Wash solution
• OSR0001 (Outside Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Deionized water -
Table 6.30 Monthly, Every Two Months, or Three Months

Replace ISE Tubing ISE Tubing 3 B97643
Table 6.31 Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance
Inspect and Add ISE Internal ISE Internal Reference Solution
• AUH1017 (US)
Reference Solution
Japan)
Table 6.32 Every Three Months or Every 20,000 Samples ISE Maintenance
Manually Clean the Drain Well Sodium hypochlorite solution
(0.5%)
(Japan)
B71495AF 6-115
Maintenance
Table 6.33 Every 6 Months or Every 40,000 Samples ISE Maintenance

Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode Na Electrode MU919400
K Electrode MU919500
Cl Electrode MU919600
O-ring MU990000
Table 6.34 Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples ISE Maintenance
Replace the ISE REF Electrode REF Electrode (with the packing) MU919700
and Packing
REF Electrode Packing MU920200
Plastic tweezers Commercial item
Table 6.35 As Needed ISE Maintenance

Replace the Sample Pot Sample Pot MU962700
Clean the ISE Electrode Block Brush 973001
(Inlet Side)
Manually Clean and Replace the REF Electrode Block MU824500
ISE REF Electrode Block
2% Wash solution
• OSR0001 (Outside Japan)
• MS028400 (Japan)
Plastic tweezers Commercial item

Replace the ISE Mix Bar Mix Bar MU962800
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual) ISE Cleaning Solution diluted 1:10
• Cleaning Solution diluted • For Japan, refer to the ISE
1:10 (Outside Japan) Addendum.
ISE MID Standard Solution

• AUH1012 (US)
Japan)
Disposable pipette (2 pieces) Commercial item

(that can collect more than 1 mL
of liquid)
Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or R Syringe ZM011200
Syringe Case
Buffer syringe case B91297
tissue
Manually Clean the Sample Pot 1% Wash solution OSR0001
Tubing and Bypass Tubing
6-116 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE Daily Maintenance
Table 6.35 As Needed ISE Maintenance (Continued)

tissue
Beaker Commercial item
Squeeze bottle with disposable Commercial item
pipette tip or syringe with
disposable pipette tip

Perform the following procedures daily.
• Clean the ISE
• Calibrate the ISE
Inspections for the ISE buffer syringe are in the analyzer daily maintenance section. For
more information, refer to Inspect the Syringes for Leaks.
Clean the ISE

Clean the sample pot and the electrode lines daily to prevent contamination and inaccurate
results. This procedure requires approximately four minutes to complete.
Warning
Note
If you do not plan to use the system for a long period, clean the ISE at the end of the
day.
Materials Required:
• Hitachi Cup
B71495AF 6-117
Maintenance

is accessible.
5 Fill the Hitachi cup with a minimum of 1 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.

Caution
Wipe up ISE Cleaning Solution spills immediately. Follow your laboratory

procedure.

9 Select Cleaning. The system displays the Cleaning dialog.
10 Select OK. The system starts the cleaning operation.
11 When the cleaning operation is complete, open the small STAT table cover, remove the
Hitachi cup from the STAT table, and discard it.
Calibrate the ISE

Calibrate the ISE once every 24 hours, each time after performing a particular maintenance
procedure, and each time after replacing the ISE reagents.
Caution
When the analysis is in process or the ISE status is Busy, do not open the STAT table
covers to add Standard Solutions to the STAT table or place hands in the path of the
sample probe.
Note
Calibrating only serum or urine requires approximately four minutes to complete.

Calibrating serum and urine together requires approximately seven minutes to
complete.
6-118 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Materials Required:
• ISE High Serum Standard
• ISE Low Serum Standard
• ISE High Urine Standard
• ISE Low Urine Standard

3 If you calibrate the ISE immediately after the Clean the ISE procedure, perform a total
prime to clear the lines of ISE Cleaning Solution.
a. Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
buttons.
c. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
d. Select OK.
e. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE

5 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table until the S-H, S-L, U-H,
and U-L positions are accessible.
6 Fill a Hitachi cup with approximately 500 µL of Standard Solution as required for
processing (determined by your laboratory processing serum, urine, or both sample
types).
Table 6.36 Position Labels for ISE Serum and Urine Standard Solutions
Solution Position Label
ISE High Serum Standard S-H

ISE Low Serum Standard S-L
ISE High Urine Standard U-H
ISE Low Urine Standard U-L
7 Place the Hitachi cups into the corresponding positions on the STAT table.
The system displays the ISE Maintenance: Calibration tab.
B71495AF 6-119
Maintenance
ISE Weekly Maintenance
10 Select Serum Start, Urine Start, or Serum/Urine Start depending on the sample types to
calibrate.
The system displays a dialog for starting the calibration.
11 Select Automatically print results or leave it cleared, and select OK.

The system starts calibration.
12 When calibration is complete, confirm that the result for each electrode is within the
ranges for the calibrated sample types.
The system highlights acceptable results in green and results that exceed the values for
the calibration slope in the <Acceptable Calibration Range> table in yellow.
To determine calibration quality, compare the current results with previous results for
consistency.
13 Open the small STAT table cover, remove the Hitachi cups from the STAT table, and
discard them.

Perform the following procedures weekly.
• Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes
• Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line
6-120 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Selectivity Check for the Na and K Electrodes

The Na electrode and K electrode are ion-selective electrodes. If the selectivity of the
electrodes deteriorates, ions other than Na or K can affect the electrodes, and results can be
affected.
To confirm the ion selectivity of the electrodes, perform a selectivity check of the Na and K
electrodes every week.
Important
Do not leave the bottle of ISE Selectivity Check Solution open. Concentration or
crystallization of the ISE Selectivity Check Solution can occur.
Materials Required:
• ISE (K+) and (Na+) Selectivity Check Solution


5 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table until the SEL-Na, and
SEL-K positions are accessible.
6 Fill the Hitachi cups with approximately 500 µL of ISE (Na+) Selectivity Check Solution
and 500 µL of ISE (K+) Selectivity Check Solution separately.
7 Place the ISE (Na+) Selectivity Check Solution in the SEL-Na position. Place the ISE (K+)
Selectivity Check Solution in the SEL-K position.

9 Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Selectivity Check. The system displays the ISE
Maintenance: Selectivity Check tab.
B71495AF 6-121
Maintenance
Figure 6.72 ISE Maintenance: Selectivity Check Tab
1. Selectivity Check tab 2. Check Start button
10 Select Check Start. The system displays the Selectivity Check dialog.
11 Select OK.
12 Confirm the selectivity check data is below the acceptable limit of 160.0 mmol/L for Na
and 6.00 mmol/L for K.
If the Na or K selectivity check test result is over the acceptable selectivity check limit,
the background for the Na or K result displays in yellow.
If the Na or K selectivity check test result is over the acceptable selectivity check limit,
first confirm the ISE (Na+) Selectivity Check Solution and ISE (K+) Selectivity Check
Solution open bottle stability and expiration with the ISE reagent IFU. Repeat the
procedure with new or freshly filled cups of ISE (Na+) Selectivity Check Solution and
ISE (K+) Selectivity Check Solution. Confirm the ISE calibration results. If the ISE
calibration passes and the selectivity check fails, replace the Na or K electrode.
For more information, refer to Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode.
13 Perform a MID/REF Prime three times to clear the electrode flow cell of any ions
remaining from the selectivity check procedure.
a. Select the Maintenance tab.
buttons.
c. Select MID/REF Prime, and then select OK.
d. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE
6-122 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
e. Initiate the MID/REF prime two more times by pressing the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
button.
14 After completing the operation, open the small STAT table cover, and then remove the
Hitachi cups from the STAT table.
Enhanced Cleaning of Electrode Line

If you do not perform the ISE enhanced cleaning cycle, contamination or inaccurate results
can occur.
This cleaning procedure requires 30 minutes to complete. If the ISE enhanced cleaning is
performed with the W2, both procedures are complete in approximately 30 minutes. For
more information, refer to Perform a W2.
Materials Required:
• Hitachi Cup
Warning


is accessible.
6 Fill the Hitachi cup with approximately 1.5 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution.
B71495AF 6-123
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Two Weeks or Every 3,000 Samples
9 Select Cleaning (Enhanced), and then select OK. The system starts the enhanced cleaning
operation. This process requires 30 minutes to complete.
10 After performing the enhanced cleaning operation, open the small STAT table cover, and
then remove the ISE Cleaning Solution.

Perform the following procedures every two weeks or every 3,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Nozzles, and Sample Pot
Manually Clean the ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Nozzles, and Sample Pot
To obtain accurate results and optimum system performance without unexpected system
downtime, perform the following ISE maintenance procedure every two weeks or every
3,000 samples, whichever comes first. Clean according to your laboratory procedures and
after careful monitoring of calibration and QC data.
For more information, refer to ISE Tubing Block Diagram.
Figure 6.73 ISE Mix Bar, Liquid Level Sensors, Nozzles, and Sample Pot
1. Mix bar 6. Mixing component knob

2. Liquid level sensor 7. Connecting tubing
3. Mixing component 8. Nozzle
4. Level sensor connector 9. Sample pot
5. Mixing motor connector
6-124 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Prepare the ISE for Maintenance
Important
Always prepare the ISE for maintenance procedures. The preparation procedure
prevents the automatic ISE MID Standard Solution periodic (hourly) priming cycle from
dispensing ISE MID Standard Solution.

buttons.
5 Select Drain Bypass. The system displays the Drain Bypass dialog.
6 Select OK.

8 Open the ISE cover.
9 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The liquid drains from the bypass tubing.
Clean the Nozzles, Mix Bar, and Liquid Level Sensors
Materials Required:
1 Disconnect the level sensor connector 714 and mixing motor connector 706.
2 Loosen the knob securing the mixing component. Gently lift the mixing component to
unseat it.
Important
Do not bend or break the liquid level sensors when cleaning.
3 Use an alcohol prep pad (70% Isopropyl alcohol) to wipe the two nozzles, the liquid
level sensors, and the mix bar.
B71495AF 6-125
Maintenance
Figure 6.74 Mixing Component
1. Mixing component 4. Nozzle

2. Liquid level sensors 5. Connecting tubing
3. Mix bar
4 Place the mixing component on the mixing component holder.
Important
Do not change the orientation position of the two nozzles attached to the mixing
component. Do not apply excess pressure to the tubing.
Clean the Sample Pot
Materials Required:
• Freshly prepared 1% wash solution
6-126 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
• Deionized water
• Sonicator
• Beaker
1 Loosen the retaining knob securing the sample pot, and lift the pot from the peg.
2 Disconnect the sample pot tubing from the sample pot by unscrewing the connector.
Figure 6.75 Unscrew the Connector
3 Submerge the sample pot into a beaker filled with 1% wash solution.
4 Place the beaker in the sonicator filled with deionized water and sonicate for 10
minutes.
5 Rinse the sample pot with deionized water.

6 Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to dry the sample pot before replacement.
Reinstall the Sample Pot and Mixing Component
1 Reattach the sample pot tubing to the sample pot by screwing the connector.
2 Reinstall the sample pot. Align the hole on the top of the sample pot with the peg and
slide the screw post into the groove on the opposite side. Tighten the retaining knob.
3 Put the mixing component back on the two positioning pins. Tighten the knob to secure
the mixing component.
B71495AF 6-127
Maintenance
Important
When reinstalling the mixing component, confirm that the tubing is not pinched
between the mixing component and its stand.
Important
The connectors are specially keyed to fit each plug. To avoid damage to the pins, do
not force a connector into its plug. If the pins are damaged, the mix bar does not
rotate, or the liquid level sensors do not function.
4 Reconnect the level sensor connector 714 and mixing motor connector 706.
5 Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
6 Select OK.
7 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The DIAG/TABLE ROTATION LED turns on after
the prime is complete.
8 During the prime, confirm that buffer solution and MID Standard solution are correctly
dispensed into the sample pot and flow to waste without generating events.

Log.
12 To confirm that the ISE is working correctly after the maintenance procedure, perform a
calibration.
6-128 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Monthly, Every Two Months, or Every Three Months
Replace ISE Tubing

To obtain accurate results and optimum system performance without unexpected analyzer
downtime, use the following maintenance frequencies to perform the Replace ISE Tubing
procedure.

Table 6.37 Criterion for Frequency of Replace ISE Tubing
Frequency Patient Samples (with ISE Tests) Throughput per Day
Monthly 501 or more
Every Two Months 301 - 500
Every Three Months 1 - 300
Important
You may need to replace the ISE tubing more frequently than specified in the preceding
table after running more than 1,000 samples or large volumes of dialysis samples, LIH
(lipemic, icteric, or hemolyzed) samples, or serum samples containing separator
material.
Materials Required:
• ISE Tubing 3
ISE Tubing 3 contains a flow cell tubing and a MID Standard roller pump tubing.
Figure 6.76 ISE Tubing 3
B71495AF 6-129
Maintenance
1. Flow cell tubing 2. MID Standard roller pump tubing
Important

buttons.
5 Select Drain Flow Cell. The system displays the Drain Flow Cell dialog.
6 Select OK.

9 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The liquid drains from the flow cell.
Note
The first time you press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button, liquid is drained from
the flow cell. Each additional time you press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button, the
system primes ISE MID Standard Solution through the flow cell.
Remove Flow Cell Tubing
Important
Always drain the flow cell before moving the lock lever to release the electrode block. If
the ISE Reference Solution is not drained, ISE Reference Solution can flow up into the
electrodes and cause problems with the electrode measuring capability. ISE Reference
Solution only flows past the REF electrode (not Na, K, or Cl electrode) in normal
operation. ISE Reference Solution is more concentrated than the ISE MID Standard
Solution or samples that flow through the flow cell.
1 Remove the tubing from the pinch valve grooves by pulling it out and then up.
6-130 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.77 Pinch Valve Grooves
2 Remove the roller pump tubing from the bracket of the mixture aspiration roller pump.
Figure 6.78 Mixture Aspiration Roller Pump Tubing
1. Tubing connector numbers 3. Mixture aspiration roller pump

2. Numbers on pump bracket
remove it.
B71495AF 6-131
Maintenance
Important
Do not change the orientation position of the two nozzles attached to the mixing
component. Do not apply excess pressure to the tubing.
Figure 6.80 Sample Pot
8 Disconnect the other end of the sample pot tubing from the electrode block inlet.
6-132 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.81 Electrode Block Inlet
9 Disconnect the green REF electrode wire.

10 Move the lock lever to the left to release the electrodes.
11 Remove the Na, K, and Cl electrodes from the electrode block to keep these electrodes
away from the REF electrode. Any contact with the ISE Reference Solution can
deteriorate the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.
Figure 6.82 Na, K, and Cl Electrodes
Important
The system uses four O-rings in the electrode block. The O-ring attaches to the
outlet side of each electrode and the metal part that contacts the Cl electrode
B71495AF 6-133
Maintenance
(location A in the ISE Tubing Block Diagram). Do not lose the O-rings when removing
the electrodes.
Caution
When lifting the electrodes, use your hand to support the electrodes. Do not lift
out the electrodes by the wires when they are still connected.
12 Gently lift up the REF electrode block.
Figure 6.83 REF Electrode Block
13 While holding the REF electrode block, disconnect the tubing (labeled 6) from the REF
electrode block.
6-134 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
14 Remove the drain tubing with metal plate from the hook over the drain well.
Connect New Flow Cell Tubing
Materials Required:
• Flow cell tubing contained in ISE Tubing 3
1 Obtain the new flow cell tubing from ISE Tubing 3.

2 Confirm that all joints and connectors of the new flow cell tubing are secured.
3 Place the metal plate with drain tubing on the hook over the drain well.
4 Attach the flow cell tubing (labeled 6) to the REF electrode block.
5 Place the REF electrode block in the original position and reconnect the green REF
electrode wire.
6 Install the three electrodes on the electrode block. Install the electrodes according to
the label of Cl, Na, and K from the electrode block inlet side to the REF electrode block
side.
Important
Confirm that all four O-rings are in position before using the lock lever to secure the
electrodes. The O-rings are necessary to create an airtight seal for the flow cell.
7 Align the electrodes in a straight stack with the pegs in the holes.
8 Move the lock lever to the right to lock the electrodes in position.
9 Connect the sample pot tubing of the flow cell tubing to the electrode block inlet.
10 Connect the sample pot tubing of the flow cell tubing to the sample pot by screwing on
the connector.
Important
To attach the sample pot tubing to the sample pot, finger-tighten the connector.
B71495AF 6-135
Maintenance
Important
Important
14 Place the roller pump tubing of the flow cell tubing on the mixture aspiration roller
pump. Confirm that the tubing connector numbers match to their corresponding
numbers on the pump bracket. Hook one end of the tubing to the bracket, stretch the
tubing around the pump, and hook the other end in the bracket.
Figure 6.85 Mixture Aspiration Roller Pump Tubing
1. Tubing connector numbers 3. Mixture aspiration roller pump

Important
Confirm that the tubing is not twisted on the roller pump.
15 Insert the tubing into the grooves of the pinch valve. Confirm that the tubing is inserted
completely into the groove. Put tubing labeled 6 in the bottom groove of the pinch valve,
and put tubing labeled 5 in the top groove of the pinch valve.
6-136 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.86 Pinch Valve
1. Tubing labeled 5 in top groove of 2. Tubing labeled 6 in bottom groove

pinch valve of pinch valve
Replace the MID Standard Roller Pump Tubing
Materials Required:
• MID Standard roller pump tubing contained in ISE Tubing 3.
1 Remove the roller pump tubing from the bracket of the MID Standard roller pump.
2 Disconnect the roller pump tubing by twisting apart the connectors at each end.
3 Connect a new roller pump tubing. Turn the connectors at both ends to secure it.
4 Place the roller pump tubing on the MID Standard roller pump. Confirm that the tubing
connector numbers match to their corresponding numbers on the pump bracket. Hook
one end of the tubing to the bracket, stretch the tubing around the pump, and hook the
other end to the bracket.
B71495AF 6-137
Maintenance
Figure 6.87 MID Standard Roller Pump
1. Tubing connector numbers 3. MID Standard roller pump

Important
Confirm that the tubing is not twisted on the roller pump.
Prime the Tubing
1 Select Prime Bypass. The system displays the Prime Bypass dialog.
2 Select OK.
3 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The two roller pumps are
activated to prime liquid through the ISE. The roller pumps rotate for approximately
one minute to remove air from the tubing.
5 Select OK.
6 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to reprime the lines with ISE MID Standard
Solution. Confirm that liquid is correctly dispensed from the sample pot to the flow cell
and that there are no bubbles in the REF electrode block side drain tubing labeled 6.
Note
If bubbles are in the tubing after priming, confirm that the electrodes and tubing
are installed correctly, and the electrodes are secured with the lock lever.
6-138 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples

Log.
calibration.
ISE Maintenance Every Two Months or Every 20,000 Samples

Perform the following procedures every two months or every 20,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution
Inspect and Add ISE Internal Reference Solution

Visually inspect the REF electrode. Add ISE Internal Reference Solution when it is less than
the reference line.
Figure 6.88 REF Electrode
1. REF electrode cap 3. Reference line

2. REF electrode
Materials Required:
• ISE Internal Reference Solution


B71495AF 6-139
Maintenance
ISE Every Three Months Maintenance or Maintenance Every 20,000 Samples
5 Inspect the ISE Internal Reference Solution level. If the level is on or above the reference
line, continue with step 15. If the level is below the reference line, open the REF
electrode cap and add ISE Internal Reference Solution above the reference line.
Important
Do not break or damage the glass REF electrode.
6 Close the REF electrode cap.

8 Wait 15 minutes to allow the solution to equilibrate.

buttons.
11 Select OK.
12 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
LED turns on after the prime is complete.

Log.
calibration.

Perform the following procedures every three months or every 20,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Manually Clean the Drain Well
Manually Clean the Drain Well

If the system analyzes samples that contain large amounts of fibrin and protein, the fibrin
and protein can accumulate by the drain tubing outlet and drain well, possibly causing
errors.
Manually clean the drain well every three months.
6-140 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.89 Drain Well
1. Drain well
Materials Required:
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
B71495AF 6-141
Maintenance
Clean the Drain Well
1 Remove the drain tubing from the hook over the drain well.
Warning
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, eye shields, and lab
coats, to handle hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). If the
hydrochloric acid or sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts skin or clothes,
rinse the affected area thoroughly with water. If the hydrochloric acid or sodium
hypochlorite solution (0.5%) contacts the eyes or mouth, immediately flush with
water. Seek medical attention. Refer to the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for more
2 Prepare approximately 50 mL of sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%). For more

information, refer to Dilution Ratios for Maintenance Solutions.
3 Pour the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) into the drain well directly from the top.
6-142 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
4 Allow the sodium hypochlorite solution (0.5%) to sit for approximately 10 minutes.
5 Pour deionized water into the drain well to rinse out the sodium hypochlorite solution.
6 Put the drain tubing on the hook over the drain well.
Note
You may need to repeat this step five times. If bubbles are in the tubing after
priming, confirm that the electrodes and tubing are installed correctly, and the
electrodes are secured with the lock lever.
B71495AF 6-143
Maintenance
ISE Six-Month Maintenance or Every 40,000 Samples

Log.

Perform the following procedures every six months or every 40,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode
Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode
Tip
You can find the Lot No. and the bar code containing both the electrode ID and lot No.
on the electrode package. You need this information to document on the maintenance
log.
Replace the electrode when calibration or Selectivity Check results are out of range. Before
replacing the electrode, perform appropriate troubleshooting, repeat the calibration or
Selectivity Check, and confirm the results are still out of range. Replacement of the
electrode at every 40,000 samples or every six months, whichever comes first, ensures
continuous and reliable electrode performance without unexpected system down-time. If
the electrodes have deteriorated, the system cannot obtain accurate analysis results.
Materials Required:
• Na Electrode
• K Electrode
• Cl Electrode
• O-ring
Important

6-144 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
Procedure: Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode
Important

2 Remove the three electrodes.
Caution
B71495AF 6-145
Maintenance
Figure 6.90 Na, K, and Cl Electrodes
1. CI electrode wire (blue) 5. Sample pot

2. Na electrode wire (yellow) 6. Electrodes
3. K electrode wire (red) 7. Lock lever
4. O-ring
3 Disconnect the lead wire of the electrode being replaced.

Caution
Handle the lead wires from the very end so they do not come apart.
4 Replace the failed electrode with a new one.
6-146 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Important
the electrodes.
5 Connect the blue wire to the Cl electrode, yellow wire to the Na electrode, and red wire
to the K electrode.
6 Confirm that the green wire connects to the REF electrode.

7 Before installing the electrodes, wipe the electrode block with a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue.
side.
Important
Confirm that all four O-rings are in position before using the lock lever to secure the
electrodes. The O-rings are necessary to create an airtight seal for the flow cell.
B71495AF 6-147
Maintenance
Note

13 Select Replace the Na, K or Cl Electrode from the maintenance log.
15 Select OK. The system displays the Electrode Lot No. dialog.
16 Scan the bar code on the electrode package. The system then displays the scanned ID
and Lot No. in each field. If the bar code is not read successfully, leave the ID field blank
and manually enter the lot No. in the Lot No. field.
17 Select OK.
18 Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after closing the covers, and then perform a calibration.
Important
To obtain the best possible analysis data, perform two calibration measurements to
confirm the electrode stability:
Table 6.38 Acceptable Differences Between First and Second MID Solution Factors
Na K Cl
Difference between 1st and 2nd factors 0.020 0.045 0.025
— If the difference between the first and second MID Solution factors is smaller than
or equal to the value in the preceding table, the electrode is stable.
— If the difference between the first and second MID Solution factors is larger than
the value in the preceding table or if the slope of the first calibration curve is 0,
bubbles may remain in the flow cell. Perform a MID/REF prime.
1. Lift the upper cover.
2. Open the ISE cover.
3. Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > Maintenance. The system displays the ISE
4. Select the ISE Maintenance box. The system activates the maintenance
operation buttons.
5. Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
6. Select OK.
7. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button.
8. Close all the analyzer doors and covers.
6-148 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE Maintenance Every Two Years or Every 150,000 Samples
9. Clear the ISE Maintenance box to deactivate the maintenance operation buttons.
10. Repeat the ISE calibration two more times and compare the results to the chart.
— If the slopes of the first and second calibration curves are both 0, the electrodes
might not have been installed correctly.
Repeat the Replace the Na, K, or Cl Electrode procedure to confirm that you have
installed the electrodes correctly.

Perform the following procedures every two years or every 150,000 samples, whichever
comes first.
• Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing
Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing
Tip
You can find the Lot No. and the bar code containing both the electrode ID and lot No.
on the electrode package. You need this information to document on the maintenance
log.
Replace the electrode when calibration or Selectivity Check results are out of range. Before
replacing the electrode, perform appropriate troubleshooting, repeat the calibration or
Selectivity Check, and confirm the results are still out of range. Replacement of the
electrode at 150,000 samples or 2 years, whichever comes first, ensures continuous and
reliable electrode performance without unexpected system down-time.
If all calibration measurement values of Na, K, and Cl fluctuate, higher or lower than
previous measurements, or if the system displays an event message after replacing the REF
electrode, contact Beckman Coulter.
Materials Required:
• REF Electrode (with the packing)
• REF Electrode Packing
• Plastic tweezers
Important
Do not use force to install or uninstall the REF electrode. When installing or uninstalling
the electrode, do not break the electrode.
B71495AF 6-149
Maintenance
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
Remove the REF Electrode and Packing
Important
6-150 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Important
the electrodes.
Caution
3 Disconnect the green wire from the REF electrode.

4 Gently lift the REF electrode block.
5 Carefully unscrew the REF electrode cap screw, then gently remove the REF electrode
along with the cap screw.
B71495AF 6-151
Maintenance
6 Remove the REF electrode packing with a pair of plastic tweezers.
Figure 6.91 ISE REF Electrode and Packing
1. REF solution tubing 4. REF electrode

2. REF electrode packing 5. REF electrode wire (green)
3. Cap screw
Procedure: Replace the ISE REF Electrode and Packing
6-152 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
1 Confirm that no air bubbles are in the REF electrode tip. If air bubbles are found in the
tip, remove the bubbles by pointing the electrode tip downward while tapping it with a
finger.
2 Insert new packing into the REF electrode block.

3 Place the cap screw on the REF electrode, then place the REF electrode in the REF
electrode block so that the electrode tip is centered in the packing.
Note
Dampen the REF electrode tip with deionized water if you have difficulty inserting
the REF electrode into the REF electrode block.
4 Insert the cap screw into the REF electrode block and screw it in carefully. Finish
tightening the cap screw by a quarter or half turn to orient the REF electrode correctly.
5 Reinstall the REF electrode block.

6 Connect the green REF electrode wire to the REF electrode.
7 Wipe the top of the block with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Always wear
gloves when handling the ISE Reference Solution.
8 Reinstall the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.

10 Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
11 Select OK.
B71495AF 6-153
Maintenance
Note

15 Select Replace the ISE REF Electrode and the Packing from the maintenance log.
17 Select OK. The system displays the Electrode Lot No. dialog.
18 Scan the bar code on the electrode package. The system then displays the scanned ID
and Lot No. in each field. If the bar code is not read successfully, leave the ID field blank
and manually enter the lot No. in the Lot No. field.
19 Select OK.
Important
Na K Cl
operation buttons.
6. Select OK.
6-154 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
ISE As Needed Maintenance

• Replace the Sample Pot
• Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)
• Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode
• Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block
• Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)
• Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case
• Replace the ISE Mix Bar
• Perform CRS Calibration (Optional)
• Manually Clean the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
Replace the Sample Pot

Replace the sample pot if contaminants accumulate and cannot be removed during the
every two weeks cleaning procedure. Also replace the pot if any cracks or flaws are found in
the pot.
Figure 6.92 Sample Pot and Mixing Component
1. Mix bar 6. Mixing component knob

2. Liquid level sensor 7. Connecting tubing
3. Mixing component 8. Nozzles
4. Level sensor connector 9. Sample pot
5. Mixing motor connector
B71495AF 6-155
Maintenance
Materials Required:
• Sample Pot
Important

buttons.
5 Select Drain Bypass. The system displays the Drain Bypass dialog.
6 Select OK.

9 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The liquid drains from the bypass tubing.
Procedure: Replace the Sample Pot
unseat it.
6-156 B71495AF
6
Maintenance

6 Reattach the sample pot tubing to the new sample pot by screwing the connector.
B71495AF 6-157
Maintenance
Important
Important
11 Select OK.
12 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button. The DIAG/TABLE ROTATION LED turns on after
the prime is complete.
13 During the prime, confirm that buffer solution and MID Standard solution are correctly
dispensed into the sample pot and flow to waste without generating events.

Log.
calibration.
6-158 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)

Inspect the inlet side of the electrode block for contaminants that have accumulated.
Perform maintenance to clean the inlet side of the electrode block as needed.
Figure 6.93 Electrode Block
1. Electrode block (inlet side) 5. K electrode wire (red)

2. Brush 6. Electrodes
3. Cl electrode wire (blue) 7. REF electrode wire (green)
4. Na electrode wire (yellow)
Materials Required:
• Brush
Figure 6.94 Brush
Important

B71495AF 6-159
Maintenance
buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
Procedure: Clean the ISE Electrode Block (Inlet Side)
Important
unseat it.

4 Remove the sample pot tubing from the electrode block inlet.
6-160 B71495AF
6
Maintenance

6 Remove the Na, K, and Cl electrodes from the electrode block.
Important
the electrodes.
Caution
7 Pass the brush through the hole in the metal part that contacts the Cl electrode (location
A in ISE Tubing Block Diagram). Contamination can lodge in the flow cell of the
electrode block.
B71495AF 6-161
Maintenance
Figure 6.95 Electrode Block Inlet
8 Remove contamination in the block by turning the brush.

side.
11 Attach the sample pot tubing to the electrode block inlet.
6-162 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Important
Important
Note

Log.
calibration.
Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode

If calibration errors, such as slope readings of 0, occur frequently for the K electrode only,
the ISE Reference Solution may have contaminated the K electrode. In this situation,
perform the manual cleaning of the K electrode.
B71495AF 6-163
Maintenance
Figure 6.96 Electrode Block
1. REF electrode block 5. Cl electrode wire (blue)

2. REF solution tubing 6. Na electrode wire (yellow)
3. Electrodes 7. K electrode wire (red)
4. O-ring
Materials Required:
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.
6-164 B71495AF
6
Maintenance

Note
Procedure: Manually Clean the ISE K Electrode
Important

2 Remove the K electrode from the electrode block.
Caution
B71495AF 6-165
Maintenance
3 Disconnect the lead wire of the K electrode.

4 Remove the O-ring of the K electrode.
Figure 6.97 K Electrode
1. O-ring
5 Use a squeeze bottle to dispense deionized water to clean the O-ring and O-ring groove
of the electrode. Deionized water that gets into the electrode flow cell does not cause a
problem.
6 Wipe the side face (location B in ISE Tubing Block Diagram) of the REF electrode block
that contacts the K electrode using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue dampened
with deionized water.
7 Using a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue, sufficiently dry the K electrode, O-ring, and
REF electrode block surfaces.
8 Connect the red lead wire to the K electrode.

6-166 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
side.
Important
(location A in ISE Tubing Block Diagram). Do not lose the O-rings when removing the
electrodes.
11 Confirm that Drain Flow Cell is selected.
Note

Log.
B71495AF 6-167
Maintenance
Important
Na K Cl
operation buttons.
6. Select OK.
Manually Clean and Replace the ISE REF Electrode Block

The accumulation of contaminants or crystals, a reduction in the flow rate, or noise
interference can cause data problems. Manually clean or replace the ISE REF electrode
block if the data indicates that it is needed.
6-168 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.98 ISE REF Electrode Block
1. REF electrode block 4. Cap screw

2. REF solution tubing 5. REF electrode
3. REF electrode packing 6. REF electrode wire (green)
Materials Required:
• REF Electrode Block
• Plastic tweezers
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.

B71495AF 6-169
Maintenance
Note
Procedure: Manually Clean and Replace the REF Electrode Block
Important

Important
the electrodes.
6-170 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Caution
3 Disconnect the REF electrode wire (green) from the REF electrode.
Caution
Handle the REF electrode wire (green) from the end to avoid damage to the wire.
4 Gently lift up the block on which the REF electrode is installed.

5 Loosen the cap screw on the REF electrode and gently remove the electrode along with
the cap screw.
6 Remove the REF electrode packing in the block with a pair of plastic tweezers.
7 While holding the REF electrode block by hand, pull the REF electrode block-side drain
tubing (labeled 6) out of the REF electrode block.
8 Remove the REF solution tubing (refer to Figure 6.98 ISE REF Electrode Block)
connected to the lower side of the REF electrode block.
B71495AF 6-171
Maintenance
Important
To prevent the REF electrode block from becoming deformed from ultrasonic
cleaning, follow these precautions. If the REF electrode block has been deformed or
cracked, replace it.
— Do not perform ultrasonic cleaning for more than 10 minutes.
— Use a cleaning liquid at room temperature.
— Use a sonicator rated at 600 W or less. If the output of the sonicator is uncertain,
contact the manufacturer of the sonicator.
9 To clean the REF electrode block, do one of the following:

— Sonicate for 10 minutes in 2% wash solution.
— If a sonicator is not available, soak it in the 2% wash solution for more than 30
minutes.
6-172 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Confirm that 2% wash solution can flow through the flow path in the REF electrode
block.
10 Thoroughly rinse the REF electrode block in deionized water, and dry with a clean, dry,
lint-free absorbent tissue. If you are replacing the REF electrode block, obtain a new
REF electrode block.
1. REF electrode block 3. REF solution tubing

2. REF electrode block-side drain
tubing (labeled 6)
11 Attach the REF electrode block-side drain tubing (labeled 6) and the REF solution
tubing (refer to Figure 6.98 ISE REF Electrode Block) to the cleaned or a new REF
electrode block.
B71495AF 6-173
Maintenance
12 Confirm that no air bubbles are in the REF electrode tip. If air bubbles are found in the
tip, remove the bubbles by pointing the electrode tip downward while tapping it with a
finger.
13 Insert the REF electrode packing into the REF electrode block. Confirm that the packing
is not cracked or broken. If so, replace the packing.
14 Place the cap screw on the REF electrode, then place the REF electrode in the REF
electrode block so that the electrode tip is centered in the packing.
Note
Dampen the REF electrode tip with deionized water if you have difficulty inserting
the REF electrode into the REF electrode block.
15 Insert the cap screw into the REF electrode block and screw it in carefully. Finish
tightening the cap screw by a quarter or half turn to orient the REF electrode correctly.
6-174 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
16 Reinstall the REF electrode block.

17 Connect the green REF electrode wire to the REF electrode.
18 Wipe the top of the block with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue. Always wear
gloves when handling the ISE Reference Solution.
19 Reinstall the Na, K, and Cl electrodes.

21 Connect the blue wire to the Cl electrode, yellow wire to the Na electrode, and red wire
to the K electrode.
Note

Log.
calibration.
B71495AF 6-175
Maintenance
Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)

Use this method when the ISE calibration slopes are in the mid-to-low forties, or if there is a
residue when you inspect the sample pot or T-tubing.
Materials Required:
• ISE Cleaning Solution diluted 1:10
• Pipette (2 pieces) (that is commercially available and can collect more than 1 mL of
liquid)
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
6-176 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Procedure: Enhanced ISE Cleaning (Manual)
Warning
unseat it.

4 Remove the tubing (labeled 5 and 6) from the pinch valve.
B71495AF 6-177
Maintenance
5 For the first 2 minutes, pipette the ISE Cleaning Solution into the sample pot while
manually turning the right roller pump component clockwise until most of the ISE
Cleaning Solution empties from the sample pot into the tubing. Continue filling the
sample pot with the ISE Cleaning Solution while turning the roller pump component.
Do not completely empty the sample pot before adding more ISE Cleaning Solution.
Confirm that the tubing is filled with the ISE Cleaning Solution.
6-178 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.100 Filling the Sample Pot
1. Pipette 2. Sample pot
6 Let the ISE Cleaning Solution remain in the tubing for 5 minutes.
7 Manually turn the roller pump to clear the ISE Cleaning Solution from the tubing.
8 Pipette 10 mL of ISE MID Standard Solution into the sample pot and manually turn the
roller pump to clear the ISE MID Standard Solution. Repeat 3 times.
B71495AF 6-179
Maintenance
Important
Important
11 Insert the tubing into the grooves of the pinch valve. Confirm that the tubing is inserted
completely into the groove. Put tubing labeled 6 in the bottom groove of the pinch valve,
and put tubing labeled 5 in the top groove of the pinch valve.
12 Select MID/REF Prime. The system displays the MID/REF Prime dialog.
13 Select OK.
14 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime.
15 Repeat the MID/REF prime two times.

17 Select OK.
18 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime.

6-180 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
21 Calibrate and process QC on the ISE.

22 If the tubing is not clean after performing this procedure, replace the tubing according
to the following procedures:
— Manually Clean the Drain Well
Replace the ISE Buffer Syringe or Syringe Case

If a leak, crack, or any other damage is found with the syringe, replace the syringe.
syringe.
Replace the syringe if:

• There is not smooth resistance when pulling on the piston. A worn or damaged syringe
has a pulling movement that is too hard or too loose.
• The fluorocarbon polymer tip is worn, damaged, or there is evidence of the
fluorocarbon polymers flaking.
• The syringe or case head leaks even after correct installation.
• The head of the syringe is cracked.
Replace the buffer syringe case if:
• The case body or case head is chipped, worn, or damaged in any way.
Materials Required:
• R Syringe
• Buffer syringe case
Caution
Do not remove the piston from a new syringe. If you remove the piston, the
performance of the syringe can be unreliable.
B71495AF 6-181
Maintenance
Figure 6.101 Buffer Syringe Case
1. Buffer Syringe Case (Gray)
Remove the ISE Buffer Syringe

3 Loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut to remove the syringe case
from the mounting grooves.
4 Pull the syringe case forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
6-182 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.102 Location of ISE Buffer Syringe
1. ISE Buffer Syringe
Caution
Important
When removing the syringe case, hold the bottom with a clean, dry, lint-free
absorbent tissue. Do not bend the tubing when removing the syringe case.
5 Tilt the syringe case upside down before removing the syringe. Tilting the syringe case
prevents air from entering the tubing lines and keeps the water from leaking into the
syringe case.
6 Remove the case body by turning it counterclockwise while holding the case head. Pull
the syringe from the case head.
Do not lose the O-ring, which can drop from the case head. If the O-ring remains in the
case head, carefully remove it with a pair of tweezers.
B71495AF 6-183
Maintenance
Figure 6.103 Remove the Syringe
1. Case head
2. O-ring
3. Syringe
4. Case body
Install a New ISE Buffer Syringe or a New Syringe Case
1 Obtain a new syringe, and if necessary, a new syringe case.

2 Insert the new syringe into the case head.
3 Dry excess water from the syringe and case head to prevent condensation from forming
in the case. Screw the case body into the case head by twisting clockwise. Do not over-
tighten. Tighten the case body by 45 to 60 degrees from the position that it becomes
tight.
4 Reinstall the syringe by placing the case head into the mounting groove. Align the
syringe piston into the drive shaft.
Prime the New ISE Buffer Syringe
buttons.
6-184 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
3 Select Buffer Prime. The system displays the Buffer Prime dialog.
4 Select OK.
6 If there are bubbles in the syringe after priming, repeat the prime until all bubbles are
cleared. If you cannot clear the bubbles after the prime, perform the corrective actions.
For more information, refer to Corrective Actions if Prime Fails for the ISE Buffer
Syringe.

Log.
Corrective Actions if Prime Fails for the ISE Buffer Syringe
1 Loosen the bottom piston fixing screw and the top fixing nut to remove the syringe case
from the mounting grooves.
2 Pull the syringe case forward to remove it from the mounting grooves.
Caution
Important
Important
Do not apply excessive force to the fixing screws when you remove the syringe case.
Excessive force to the fixing screws damages the syringe case.
3 Slowly move the syringe piston up and down by hand. Confirm that there are no
bubbles on the syringe tip.
If you see bubbles, move the piston up and down until the bubbles are purged.
B71495AF 6-185
Maintenance
Caution
Do not move the piston by hand with the case body and case head disconnected.
If you move the syringe piston with the case body and case head disconnected,
the accuracy is not retained because of the deformation of the piston. This
deformation can decrease the time a syringe is in use before requiring
replacement.
Figure 6.104 Confirm No Bubbles are on the Syringe Tip
1. Confirm that no bubbles are 3. Syringe

attached to the fluorocarbon 4. Case body
polymer tip. 5. Piston
2. Case head
Note
This figure illustrates the disconnected case body and case head to show the
location to inspect for bubbles. Do not disconnect the case body from the case head
to confirm that there are no bubbles.
4 Reinstall the syringe by placing the syringe case into the mounting groove. Align the
syringe piston into the drive shaft.
6 Tighten the bottom fixing nut.
Replace the ISE Mix Bar

If the ISE mix bar is bent or damaged, you cannot achieve correct analysis. Replace the ISE
mix bar.
6-186 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Warning
Materials Required:
• Mix Bar
Important

buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
B71495AF 6-187
Maintenance
Procedure: Replace the ISE Mix Bar
unseat it.
1. Liquid level sensors 4. Connecting tubing

2. Mix bar 5. Shaft
3. Nozzle
3 Pull the mix bar to remove it.
Important
When removing the mix bar, hold the connecting tubing in position on the mixing
component.
4 Obtain a new mix bar.

5 Insert the new mix bar into the shaft on the mixing component. Gently push the mix bar
until it reaches the end of the shaft.
6-188 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Reinstall the Mixing Component
Important
Important
3 Perform a total prime to prime the ISE with fresh ISE Buffer Solution, ISE MID Standard
Solution, and ISE Reference Solution.
During the prime, confirm that buffer solution and MID Standard solution are correctly
dispensed into the sample pot and flow to waste without generating events. Also,
confirm that the mix bar rotates without contacting the sample pot. The mix bar makes
a mechanical noise when it contacts the sample pot.
a. Select Total Prime. The system displays the Total Prime dialog.
b. Select OK.
c. Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE
B71495AF 6-189
Maintenance
calibration.
Perform CRS Calibration (Optional)

CRS calibration is an optional function for correcting the ISE results using the certified
reference standard materials. For more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
CRS calibration is available when MCAL Factor Type is programmed to CRS Calibration in
CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > ISE.
Caution
When analysis is in process or the ISE status is Busy, do not add Standard Solutions or
place hands in the path of the sample probe.
Note
CRS Calibration requires approximately six minutes to complete.
Note
Before performing CRS Calibration, be sure to clean and calibrate the ISE first. For more
information, refer to Clean the ISE and Calibrate the ISE.
Materials Required:
• CRS Standard Solution High
• CRS Standard Solution Mid
• CRS Standard Solution Low


5 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to rotate the STAT table until the CRS-H, CRS-M,
CRS-L positions are accessible.
6 Fill a Hitachi cup with approximately 500 μL of each Standard Solution.

7 Place the Hitachi cups in the CRS-H, CRS-M, CRS-L positions on the STAT table.
6-190 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
Figure 6.106 ISE Solution Position Area
1. CRS-L 3. CRS-H
2. CRS-M
Table 6.41 CRS Standard Solution Position
CRS Standard Solution Position
CRS Standard Solution High CRS-H
CRS Standard Solution Mid CRS-M
CRS Standard Solution Low CRS-L

9 Select MAINT. > ISE Maintenance > CRS Calibration. The system displays the ISE
Maintenance: CRS Calibration tab. You can view factors A and B obtained from the 30
most recent rounds of CRS calibration.
B71495AF 6-191
Maintenance
Figure 6.107 ISE Maintenance: CRS Calibration Tab
Table 6.42 CRS Calibration Fields and Descriptions

Field Description
Date/Time Time and date when CRS calibration was performed.
Factor Factors A and B for Na, K, and Cl that were calculated from each round
of CRS calibration results.
Factor A Acceptable Range Upper and lower limits of factor A. The system highlights factors
exceeding the range in yellow.
10 Select Start. The system displays the CRS Calibration dialog.
Figure 6.108 CRS Calibration Dialog
11 Enter the concentrations of CRS Standard Solution High(H)/Mid(M)/Low(L) for Na, K,

and Cl.
12 Select OK. The system starts CRS calibration.
6-192 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
13 Confirm the results when CRS calibration is complete.

14 To view detailed data of each round, select a data item and then select Detail
Information [F5]. The system displays both measured and corrected concentrations
obtained from five replicate measurements.
15 Select OK to close the dialog.
16 Remove the Hitachi cups from the STAT table and discard.
Manually Clean the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing

Clean the sample pot tubing and bypass tubing if the sample pot tubing or bypass tubing
becomes clogged or if you obtain erroneous calibration or QC results.
Note
You can perform Replace ISE Tubing instead of performing Manually Clean the Sample
Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing procedure. For more information, refer to Replace ISE
Tubing.
Note
The sample pot tubing and bypass tubing can become clogged and cause erroneous
calibration or QC results after running the following samples:
• Large-volume dialysis patient samples
• LIH (lipemic, icteric, or hemolyzed) sample
• Serum sample that contains fibrin because centrifugal separation was not correctly
conducted
• Serum sample that contains separator material which was aspirated because the serum
volume was too low, or centrifugal separation was not correctly conducted.
Note
If the sample pot tubing or bypass tubing frequently becomes clogged, confirm that
samples are correctly prepared.
Important
B71495AF 6-193
Maintenance

buttons.
6 Select OK.

Note
Remove the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
Figure 6.109 Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
1. Sample pot 3. Sample pot tubing

2. Bypass tubing labeled 5 4. T-connector
6-194 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
5. Electrode block inlet 7. Y-connector

6. Pinch valve 8. Mixture aspiration roller pump
remove it and place it on the mixing component holder.
4 Disconnect the sample pot tubing from the sample pot by unscrewing the connector. Put
the sample pot aside.
5 Disconnect the other end of the sample pot tubing from the electrode block inlet.
6 Remove the bypass tubing labeled 5 from the top groove of the pinch valve.
7 Disconnect the bypass tubing from the Y-connector near the mixture aspiration roller
pump.
Clean the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
Materials Required:
• Freshly prepared 1% wash solution
• Deionized water
• Sonicator
• Beaker
• Squeeze bottle with disposable pipette tip or syringe with disposable pipette tip
1 Fill the sample pot tubing and bypass tubing with 1% wash solution. Use a disposable
pipette tip attached to a squeeze bottle or a syringe to fill the sample pot tubing and
bypass tubing.
1. Attach the pipette tip or syringe to either end of the sample pot tubing.
2. Force the 1% wash solution through the sample pot tubing.
3. Attach the pipette tip or syringe to the end of the bypass tubing.
4. Force the 1% wash solution through the bypass tubing.
B71495AF 6-195
Maintenance
Figure 6.110 Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
2 Submerge the sample pot tubing and bypass tubing into a beaker filled with 1% wash
solution.
3 Place the beaker in the sonicator filled with deionized water and sonicate for 10
minutes.
4 Rinse the sample pot tubing and bypass tubing with deionized water.
1. Attach the pipette tip or syringe to either end of the sample pot tubing.
2. Force deionized water through the sample pot tubing.
3. Attach the pipette tip or syringe to the end of the bypass tubing.
4. Force deionized water through the bypass tubing.
5. Confirm that the lines have been flushed thoroughly.
5 Use a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to dry the sample pot tubing and bypass
tubing before reconnecting them.
Note
If the sample pot tubing or bypass tubing remains clogged, or the system continues
to generate erroneous calibration or QC results, perform the Replace ISE Tubing
procedure. For more information, refer to Replace ISE Tubing.
Attach the Sample Pot Tubing and Bypass Tubing
1 Connect the sample pot tubing to the electrode block inlet.

2 Attach the tubing to the sample pot by screwing on the connector.
6-196 B71495AF
6
Maintenance
4 Connect the bypass tubing to the Y-connector located near the mixture aspiration roller
pump.
5 Insert the bypass tubing in the top groove of the pinch valve. Confirm that the tubing is
inserted completely into the groove.
Important
Important
Prime the Tubing
Note
4 Select OK.
5 Press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION button to start the prime. The DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
LED turns on after the prime is complete.

Log.
B71495AF 6-197
Maintenance
calibration.
6-198 B71495AF
CHAPTER 7
Flags
Flags
The system generates flags when the system encounters a condition that can affect the
result. This condition can range from minor warnings to severe errors that require
attention immediately. Review each flag and identify the root cause, and perform the
corrective action.
Do not report any result with an unresolved or unexpected flag. When in doubt, always
consider rerunning the sample analysis, and diluting or condensing the sample if necessary.
This chapter contains a list of all flags in priority order, suggestions of their cause, and
action to take.
The priority determines what flags you see if a result generates multiple flags. A maximum
of four flags can display.
Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order)

The following table summarizes the flags in alphabetical order:
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order)
Flag Definition
! Unable to calculate concentration
# Insufficient sample detected
$ Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction
% Clot detected
& Prozone test data is abnormal
( Reagent probe cleaning solution is insufficient
) Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number
used for RB/Calibration
* Linearity error in rate method
/ Test pending or not analyzed
? Unable to calculate a result
@ OD is higher than 3.0
1Q QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
2Q QC data exceeds 13s control range
4Q QC data exceeds R4s control range
6Q A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
B71495AF 7-1
Flags
Flags
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
7Q Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values
a Reagent expired
B OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range
ba No calibration data or calibration is expired
bh Reagent blank or calibration failed, and the result was calculated with historical
data
bn Mastercurve used
bz Calibration curve for Prozone data used
c Result corrected by the operator using data correction
d QC result is excluded by operator
D OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range
e Data edited by the operator
E Error in reaction rate for rate assay
F Result is higher than the analytical measuring range
fh Result is higher than the reflex limit
fl Result is lower than the reflex limit
Fx Result (OD) is higher than the analytical measuring range
G Result is lower than the analytical measuring range
Gx Result (OD) is lower than the analytical measuring range
h Result may be affected by hemolysis
H Result is higher than reference interval
i Result may be affected by icterus
J Result is higher than the rerun decision limit
K Result is lower than the rerun decision limit
l Result may be affected by lipemia
L Result is lower than reference interval
M Duplicate sample ID
n LIH test not performed
N Negative
P Positive
ph Result is higher than the high critical limit
pl Result is lower than the low critical limit
R Insufficient reagent detected
7-2 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flags
Table 7.1 Summary of Flags (Alphabetical Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
r Result has been transferred to Laboratory Information System through online
communication
S First-run result replaced by rerun result
T Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check
Tx Result of T-Hb or A1c is outside the analytical measuring range
U Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
u OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is low
Va Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range
Wa Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette
xQ Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other control sample
Y Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
y OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is high
Z Prozone error
Summary of Flags (Priority Order)

The following table summarizes the flags in priority order:
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order)
Flag Definition
d QC result is excluded by operator
e Data edited by the operator
( Reagent probe cleaning solution is insufficient
Wa Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette
R Insufficient reagent detected
# Insufficient sample detected
% Clot detected
? Unable to calculate a result
M Duplicate sample ID
n LIH test not performed
l Result may be affected by lipemia
i Result may be affected by icterus
h Result may be affected by hemolysis
Y Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
U Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
B71495AF 7-3
Flags
Flags
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
y OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is high
u OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is low
@ OD is higher than 3.0
$ Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction
D OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range
B OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range
* Linearity error in rate method
& Prozone test data is abnormal
Z Prozone error
E Error in reaction rate for rate assay
Fx Result (OD) is higher than the analytical measuring range
Gx Result (OD) is lower than the analytical measuring range
! Unable to calculate concentration
) Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number
used for RB/Calibration
a Reagent expired
ba No calibration data or calibration is expired
bh Reagent blank or calibration failed, and the result was calculated with historical
data
bn Mastercurve used
bz Calibration curve for Prozone data used
F Result is higher than the analytical measuring range
G Result is lower than the analytical measuring range
Tx Result of T-Hb or A1c is outside the analytical measuring range
ph Result is higher than the high critical limit
pl Result is lower than the low critical limit
T Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check
P Positive
N Negative
H Result is higher than reference interval
L Result is lower than reference interval
J Result is higher than the rerun decision limit
K Result is lower than the rerun decision limit
fh Result is higher than the reflex limit
7-4 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
Table 7.2 Summary of Flags (Priority Order) (Continued)

Flag Definition
fl Result is lower than the reflex limit
Va Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range
xQ Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other control sample
1Q QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
4Q QC data exceeds R4s control range
6Q A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
7Q Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values
S First-run result replaced by rerun result
/ Test pending or not analyzed
r Result has been transferred to Laboratory Information System through online
communication
c Result corrected by the operator using data correction
Flag Details
d: QC result is excluded by operator

Possible Cause Corrective Action
QC data has been manually excluded from No action required.
calculation by the operator. This flag is applied in
QC > Chart > Data Review. For more
information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Important
Manual.
Before excluding any QC data,
investigate and record the cause of
the result with the flag. Follow your
laboratory procedure.
B71495AF 7-5
Flags
Flag Details
e: Data edited by the operator

Data has been edited. For more information, refer No action required.
to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
Important
Before reporting results, review any

edited or changed data carefully.
(: Reagent probe cleaning solution is insufficient

One or more cleaning solutions programmed in the
1. Fill the cleaning solution bottles.
Contamination Parameters screen in Positions 62
and 63 for R1 and 49 and 50 for R2 are empty. 2. Perform a reagent check on the cleaning
Contamination parameters are suspended for the solution bottles. For more information, refer
related cleaning solution. Carryover might have to Monitor the Reagent Status.
occurred on tests that have this flag.
3. Rerun analysis for the flagged tests.
Wa: Test has been analyzed with an erroneous cuvette

The test has been analyzed using a cuvette which
1. Clean the affected cuvette and perform a
failed photocal criteria.
photocal. For more information, refer to Clean
or Replace Individual Cuvettes and Perform a
Photocal.
2. If the error still occurs, replace the cuvette.
For more information, refer to Clean or
3. Rerun analysis.
7-6 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
R: Insufficient reagent detected

Level detection indicates reagent volume not
1. Review all results generated immediately
sufficient for analysis.
before this flag for consistency and validity (in
particular the low or high results), and rerun
analysis if necessary.
2. Place new reagent onto the system and rerun
analysis.
3. If the flag occurs even though there is
sufficient reagent, the reagent bottle can
contain bubbles. Remove the bubbles and
perform another reagent check.
4. Dry the reagent bottle opening if it is wet.
Inspect the reagent probe, and clean or
replace as required. For more information,
refer to Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent
Probes, and Mix Bars, Clean the Sample Probe
Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and
Whole Blood Wash Well, and Replace a
Sample or Reagent Probe.
5. Confirm that the reagent probe is correctly
installed and connected.
#: Insufficient sample detected

The sample probe cannot detect sufficient sample
1. Review all other results that were generated
volume.
on the same sample before generating the flag
• Insufficient sample volume. to confirm validity and consistency (no
• Malfunction of the sample level detection extremely low or high values).
system. 2. Wipe the probe with an alcohol prep pad (70%
• Inappropriate sample cup or tube. Isopropyl alcohol) and inspect the probe to
confirm that it is installed and connected
correctly. For more information, refer to
Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent Probes,
and Mix Bars.
3. Replace the sample probe. For more
information, refer to Replace a Sample or
Reagent Probe.
4. Add more sample to the sample cup, and
rerun the test.
5. Confirm that the correct sample cup or tube is
in use. For more information, refer to Cups or
Tubes Specifications.
B71495AF 7-7
Flags
Flag Details
%: Clot detected
The sample probe is blocked or partially blocked
1. Review all other results that were generated
during sample aspiration.
on the same sample before generating the flag
to confirm validity and consistency (no
extremely low or high values).
2. Confirm that the sample is free of clots, and
remove any that are in the sample. If
necessary, centrifuge the sample and rerun
analysis.
3. If the error still occurs, clean or replace the
sample probe. For more information, refer to
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars or
Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
?: Unable to calculate a result

A result cannot be calculated for this sample
1. If the sample has a high concentration, the
because:
sample can be severely lipemic, icteric,
• In a rate reaction, fewer than three hemolytic or can contain excessively large
photometric readings satisfy the test criteria concentration of the analyte being tested.
specified in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
Methods > General. 2. Confirm the reagent condition.
• Outside of cuvette walls or the cuvette wheel
is wet. 3. The system generates a flag or event
• A mechanical error has occurred. identifying the malfunction. Select EVENT for
a description of the event and corrective
actions. When the problem is solved, rerun
analysis. If the issue persists, contact Beckman
Coulter.
4. Analyze the reaction data including the
reaction data processed immediately before
and after the flagged result. In the presence of
any abnormality, inspect the cuvettes and
cuvette wheel for a possible overflow. If the
cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
corrective actions. For more information, refer
to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow
and Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wheel.
5. If the DxC 700 AU connects to a laboratory
automation system, confirm that the system
does not have any errors. If the issue persists,
7-8 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
M: Duplicate sample ID
A duplicate sample ID has been read within the
1. Confirm that the results of the samples with
samples in process.
the duplicate sample ID are correct.
2. Follow laboratory procedure.
n: LIH test not performed

The LIH test has not been performed for tests with
1. Examine the sample and rerun if necessary.
LIH Influence Check set to Yes in CONFIG. >
Test Volume and Methods > General. 2. Confirm the LIH reagent.
l: Result may be affected by lipemia

The result may be affected by lipemia or samples Follow laboratory procedure for lipemic samples.
are turbid.
i: Result may be affected by icterus

The result may be affected by bilirubin. Follow laboratory procedure for icteric samples.
h: Result may be affected by hemolysis

The result may be affected by hemolysis. Follow laboratory procedure for hemolytic
samples.
B71495AF 7-9
Flags
Flag Details
Y: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the high limit set at the last photometric read point
Reagent blank OD is higher than the Reagent OD
1. Inspect the reagent expiration and onboard
Limit range defined for the last photometric point.
The Reagent OD Limit range is programmed in expiration date.
CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > 2. Confirm that the reagent has been prepared
General. correctly.
3. Replace the reagent and rerun analysis.
Possible causes for this problem are:
4. Confirm that the Reagent OD Limit range
• Reagent expired. programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and
• Reagent contamination. Methods > General is correct.
• Incorrectly prepared reagents.
• Incorrect range programmed.
U: Reagent Blank OD exceeds the lower limit set at the last photometric read point
Reagent blank OD is lower than the Reagent OD
Limit range defined for the last photometric point.
The Reagent OD Limit range is programmed in expiration date.
CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > 2. Confirm that the reagent has been prepared
General. correctly.
3. Replace the reagent and rerun analysis.
Possible causes for this problem are:
4. Confirm that the Reagent OD Limit range
• Reagent expired. programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and
• Reagent contamination. Methods > General is correct.
y: OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is high
The first photometric point OD of the reagent
blank or the OD at P0 of patient sample is higher
than the Reagent OD Limit range defined for the expiration date.
first photometric point. Reagent OD Limit is 2. Confirm that the reagent has been prepared
programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and correctly.
Methods > General. 3. Replace the reagent and rerun analysis.
Possible causes for this problem are: 4. Confirm that the Reagent OD Limit range
programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and
• Reagent expired.
Methods > General is correct.
• Reagent contamination.
7-10 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
u: OD at the first photometric point for reagent blank or patient sample is low
The first photometric point OD of the reagent
blank or the OD at P0 of patient sample is lower
than the Reagent OD Limit range defined for the expiration date.
first photometric point. The Reagent OD Limit 2. Confirm that the reagent has been prepared
range is programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume correctly.
and Methods > General. 3. Replace the reagent and rerun analysis.
Possible causes for this problem are: 4. Confirm that the Reagent OD Limit range
programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and
• Reagent expired.
Methods > General is correct.
• Reagent contamination.
@: OD is higher than 3.0

An abnormally high value. A reaction OD has
1. Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
exceeded 3.0. In a dual wavelength measurement,
an error occurs if either of the two wavelengths 2. Perform a photocal to assess the condition of
exceed 3.0 OD. the lamp. Replace the lamp if the results are
out of range. For more information, refer to
This error occurs if one of the following three Perform a Photocal or Replace the
conditions is met: Photometer Lamp.
• Primary wavelength is over the limit (3.0) 3. Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not wet. If
• Secondary wavelength is over the limit (3.0) the cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
• Reaction wavelength is over the limit (3.0) corrective actions. For more information, refer
This error only occurs on END or FIXED reaction and Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
methods, not on RATE reaction methods. Wheel.
• Sample quality. The sample is severely
lipemic, icteric, hemolytic or can contain
excessively large concentration of the analyte
being tested.
• Faulty photometer lamp.
• Cuvette overflow.
B71495AF 7-11
Flags
Flag Details
$: Not enough data to determine linearity of reaction

Fewer than three read points of a RATE reaction
1. If the sample has a high concentration, the
are within the acceptable optical density range
specified. To calculate a RATE reaction correctly, a sample can be severely lipemic, icteric,
minimum of three readings must be taken before hemolytic or can contain excessively large
reaching maximum or minimum optical density. If concentration of the analyte being tested.
these optical density limits are exceeded, the Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
reaction might go into substrate depletion caused 2. Confirm that the probes and syringes are
by a high concentration or a problem with the functioning correctly. For more information,
condition of the reagent. Linearity calculations are
refer to Inspect the Syringes for Leaks and
not made when this flag occurs.
and Mix Bars.
Wheel.
7-12 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
D: OD of reaction is higher than the maximum OD range

The OD of a RATE or FIXED reaction cannot meet
• If this flag is only generated on one or a few
the maximum OD criteria programmed in OD Limit
samples, inspect the sample quality:
in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods >
General. — If the sample has a high concentration,
the sample can be severely lipemic,
• A specified read point FST+2 (first icteric, hemolytic or can contain
photometry point plus two) in a positive RATE excessively large concentration of the
reaction method: High concentration. analyte being tested. Dilute the sample
• A specified read point LST-2 (last photometry and rerun analysis.
point minus two) in a negative RATE reaction — If the sample has a low concentration,
method: Low concentration. no reaction occurs in the cuvette.
• A photometry read point in a positive FIXED Confirm that there is enough sample
reaction method: High concentration. volume in the tube.
• A photometry read point in a negative FIXED • If this flag is only generated on one reagent,
reaction method: Low concentration. inspect the reagent quality and for reagent
contamination:
— Inspect the reagent expiration, on-board

expiration, and reagent blank expiration.
— Confirm that the reagent was prepared
correctly.
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the
correct position.
• If this flag is generated randomly on several
samples and several different tests:
— Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not

wet. If the cuvette wheel is wet,
perform appropriate corrective actions.
For more information, refer to
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel
Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wheel.
— Perform a photocal to assess the
condition of the lamp. Replace the lamp
if the results are out of range. For more
information, refer to Perform a Photocal
or Replace the Photometer Lamp.
B71495AF 7-13
Flags
Flag Details
B: OD of reaction is lower than the minimum OD range

The OD of a RATE or FIXED reaction cannot meet
• If this flag is only generated on one or a few
the minimum OD criteria programmed in OD Limit
samples, inspect the sample quality:
in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods >
General. — If the sample has a high concentration,
the sample can be severely lipemic,
• A specified read point FST+2 (first icteric, hemolytic or can contain
photometry point plus two) in a negative excessively large concentration of the
RATE reaction method: High concentration. analyte being tested. Dilute the sample
• A photometry read point in a negative FIXED and rerun analysis.
reaction method: High concentration. — If the sample has a low concentration,
• A photometry read point in a positive FIXED no reaction occurs in the cuvette.
reaction method: Low concentration. Confirm that there is enough sample
volume in the tube.
• If this flag is only generated on one reagent,
inspect the reagent quality and for reagent
contamination:
— Inspect the reagent expiration, on-board

expiration, and reagent blank expiration.
— Confirm that the reagent was prepared
correctly.
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the
correct position.
• If this flag is generated randomly on several
samples and several different tests:
— Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not

wet. If the cuvette wheel is wet,
perform appropriate corrective actions.
For more information, refer to
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel
Overflow and Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wheel.
— Perform a photocal to assess the
condition of the lamp. Replace the lamp
if the results are out of range. For more
information, refer to Perform a Photocal
or Replace the Photometer Lamp.
7-14 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
*: Linearity error in rate method

The system generates the * flag when the rate of a
1. Dilute the sample and rerun analysis or
reaction varies by more than the defined %
perform a diluted rerun.
variance, as defined in CONFIG. > Test Volume
and Methods > General and is therefore 2. Replace a reagent if you suspect
deemed non-linear, or the reverse reaction check contamination, or if the reagent is expired or
on a RATE reaction method fails. onboard expired.
• Unusually high result. 3. Clean all mix bars and inspect them for
• Contaminated reagent. damage. For more information, refer to
• Dirty or defective mix bars.
and Mix Bars. Replace any that have scratches
• Reagent or sample probe alignment problem.
or chips in the fluororesin coating. For more
• Outer cuvette walls or the cuvette wheel is
information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
wet.
• Defective cuvettes. 4. Confirm that the sample probe and reagent
• Deteriorated lamp. probe alignment. If the probe is bent, replace
the probe. For more information, refer to
• The concentration is close to zero for
toxicology analysis using the RATE reaction Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
method. 5. Confirm that the cuvette wheel is not wet. If
the cuvette wheel is wet, perform appropriate
Wheel.
6. Perform a photocal to assess the lamp and
cuvette integrity. Replace the lamp or cuvettes
as required and perform another photocal. For
more information, refer to Replace the
Photometer Lamp, Clean or Replace Individual
Cuvettes or Perform a Photocal.
7. No action required. If the method is RATE, the
reverse reaction check is performed. If the
concentration is close to zero, the reaction
curve is flat and triggers the * flag. Confirm
that there is no other cause for the * flag
before reporting the result.
&: Prozone test data is abnormal

The data for prozone judgement is abnormal. Dilute the sample and rerun analysis. If the issue
persists, contact Beckman Coulter.
B71495AF 7-15
Flags
Flag Details
Z: Prozone error
One of the mathematical logic checks in CONFIG. Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
> Data Check Parameters failed. This is often
caused by an abnormally high concentration of
analyte in a sample.
E: Error in reaction rate for rate assay

In the rate assay, the result is judged as an error Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
because the reaction was finished in an excessively
short time.
• An abnormally high concentration of analyte

in a sample.
Fx: Result (OD) is higher than the analytical measuring range

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of Dilute the sample and rerun analysis.
the sample exceeded the OD of the upper limit of
the analytical measuring range.
Gx: Result (OD) is lower than the analytical measuring range

No concentration could be calculated. The OD of
1. Review the result in the clinical context of the
the sample is lower than the OD of the low limit of
the analytical measuring range. patient and rerun if necessary.
2. Confirm the correct operation of the reagent
probes.
3. Confirm that the reagent bottles are in the
correct position.
4. Inspect the reagents for bubbles.
7-16 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
!: Unable to calculate concentration

The system has failed to calculate a result.
1. If the flag is a single sample issue, rerun and
dilute if necessary.
2. If multiple samples are affected, review all
operating parameters such as:
— Reagent quality
— Calibration
— Sample integrity
— General system issues
Wheel.
4. If the flag is generated on Na, K, or Cl, rerun a
sufficient number of samples which preceded
the appearance of the ! flag in order to
confirm that the system did not report
incorrect results. It is possible that air in the
flow cell affected samples before the system
generated the ! flag.
— To ensure that there are no obstructions

in the flow cell, perform a MID/REF
Prime and confirm that no bubbles are in
the tubing at the bottom of the flow cell.
— Confirm that all tubing is connected
correctly.
B71495AF 7-17
Flags
Flag Details
): Reagent lot number used for sample analysis is different from the lot number used for RB/
Calibration
The reagent lot number does not match the
1. Calibrate the reagent used for the test that
calibrated reagent lot number.
generated the flag.
2. Calculate the results manually by selecting
RESULT > Sample Manager > Main. Select
Recalculate Data [F5].
3. Perform a QC.
a: Reagent expired
The reagent has either expired or has been on Replace the reagents and perform a reagent check
board beyond the period defined in CONFIG. > and a calibration if necessary.
Test Volume and Methods.
ba: No calibration data or calibration is expired

No reagent blank or calibration data, or the data is
1. Perform a calibration. For more information,
expired.
refer to Calibrate Tests.
2. Review calibration in MENU > Calibration >
Calibration Monitor.
3. Carefully review any results generated with
this flag and rerun if necessary.
bh: Reagent blank or calibration failed, and the result was calculated with historical data
Reagent blank or calibration failed, and the result
was calculated with historical data. Results can be
erroneous and must not be reported. refer to Calibrate Tests.
2. Review calibration in MENU > Calibration >
Calibration Monitor.
3. Rerun samples using a valid calibration.
7-18 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
bn: Mastercurve used

Calibration has either not been performed, or was
not successful. The system has used the master
curve to generate the result. Review calibration in refer to Calibrate Tests.
MENU > Calibration > Calibration Monitor. 2. Rerun samples using a valid calibration.
Results can be erroneous and must not be

reported.
bz: Calibration curve for Prozone data used

The system has used a calibration curve affected by Carefully review any results generated with this
prozone to generate the result, and the result is flag and rerun analysis with dilution.
invalid. Only use the result as a reference to
estimate the dilution rate for rerun analysis.
F: Result is higher than the analytical measuring range

The concentration of the sample is above the
1. Confirm that the correct analytical measuring
analytical measuring range high limit, programmed
in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > range is programmed in CONFIG. > Test
General. Volume and Methods > General.
2. Dilute the sample and rerun analysis. Dilute
samples so that they yield a value in the
middle of the analytical measuring range.
G: Result is lower than the analytical measuring range

The concentration of the sample is below the
1. Confirm that the correct analytical measuring
analytical measuring range low limit, programmed
in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > range is programmed in CONFIG. > Test
General, or the reagent was not dispensed Volume and Methods > General.
correctly. 2. Review the result in the clinical context of the
patient and rerun if necessary.
• Incorrect analytical measuring range is
programmed. 3. Confirm the correct operation of the reagent
• The clinical context of the patient. probes.
• Insufficient reagent dispensing. 4. Confirm that the reagent bottles are in the
• Insufficient sample dispensing. correct position.
5. Inspect the reagents for bubbles.
B71495AF 7-19
Flags
Flag Details
Tx: Result of T-Hb or A1c is outside the analytical measuring range

The result of T-Hb or A1c is outside the analytical
1. Rerun analysis.
measuring range programmed in CONFIG. > Test
Volume and Methods > HbA1c. 2. If the result is confirmed, report according to
the reagent Instructions for Use.
For whole blood samples, remix the whole blood

and repeat the analysis.
ph: Result is higher than the high critical limit

The result is higher than the high critical limit. The This flag denotes that the result exceeded the
high critical limit is programmed in CONFIG. > operator-defined high critical limit. Follow
Test Volume and Methods > Range. laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
pl: Result is lower than the low critical limit

The result is lower than the low critical limit. The This flag denotes that the result exceeded the
low critical limit is programmed in CONFIG. > Test operator-defined low critical limit. Follow
Volume and Methods > Range. laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
T: Abnormality found in inter-chemistry check

A result exceeds the range specified in CONFIG. >
1. Rerun analysis.
Checked Tests.
2. Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal
results.
P: Positive
Qualitative result: Sample result exceeds the upper Follow laboratory procedure.
value. The upper value is programmed in CONFIG.
> Test Volume and Methods > Range. Select
Flag in the Value/Flag to enable programming in
the Level High field. Results over the Level High
generate the P flag.
7-20 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
N: Negative
Qualitative result: Sample result is lower than the Follow laboratory procedure.
low value. The low value is programmed in
CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > Range.
Select Flag in the Value/Flag to enable
programming in the Level Low field. Results
under the Level Low generate the N flag.
H: Result is higher than reference interval

Sample result is higher than the high value Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
programmed in Specific Ranges in CONFIG. > Test
Volume and Methods > Range. For more
information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference
Manual.
L: Result is lower than reference interval

Sample result is lower than the low value Follow laboratory procedure for abnormal results.
programmed in Specific Ranges in CONFIG. > Test
Volume and Methods > Range. For more
information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference
Manual.
J: Result is higher than the rerun decision limit

The result is higher than the rerun decision limit. Follow laboratory procedure.
The rerun decision limit is programmed in
CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters.
K: Result is lower than the rerun decision limit

The result is lower than the rerun decision limit. Follow laboratory procedure.
The rerun decision limit is programmed in
CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters.
B71495AF 7-21
Flags
Flag Details
fh: Result is higher than the reflex limit

The result is higher than the operator specified Follow laboratory procedure.
reflex limit, programmed in CONFIG. > Rerun
Check Parameters.
fl: Result is lower than the reflex limit

The result is lower than the operator specified Follow laboratory procedure.
reflex limit, programmed in CONFIG. > Rerun
Check Parameters.
Va: Deviation of multiple measurements check is out of range

The precision of replicates for the reagent blank or
1. Perform the corresponding maintenance:
calibration exceeds the allowable range
programmed in Allowable Range Check in — Inspect the syringes. For more
CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > General. information, refer to Inspect the Syringes
for Leaks.
— Inspect the sample probe. For more
information, refer to Inspect the Sample
Probe, Reagent Probes, and Mix Bars.
2. Confirm the correct sample material was used
for the reagent blank or calibration.
3. Inspect for evidence of system contamination.
xQ: Multi-rule QC has detected failure on the other control sample

If one of two control samples processed in pairs If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
falls out of range using QC Multi-rules, the other investigate the cause before deciding whether to
control sample result is flagged. The range is report patient results. If any trends or sudden
programmed in CONFIG. > QC Setup. For more shifts in values are detected, review all operating
information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Manual. of-range QC results such as:
• Rerun with fresh control samples.

• Perform calibration as required.
• Perform maintenance as required.
7-22 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
1Q: QC data exceeds the range entered in Single Check Level field
One point of QC data exceeds the SD defined in If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
the Single Check Level in CONFIG. > QC Setup > investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Check. For more information, refer to the DxC 700 report patient results. If any trends or sudden
AU Reference Manual. shifts in values are detected, review all operating
parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
of-range QC results such as:

2Q: QC data exceeds 13s control range

One point of QC data exceeds the ±3SD limit If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
defined in the Multi Check Level in CONFIG. > QC investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Setup > Check. For more information, refer to the report patient results. If any trends or sudden
DxC 700 AU Reference Manual. shifts in values are detected, review all operating
parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-


Two contiguous QC data points exceed the ±2SD If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
limit in the same direction. The data points are investigate the cause before deciding whether to
programmed in Multi Check Level in CONFIG. > report patient results. If any trends or sudden
QC Setup > Check. For more information, refer to shifts in values are detected, review all operating
the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual. parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-

B71495AF 7-23
Flags
Flag Details
4Q: QC data exceeds R4s control range

One of the two consecutive high and low If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
concentration QC data points exceeds the +2SD investigate the cause before deciding whether to
limit and the other exceeds the -2SD limit, or the report patient results. If any trends or sudden
difference between the two control samples shifts in values are detected, review all operating
exceeds 4 SD. The QC rule is selected in Multi parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Check Level in CONFIG. > QC Setup > Check. For of-range QC results such as:
more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU
Reference Manual. • Rerun with fresh control samples.

Four consecutive QC data point results have If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
exceeded the 1SD limit. The QC rule is selected in investigate the cause before deciding whether to
Multi Check Level in CONFIG. > QC Setup > report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check. For more information, refer to the DxC 700 shifts in values are detected, review all operating
AU Reference Manual. parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-

6Q: A preset number of consecutive QC results fall on one side of the mean
Results for a preset number (7 to 10) of If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
consecutive data points fall either above or below investigate the cause before deciding whether to
the mean. The setting is programmed in Multi report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check Level in CONFIG. > QC Setup > Check. For shifts in values are detected, review all operating
more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Reference Manual. of-range QC results such as:

7-24 B71495AF
7
Flags
Flag Details
7Q: Consecutive QC results show steadily increasing or decreasing values

Results for a preset number (4 to 10) of If QC results fall outside the acceptable range,
consecutive data points are increasing or investigate the cause before deciding whether to
decreasing. The setting is programmed in Multi report patient results. If any trends or sudden
Check Level in CONFIG. > QC Setup > Check. For shifts in values are detected, review all operating
more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU parameters. Follow laboratory procedure for out-
Reference Manual. of-range QC results such as:

S: First-run result replaced by rerun result

A test has been rerun and this rerun result has No action required.
replaced the first-run result to become the final
result.
/: Test pending or not analyzed

The test was not performed, even though it was Review all results generated immediately before
ordered (generally because a reagent bottle is this flag for consistency and validity (especially low
empty), or the testing is still in process. or high results) and rerun if necessary.
1. If the reagent is empty, place new reagent

onto the system and rerun analysis.
2. Confirm that fixed reagents are in the correct
position.
3. Inspect the reagent probe and clean or
replace as required. For more information,
refer to Inspect the Sample Probe, Reagent
Probes, and Mix Bars or Replace a Sample or
Reagent Probe.
4. Confirm that the reagent probe is correctly
installed and connected.
r: Result has been transferred to Laboratory Information System through online communication
Result transferred to the Laboratory Information No action required.
System.
B71495AF 7-25
Flags
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of Final Result Flowchart
c: Result corrected by the operator using data correction

Result corrected by the operator using data Follow laboratory procedure. Review any edited or
correction. For more information, refer to the DxC changed data carefully before reporting.
700 AU Reference Manual.
Application of Flags (F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N) During Calculation of Final Result

Flowchart
This flowchart shows the calculations that occur to obtain the final concentration result,
and when the system applies the flags.
Figure 7.1 Application of F, G, p, J, K, H, L, P, and N flags
Beckman Coulter programs Manufacturer Factor, and the system displays the setting in
CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods. A is a multiplication factor and B is an addition and
subtraction factor.
If you manually diluted the sample, enter the dilution rate in Sample Dilution Rate in TEST >
Rack (Patient) > Test Order or TEST > STAT (Patient) > Test Order.
The concentration is corrected using Pre-Dilution Rate defined in CONFIG. > Test Volume and
Methods (for first run) or in CONFIG. > Rerun Test Parameters (for rerun).
7-26 B71495AF
7
Flags
The concentration is also corrected for the sample and reagent volumes defined in Test
Volume and Methods (for first run) or in Rerun Test Parameters (for rerun).
The Correlation Factor is programmed in Test Volume and Methods. A is a multiplication

factor and B is an addition or subtraction factor.
Figure 7.2 Examples with F flag: Analytical Measuring Range is 1 to 500
Example 1
The concentration of this sample fell within the analytical measuring range and neither G
nor F flag was generated. The final result became 300.
Example 2
The concentration of this sample fell within the analytical measuring range and neither F
nor G flag was generated. The final result became 600 after the concentration was
multiplied by the sample dilution rate of 2.
Example 3
The concentration of this sample exceeded the upper limit of the analytical measuring
range and an F flag was generated. The final result became 300F after the concentration
was corrected with the correlation factor A of 0.5.
B71495AF 7-27
Flags
7-28 B71495AF
CHAPTER 8
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Regular preventative maintenance is essential for optimum system performance. Many
problems outlined in this chapter are caused by neglecting to perform preventative
maintenance and required care.
For each aspect of troubleshooting, you can find useful information by referring to the
corresponding section of the maintenance chapter.
For more information, refer to Maintenance.
Reagent Blank Data
1 Review printout and look for any flags.

2 Review the Event Log for RB Data Error events.
3 A reagent blank is a confirmation of the reagent system.

The reagent system includes reagents, the reagent probes, and the reagent syringes.
4 Review reagent blank data in MENU > Calibration > Calibration Monitor > RB History and
RB Detail.
Calibration Data
1 Select EVENT to review the Event Log for any calibration events.
2 Review the printout.

3 Look at the precision of the replicates for each test.
The OD readings will have a similar value if the precision is good.
4 Look for separation between calibrators for a multi-point calibration.

5 Calibration is a confirmation of the sampling system.
The sampling system includes calibrators, the sample probe, the sample syringe, and
the wash syringe.
6 If calibration replicates are 0 or close to 0, the problem can be:

— Wrong calibrator used
— Sample did not dispense into cuvette (probe or syringe problem)
— Reagent
7 Review calibration data in MENU > Calibration > Calibration Monitor > Calibration History
and Calibration Detail.
B71495AF 8-1
Troubleshooting
QC Data
QC Data
1 Select EVENT to review the Event Log for QC events.
2 Review the printout for QC flags 1Q to 7Q.

3 Review the daily QC charts:
— QC validates calibration.
— If all QC is increasing or decreasing (one direction only), the QC problem can be
related to the calibration factor and indicates calibration problems.
— If you perform QC on multiple tests from the same control sample, but QC is only
out of range for a specific test, confirm the QC test parameters, reagent, and
calibration.
— If tests from only one level of QC are out of range, confirm that you put the correct
control sample into the cup.
4 Rerun with fresh control samples.
Troubleshooting Reagents, Calibrators, Control Samples, and Patient Samples
Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions

• Inspect the reagent system including the reagents, the reagent probes, and the reagent
syringes. For more information, refer to Reagent Blank Corrective Actions.
• Review the printout and look for flags.
— Flag u or y if the RB data of the first read point of the test fails.
— Flag U or Y if the RB data of the last read point of the test fails.
— Limits are programmed in CONFIG. > Test Volume and Methods > General.
— Select EVENT to review the Event Log for RB Data Error events that the system
generates if the reagent blank fails.
Reagent Blank Corrective Actions

• Reagent
— Inspect the reagent expiration date.
— Inspect the reagent onboard expiration date.
— Confirm the correct reagent preparation.
— Confirm that fixed reagents are in the correct position.
— Put on a new bottle of reagent and perform a reagent blank or calibration.
— Confirm that a reagent with a bar code label is not in a position fixed for a different
test.
• Reagent Probes
8-2 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
— Inspect the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Inspect the Sample
— Clean the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Clean the R1 or R2
Reagent Probes.
— Clean the reagent probe wash wells. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and Whole Blood Wash Well.
— Replace the reagent probes. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample or
Reagent Probe.
• Reagent Syringes
— Inspect the reagent syringes. For more information, refer to Inspect the Syringes
for Leaks.
— Replace the reagent syringes. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample
Syringe or Reagent Syringe.
Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions

• Inspect the sampling system including the calibrators, the sample probe, the sample
syringe, and the wash syringe. For more information, refer to Calibration Corrective
Actions.
• Select EVENT to review the Event Log and printout:
— If the calibration factor range programmed in CONFIG. > Calibration Setup >
General is exceeded, the system generates Calibration Factor Exceeded
Range/Fell Below Range and Calibration Error events.
— Inspect for precision of the OD replicates on the printout.
— Confirm that the OD is not zero, which can indicate the calibrator was not
aspirated.
Calibration Corrective Actions

• Calibrator
— Confirm that the correct calibrator was poured for the calibration.
— Confirm the integrity of the calibrator (expiration date, open-bottle stability, time
at room temperature, and contamination).
— Confirm that the calibrator is in the correct position in the yellow rack.
— Confirm that the calibrator lot number in use and lot number concentration
programmed in CONFIG. > Calibration Setup > Calibrators are the same.
• Sample Probe
— Inspect the sample probe. For more information, refer to Inspect the Sample
— Clean the sample probe. For more information, refer to Clean the Sample Probe
and Mix Bars.
— Clean the sample probe wash wells. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and Whole Blood Wash Well.
— Replace the sample probe. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample or
Reagent Probe.
• Sample Syringe and Wash Syringe
— Inspect the sample syringe and wash syringe. For more information, refer to
Inspect the Syringes for Leaks.
B71495AF 8-3
Troubleshooting
— Replace the sample syringe and wash syringe. For more information, refer to
Replace the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe.
QC Related Issues and Corrective Actions

• Perform QC on the system to validate the calibration. Inspect for a reagent, calibration,
or QC issue. For more information, refer to Corrective Actions.
— Reagent problem
— Calibrator problem
— QC problem
• Select EVENT to review the Event Log and printout:
— The system generates a QC Data Range Exceeded Upper Control Limit/
Fell Below Lower Control Limit event if the QC range programmed in
CONFIG. > QC Setup > Controls is exceeded.
— Review the printout for QC flags 1Q to 7Q.
Corrective Actions
• Review all Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions.
• Review all Calibration Issues and Corrective Actions.
• Confirm the control sample:
— Confirm that the correct control sample was poured for the QC analysis.
— Confirm the integrity of the control sample: preparation (if required), expiration
date, open-bottle stability, time at room temperature, and contamination.
— Confirm that the control sample was placed in the correct position in the green
rack.
— Confirm that the lot number of the control sample in use and range programmed
in CONFIG. > QC Setup > Controls are correct.
— Rerun with fresh control samples.
Sample Related Issues

The following two items cause most data problems:
• Sample evaporation - Sample evaporation can cause unusually high results. Store
samples correctly, and keep sample caps closed tightly if you need to store them for a
short period before analysis.
• Incorrect sample handling - Refer to the reagent Instructions for Use to find the correct
procedures for sample collection, handling, and storage.
Note the following sample requirements:
• This system analyzes serum, urine, plasma, other sample types, and whole blood (for
HbA1c only). If problems are encountered when analyzing a specific test, or when
using a specific reagent, refer to the relevant reagent IFU or contact Beckman Coulter.
• Use serum or plasma that is adequately separated from cells, and urine that is free of
suspended matter, to prevent the sample probe from becoming blocked, and adversely
affecting analysis.
• Confirm that blood samples are sufficiently coagulated before serum separation.
Remove any suspended fibrin before placing serum on the system.
8-4 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
• If there is any suspended matter present in urine to be tested, centrifuge the sample
before testing.
• If a sample requires pretreatment depending on the analysis test, refer to the relevant
reagent IFU.
• A minimum quantity of sample is required for analysis. Confirm that a sufficient
quantity of sample is available for analysis. For more information, refer to Sample
Preparation.
• Do not fill cups or tubes up to the rim with sample. If you overfill cups or tubes, sample
may splash during rack transport and lead to rack jams.
• To prevent sample evaporation, do not leave samples uncovered for an extended time.
Evaporation can cause biased results.
• Bubbles on the surface of samples, control samples, and calibrators, can cause level
sensing problems or erroneous results. Confirm that all bubbles are removed from the
surface of the sample before placing onto the system.
• Confirm that the sample cups are placed correctly on the racks and the racks are placed
correctly on the rack input area. For more information, refer to Place the Sample Cups
or Tubes in the Rack.
• Inspect the serum for the extent of hemolysis, lipemia, bilirubin, and other sample
quality issues according to your laboratory procedure.
• If the sample has evaporated or deteriorated, or if the control sample was incorrectly
prepared, obtain a new sample or correctly prepare the control sample and rerun
analysis.
• Precautions when using whole blood (HbA1c):
— Clean the outside of the sample probe with an alcohol prep (70% Isopropyl
alcohol) as required to remove coagulated blood adhering to the outside of the
sample probe. Coagulated blood causes increased water being carried on the
outside of the sample probe.
— If the blood has coagulated, obtain a new sample.
— If the blood cells have precipitated, mix the whole blood by inverting gently.
Wash Solution Related Issues

Wash solution is the only approved detergent for use on the system. Confirm that wash
solution is in the wash solution tank. If it seems like there is contamination in the diluted
wash solution tank, or the diluted wash solution does not seem like it is being used on the
system, contact Beckman Coulter.
Deionized Water Related Issues

• Confirm the deionized water supply source for the analyzer does not require service.
• If the deionized water tank is contaminated, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
• If the deionized water filter is dirty, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized
Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
Items in Common on the DxC 700 AU that can Aid in Troubleshooting

If you do not perform scheduled maintenance or maintenance is overdue, abnormal data
can result. Perform all scheduled maintenance along with regular preventative
maintenance. For more information, refer to Maintenance.
B71495AF 8-5
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
• Incoming water quality (purity, temperature, and conductivity) and environment

(temperature, humidity, exposure to sunlight and so on) can affect the analysis results.
For water quality, suspect bacterial contamination if you see imprecision related to
enzymes, CO2, ethanol, ammonia, or TDM assays. For more information, refer to
System Specifications or contact Beckman Coulter.
• This system uses the specific sample probe, reagent probe, and cuvettes supplied by
Beckman Coulter. Use only genuine Beckman Coulter parts.
• If you experience an abnormality, replace the sample cups, reagents, and reagent
bottles. Clean the sample probe, reagent probes, mix bars, and cuvettes. For more
information, refer to Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars, Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent
Probes, and Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel.
Mechanical Problems
Syringe Problems
Inspect for:
• Water leaking at syringes: Tighten the tube connectors of the sample and reagent
syringes.
Also, confirm that there is no damage to sample and reagent syringes, and that there is
no abrasion on the pistons. For more information, refer to Replace the Sample Syringe
or Reagent Syringe.
• Bubbles in the tubing connected to the syringe: Select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance
> Maintenance. Then select Prime Washing Line and press the DIAG/TABLE ROTATION
button to start removing air from the tubing. For more information, refer to Replace
the Sample Syringe or Reagent Syringe.
• General Syringe Troubleshooting:
— Confirm that the top and bottom screws are tightened.
— Confirm that the bottom screw is finger tight against the piston. Over-tightening
damages the syringe.
— Confirm that there is a smooth resistant pull.
— Confirm that the correct size syringe (sample or reagent) is in the correct position.
— Confirm that the syringe is installed on the system correctly.
— Inspect the tubing connected to the syringe head for scratches, bending, or leaks.
— Confirm that the creases in the fluorocarbon polymer tip of the syringe do not
have any buildup or flaking of the fluorocarbon polymer tip.
— Confirm that the probes are not blocked. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe and Mix Bars and Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes. If the probes
are blocked, syringe operation is affected.
Probe Problems
Inspect for:
• General Probe Troubleshooting:
— Confirm that water dispenses in a straight stream.
— Confirm that the metal screw cap for the probe connection is tight.
8-6 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
— Confirm that the probe tubing does not have bubbles.

• The reagent or sample probe is leaking from loose probe connectors: Tighten the
probe connectors. Confirm that the tubing is firmly connected.
• The reagent or sample probe is blocked: For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe and Mix Bars and Clean the R1 or R2 Reagent Probes.
• The reagent or sample probe is bent or damaged: Replace the probe. For more
• The sample aspiration position of the sample probe is incorrect: The sample probe
moves down to aspirate sample. The maximum distance the probe can move
downward is defined in the system software, but a service engineer can change the
programming. If the sample probe downward distance is programmed incorrectly, the
probe might hit the bottom of the sample cup or tube. Contact Beckman Coulter.
• The reagent probe is not aligned over the refrigerator: If the R1 or R2 reagent probe is
hitting the reagent bottle or refrigerator cover, examine the reagent probes for
abnormalities. If the probe is bent, replace it. For more information, refer to Replace a
Sample or Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent, and the reagent aspiration position
is still not correct, contact Beckman Coulter.
• The sample probe or reagent probe is not aligned over the cuvette: If the sample probe
or reagent probe is contacting the cuvettes, examine the sample probe or reagent
probe for abnormalities. If a probe is bent, replace it. For more information, refer to
Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent but still not aligned
correctly, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Abnormal wash position of the reagent probe and sample probe: If the probe is hitting
the wash well, examine the probe. If a probe is bent, replace it. For more information,
refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe. If the probe is not bent, but the probe
wash position is still abnormal, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Basic troubleshooting for the reagent transfer components and sample transfer
component: Confirm that no drops remain on the path of the transfer component. If
drops are on the path of the sample or reagent transfer component, contact Beckman
Coulter.
• The sample contains a significant amount of fibrin and protein.
— Remove fibrin or filter the sample.
— Inspect whether any other contaminant is mixed in the sample.
— Remove any clots from the sample probe. For more information, refer to Clean the
Sample Probe and Mix Bars.
Abnormal Data Caused by Cuvette Wheel or Wash Nozzles

• Scratches, fingerprints, stains, or foreign matter on the cuvettes: Clean the cuvettes. If
abnormal data is not corrected after cleaning, replace the cuvettes with new ones. For
more information, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel or Clean or
• The outside of the cuvette or the cuvette wheel is wet or flooded: Inspect the tube
mounting joints and tighten if the manifolds are loose. The wash nozzles can clog.
Clean the wash nozzles.
— For more information on how to clean the wash nozzles, refer to Clean the Wash
— Clean any cuvettes and the cuvette wheel where it is wet. For more information,
refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel.
• The deionized water or wash solution is dripping from the wash nozzles: Inspect the
tube mounting joints tighten if the manifolds are loose. The wash nozzles can clog.
B71495AF 8-7
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
Clean the wash nozzles. For more information, refer to Clean the Wash Nozzle
Component and Inspect the Tube Mounting Joints.
• After washing the cuvettes, a large amount of water remains in the cuvettes: Inspect
the tube mounting joints and tighten if the manifolds are loose. The wash nozzles can
clog. Clean the wash nozzles.
— For more information on how to clean the wash nozzles, refer to Clean the Wash
— Remove the excess water from inside the cuvettes, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wheel.
• The tubing in the wash solution tank floats: Straighten the tubing, then insert it toward
the tank bottom so that it does not contact the tank opening.
• The system has trouble with the float sensor in the wash solution tank or the diluted
wash solution tank: Connect the float sensor connector firmly, and move the float
sensor and tubing in the tank so that they do not contact each other. If these changes
do not correct the problem, contact Beckman Coulter to replace the float sensor.
• Some cuvettes are contaminated with foreign matter: Clean the cuvettes. If abnormal
data is not corrected after cleaning the cuvettes or if any cuvettes are broken, replace
those cuvettes. For more information, Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel or
Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes.
• The cuvette wheel was removed from the analyzer for an extended time, then placed
on the analyzer: Do not use the analyzer immediately. It is necessary to leave the
cuvette wheel in the dry bath incubator for a minimum of an hour for the cuvettes to
stabilize to temperature specifications of 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
Abnormal Data Caused by Photometer Lamp or Photometer Component

• The quality of the photometer lamp has deteriorated: Inspect the record of photocal
measurement results for abnormal data. If there is abnormal data, replace the
photometer lamp.
— For more information on the photocal measurement result record, refer to
Perform a Photocal.
— For more information on replacing the Photometer Lamp, refer to Replace the
Photometer Lamp.
• The photometer lamp is not stable: Perform the photocal measurement twice to
confirm the difference between two sets of measurement data. If there is a significant
difference between the measurements, the photometer lamp can be defective. Replace
the lamp. For more information, refer to Replace the Photometer Lamp.
Mixing Problems
• The mix bars are contaminated: Clean the mix bars. For more information, refer to
Clean the Sample Probe and Mix Bars.
• The fluororesin coating on the mix bars is chipped: Replace the mix bars. For more
information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
• The mix bar component malfunctions, and there is abnormal noise from the system
during the mixing motion: If there is an audible abnormal noise coming from the mix
bar component, inspect for bent mix bars. If the mix bar is bent, replace the mix bar.
For more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars. If the mix bars are not bent,
• The wash water and wash solution are not correctly drained from the mix bar wash
wells: Contact Beckman Coulter.
8-8 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
• The mix bars are not positioned correctly causing contact between the mix bars and
the mix bar wash well or the cuvettes: If the mix bar is bent, replace the mix bar. For
more information, refer to Replace the Mix Bars. If the mix bar is not bent, contact
Beckman Coulter.
• The mix bars are not correctly installed on the mix bar component, causing insufficient
mixing of the sample and reagents: Install the mix bars correctly. For more information,
refer to Replace the Mix Bars.
Deionized Water Tank Problems

• The deionized water tank is contaminated or dirty: If there are indications of
particulate contamination on the interior of the tank, clean the tank thoroughly. For
more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter.
• Residual sodium hypochlorite solution remains in the deionized water tank after
cleaning: Clean the tank again and rinse thoroughly with deionized water. For more
information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Deionized Water or Filter Problems

• Deionized water supply: Determine if the water supply meets the required
specifications. For more information, refer to Water Supply.
• Dirty, stained, or blocked filters: Clean the deionized water filter and the sample probe
filter. Replace filters if data continues to be abnormal after cleaning. For more
information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
Sample Probe Filter, and Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and
O-ring.
• Tap water below 5 °C used: The water supply to the deionizer must be above 5 °C. For
more information, contact Beckman Coulter.
Incubation Temperature Problems

• Confirm that there is adequate space surrounding the system for air to circulate
effectively. Confirm that this space meets Beckman Coulter recommendations. For
more information, refer to System Specifications.
• Do not fill adjoining space around analyzers with boxes or other equipment. Space left
at installation is required for correct air circulation.
• Clean the air filters. For more information, refer to Clean the Air Filters.
• Confirm that the room temperature is between 18 °C and 32 °C, and the acceptable
range of temperature fluctuation is within 4 °C during analysis. Failure to regulate
room temperature causes more required calibration.
• If the cuvette wheel was removed from the analyzer for an extended time, then placed
on the analyzer, do not use the analyzer immediately. It is necessary to leave the
cuvette wheel in the dry bath incubator for a minimum of an hour for the cuvettes to
stabilize to temperature specifications of 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
Tubing and Pump Problems

The filters are dirty or clogged: Clean the deionized water filter and the sample probe filter.
If abnormal data is not corrected after cleaning filters, replace the filters.
B71495AF 8-9
Troubleshooting
Mechanical Problems
• For more information on how to clean the deionized water filter, refer to Clean the
Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
• For more information on how to clean the sample probe filter, refer to Clean the
Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
• For more information on how to replace the deionized water filter, refer to Replace the
Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-ring.
• For more information on how to replace the sample probe filter, refer to Replace the
Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and O-ring.
Troubleshooting Reagent Refrigerator Problems

If the reagent refrigerator temperature is out of range:
1 Select HOME and inspect the coolant temperature for the reagent refrigerator.
2 Open the reagent refrigerator and confirm that the reagent bottles are cool.
3 If the problem persists, contact Beckman Coulter.
STAT Table Problems

If the STAT table compartment temperature is out of range:
1 Select HOME and inspect the coolant temperature of the STAT table compartment.
2 Confirm that the large and small STAT table covers are correctly installed. If the covers
are opened frequently or for extended periods of time, the STAT table compartment
temperature increases.
3 If the problem persists, contact Beckman Coulter.
Rack Problems
Inspect for the following general problems:
• Confirm that the rack is clean and that the surface is not sticky. Refer to Clean the Rack.
• Inspect bar code label positioning.
— For more information on attaching the bar code label to the sample rack, refer to
the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
— For more information on placing the sample cups or tubes in the rack, refer to
Place the Sample Cups or Tubes in a Rack.
• Confirm that the rack was loaded correctly.
For more information on loading racks, refer to Place Racks on the Rack Input Area.
• Confirm that the correct number of magnets are in the bottom of the rack. Compare the
configuration of magnets on the underside of the rack with the magnets on another
rack of the same color. The configuration for the two racks must be identical. Discard
the rack if a magnet is missing.
• If a rack jam occurs, refer to Rack Jams.
8-10 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Figure 8.1 Rack Magnet Positions
Table 8.1 Magnets in Rack Positions 1, 2 or 3

Rack Color Magnet Position (1 to 3)
White Position 1
Yellow Positions 1 and 2
Green Position 3
Red Position 2
Blue Positions 1 and 3
System Problems
Event for Reagent Refrigerator Temp

• If there is a problem with the reagent refrigerator, confirm that there is adequate space
surrounding the system for air to circulate effectively. For more information on
installation environment precautions, refer to System Specifications.
• Confirm that the room temperature is from 18 °C to 32 °C. If the room temperature is
over 32 °C, the reagent refrigerator temperature is over 12 °C. If the problem persists,
Abnormal Sound from Inside the System

• Air bubbles trapped in the tubing: Inspect the deionized water filter. If the filter is
damaged, replace it. Inspect the sample probe filter for placement of the filter. For
correct positioning of the filter, refer to Figure 8.2 Sample Probe Filter Replacement.
B71495AF 8-11
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Figure 8.2 Sample Probe Filter Replacement
• Deionized water tank empty event: The ion-exchange capability of the deionizer can be
insufficient. Replace the deionizer if it does not meet required specifications. Inspect
the deionized water filter. If it has become dirty or blocked, clean or replace it.
— For more information on cleaning the Deionized Water Filter and the Sample
Probe Filter, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water Filter, and
— For more information on replacing the Deionized Water Filter and the Sample
Probe Filter, refer to Replace the Deionized Water Filter, Sample Probe Filter, and
O-ring.
• For all other sources of noise, contact Beckman Coulter.
Event for Deionized Water

• The deionizer is turned off: Turn on the deionizer. Shut down the system (End
Process), and then turn on the system.
• The ion exchange capability of the deionizer is insufficient: Confirm that the deionizer
meets specifications. If the deionizer does not meet the specification, replace it. For
detailed information, consult the deionizer manufacturer.
• The deionized water filter is clogged: Use your finger to determine if the deionized
water filter is slimy. If the filter surface is slimy, the filter may be clogged. Clean the
deionized water filter. For more information, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank,
8-12 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Leaks from the Wash Solution Roller Pump
1. Roller pump tubing 3. Connector

2. Wash solution roller pump 4. Relay tubing
• The roller pump tubing may be deteriorated: Inspect the roller pump tubing for cracks
caused by deterioration. If deteriorated, replace the roller pump tubing. For more
information, refer to Replace the Wash Solution Roller Pump Tubing.
• A connector may be loose: Inspect the connectors, and firmly tighten if the connectors
are loose.
Bar Code Label Errors

• Reagent bar code reader dirty: Wipe the bar code reader window with a clean,
deionized water dampened, lint-free absorbent tissue to remove any particles on the
read window. If necessary, follow up with a clean, dry, lint-free absorbent tissue to dry
the reader so there are no smear marks left to cause errors.
• Bar code labels on sample cups or racks are damaged and discolored: Replace any
sample or rack bar code labels that are worn or damaged. For more information on
replacing rack ID labels, refer to Replace Rack ID Labels. For more information on
sample bar code labels, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
• Bar code labels on reagent bottles are damaged: If the reagent ID is damaged, the
operator can edit the reagent ID and still use the bottle of reagent. For more
information, refer to Edit a Reagent ID.
• Bar code labels are not correctly attached to racks or sample cups: For more
Warning
Never look directly into the bar code readers. The laser light can cause serious
eye damage.
B71495AF 8-13
Troubleshooting
System Problems
Leaks from the Bottom of the System

• Wash line obstructed: Inspect for obstructions in the wash wells for the sample probe
and reagent probes. Clean the wells if any obstructions exist. For more information,
refer to Clean the Sample Probe Wash Well, Reagent Probe Wash Wells, and Whole
Blood Wash Well.
• Waste line not installed correctly: If the waste line is leaking or if the tubing is too long,
• Any leaks from the bottom of the analyzer are potentially dangerous: If the source is
not clearly visible (for example a leaking syringe), contact Beckman Coulter.
No Wash Solution to Mix Bar Wash Wells

• The deionized water filter may be clogged. Confirm the last time the deionized water
tank and filter were cleaned.
• Determine if the interior of the deionized water tank has slick or slimy buildup by
sliding your gloved hand on the gray float sensor in the bottle or the side of the tank.
This buildup can cause the deionized water and sample probe filters to become
clogged. Clean both the deionized water and sample probe filters, and the deionized
water tank.
For more information on how to clean the deionized water filter, sample probe filter,
and deionized water tank, refer to Clean the Deionized Water Tank, Deionized Water
Filter, and Sample Probe Filter.
Reagent Event when Sufficient Reagent Remains in Bottles

The liquid level sensor could be faulty. Select EVENT to view the Event Log for the cause and
corrective actions.
• Inspect the reagent bottle for bubbles that occur from replacing reagents or for a bottle
that is not correctly placed in the reagent refrigerator. Refer to Replace the Reagents
and Add Adapters to the Reagent Tray.
• Perform a reagent check to confirm that the event is still occurring.
• Contact Beckman Coulter.
Sample Event when Sufficient Sample Remains

When there is a sample event and sufficient sample remains, there is a possibility that the
sample probe did not move down to the liquid level of the sample. Incorrect detection of the
height of the cup can cause this error. Confirm that the correct tube or cup is used and
placed correctly in the rack. Inspect for bubbles in the sample cup. If an error still occurs,
contact Beckman Coulter. For more information, refer to the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual.
No Sample Cup Event when Sample Cup is in the Rack

Unspecified cup used: Confirm that the specified sample cups are in each rack. For more
information, refer to Cups or Tubes Specifications.
8-14 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
System Problems
No Sample Cup Event when Sample Cup is on the STAT Table

• The required test was not ordered for the STAT sample, or the order was not for the
correct position on the STAT table. Repeat the STAT sample order.
• Confirm that the sample cup was placed correctly on the STAT table with the correct
adaptor for the sample cup diameter.
• Confirm that the sample cup meets specifications. For more information, refer to Cups
or Tubes Specifications.
Liquid Leaking from the Reagent Probe or Sample Probe

Confirm that the reagent probe or sample probe is installed correctly:
1 Confirm that the probe connectors are tight.

buttons.
4 Select Prime Washing Line.
5 Select OK to dispense water from the reagent probe and sample probe. If the deionized
water does not dispense normally, a reagent probe or sample probe might be
incorrectly installed. Inspect the reagent probe or sample probe installation. If it is
necessary to replace the probe, refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
Reagent Probe or Sample Probe not Aligned over the Cuvette

Inspect if the reagent probe or sample probe is bent: Examine the probe and replace it if it
is bent. For more information, refer to Replace a Sample or Reagent Probe.
If the probe is not bent but still aligned incorrectly, contact Beckman Coulter.
Flag [#] (Sample Level Detection Error) Generated during the Sample Dispense Operation
Determine if the sample volume is too low: Confirm that there is sufficient sample for the
ordered tests. Consider the dead volume for the different cups. For more information, refer
to Cups or Tubes Specifications.
Thermal Control Error on the Wash Water Heater

The wash water temperature is not within the specified range. Contact Beckman Coulter for
assistance.
Rack Jams
Inspect for:
B71495AF 8-15
Troubleshooting
Computer Problems
• Contamination on the rack: Confirm that nothing has fallen onto the rack and that the
rack ID bar code label, or sample ID bar code labels have not peeled off, causing the
rack to jam. Refer to Rack Problems.
• Rack feeder module is sticky or dusty: Clean surfaces with deionized water using a lint-
free, dampened absorbent tissue.
• Object attaching to the magnet on the bottom of a rack: Inspect for small metal objects
such as staples or paper clips on the magnets on the bottom of a rack. If foreign matter
attaches to the magnet, remove it from the magnet.
Printer Problems
Refer to the printer manual for assistance with all printer troubleshooting.
• Printer is disconnected. Inspect the plug and socket and connecting lead.
• The power to the printer is not turned on. Confirm that the power to the printer is
turned on.
• Printer toner is empty and requires replacement.
• Confirm that the online button is on.
• Confirm that paper is loaded correctly.
Computer Problems
Menu cannot be selected

• Function is inaccessible: Menu items which are not available are inaccessible because
of the programmed settings.
• System software crashes, to reset the system:
— Press [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Delete] together.
— Select Shutdown, and then OK.
— After the computer shuts down, press the ANALYZER STOP button (black) and wait
5 seconds before pressing the RESET button (white), and then wait another 5
seconds before pressing the ON button (green).
— The software and analyzer synchronize and load at the same time.
— The system displays the System Start dialog with a Program Download to Analyzer
message.
— The System Start dialog displays a message to confirm database retrieval. Select
OK.
— The system displays a New Index dialog prompting the operator to create a new
index. If the operator wants to remain in the current index, select Index. If a new
index is necessary, select New Index.
— The analyzer goes into WARM UP mode for 90 minutes. If the analyzer has been
down longer than 5 minutes, then allow the 20-minute warm up. The operator can
then select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance > Maintenance, and select Standby
[F4]. The analyzer bypasses WARM UP to STANDBY.
Tip
The incubator remains red in the Home screen until the temperature returns
to 37 °C ± 0.3 °C.
8-16 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
Recovering from Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button or Power Loss
• If you are unable to recover from a software crash, contact Beckman Coulter.
Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work

[Num Lock] is not selected: Press the [Num Lock] key and then confirm that the LED light
over [Num Lock] on the keyboard is on.
Keyboard Not Responding

Possible causes:
• Keyboard cable: Confirm that the cable connector is in the correct socket in the back of
the computer (color-coded).
• System crash: For more information, refer to Menu cannot be selected.
• System busy: The system might be saving data or performing a series of tasks
simultaneously. Wait for a few minutes until the system is ready. If this error occurs
frequently, contact Beckman Coulter.
• Data processing, such as data saving, is executing: Wait until data processing is
complete.
• Electrical Noise: If you hear a buzzing noise, unplug the keyboard and then firmly plug
in the cable connector.
Results Do Not Print Automatically

Inspect for:
• Realtime output is not set: Set the realtime output of reports from CONFIG. > List
Format > Basic Condition, select Edit [F1], and then select Realtime List [F5].
• Printer is not available during analysis (out of paper, printer is turned off, or the
printer is off line): Turn on the printer, confirm that the printer is on line, and add
paper as needed.
Online Auto-Output by Laboratory Information System Not Executed

Inspect for:
• Interface cable to the Laboratory Information System disconnected: Connect the cable.
• Interface cable defective: Contact Beckman Coulter.
• Laboratory Information System I/O settings incorrectly modified: Set the correct I/O
settings in CONFIG. > Online > Setup.
Recovering from Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button or
Power Loss
If you press the ANALYZER STOP button, or there is a power failure, the analyzer
immediately stops operation. Power to the incubator and reagent refrigerator is also turned
off.
B71495AF 8-17
Troubleshooting
Recovering from Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button or Power Loss
Caution
If you press the ANALYZER STOP button, or there is a power failure during MEASURE
mode, any data that is not complete is lost and you must reanalyze the samples.
Caution
If you press the ANALYZER STOP button, or there is a power failure, sample can
remain in the sample probe, and reagents can remain in the cuvettes. Perform a W1
to clean the sample probe and cuvettes after you restart the system. For more
information, refer to Perform a W1.
Important
If the system is without power for a lengthy time after you press the ANALYZER STOP
button, or there is a power failure, confirm the reagent integrity before resuming
analysis.

When the system is in operation, you can turn off the system power as needed for
troubleshooting.
1 Press the ANALYZER STOP button (black). The operation of the analyzer and the ISE
module immediately stop.
The computer remains On and must be turned off.
2 Select [Ctrl] + [ALT] + [Delete] from the keyboard to display the windows screen.
3 Select the red shutdown button to turn off the computer.

4 Remove all racks from the rack transport belts.
5 To turn off the system power completely, turn off the main breaker, which is located on
the left side of the analyzer module.
Return to STANDBY Mode After Powering Off the System by Pressing the ANALYZER STOP Button
1 Turn on the main breaker.

4 Select OK.
8-18 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart
5 In the New Index dialog, select Current Index to continue analysis in the current index.
up time, wait until the temperature of the cuvette wheel is 37 °C, and then select MAINT.
> Analyzer Maintenance > Maintenance. Select Standby [F4] to return to STANDBY mode.
7 Perform a W1. For more information, refer to Perform a W1.

The flowchart shows an overview of errors and corrective actions for monitoring the
automatic RTWB check function while the system is in operation.
B71495AF 8-19
Troubleshooting
Figure 8.4 RTWB Troubleshooting Overview Flowchart
8-20 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Event
Recovering from a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash Event

Inspect the cuvettes to determine if a cuvette overflow occurred when the system generated
a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash event. The recovery procedures are
different if a cuvette overflow occurred, or if unstable photometry caused the error.
The analyzer goes to STOP mode immediately after the system generates a Photometry
Error During a Cuvette Wash event.
Inspect the Cuvettes to Determine if an Overflow Occurred

To confirm that a cuvette overflow has occurred, remove the cuvette wheel cover after
initializing system. The cuvettes are frosty or white. If the cuvettes are dark, black, or are
wet when removed, a cuvette overflow has occurred. In addition, remove the cuvette
number identified in the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash ### event. The
### identifies the cuvette number that generated this event (cuvette number 1 to 165).
Visually inspect the cuvette to determine if it is wet. If the cuvette is wet on the outside,
refer to Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow and perform all system recovery
procedures. If the cuvette is not wet on the outside, refer to Recovering from an Unstable
Photometry Error and perform the required system recovery procedures determined by the
cause of the error.
For more information on how to remove the cuvette wheel, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and
the Cuvette Wheel.
Recovering from a Cuvette Wheel Overflow

The following procedure explains what can cause an overflow and how to recognize and
recover from a cuvette wheel overflow.
Performing scheduled maintenance reduces the chances of a cuvette wheel overflow. For
more information about maintenance for each system component, refer to Maintenance.
Overflow Causes
The following can cause a cuvette wheel overflow:
• A wash nozzle is clogged or partially clogged. When the wash nozzle is clogged, liquid
is not aspirated from the cuvette completely and eventually liquid spills over the side. A
clogged wash nozzle can occur when the wash nozzles are not cleaned correctly, or
when particles such as glass are aspirated into the nozzle.
• A wash nozzle is bent or damaged.
• Damaged or missing O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joint.
• The reagent probe is bent. A bent probe could be dispensing outside of the cuvette.
• The sample probe is bent. A bent probe could be dispensing outside of the cuvette.
• Cuvettes are chipped or cracked caused by alignment problems with the reagent
probes or wash nozzles.
• The wash nozzle tubing is not connected to the nozzle.
B71495AF 8-21
Troubleshooting
Recovering from an Unstable Photometry Error
Recognizing an Overflow
The system generates a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash event. The
overflow could have occurred 60 minutes before the system generated the event. Results
obtained during the 60 minutes before the event are invalid and need reanalysis. The 60-
minute timeframe is the time the analyzer was in MEASURE mode. For detailed instructions,
refer to Identify and Reanalyze Samples after a Cuvette Overflow.
The flags *, ?, @, $, D, B, and ! can indicate a cuvette wheel overflow. The data, events, or
flags vary depending on the severity of the overflow. An overflow can affect one or all tests.
Items to inspect:
• QC flags or events
• Reagent blank flags
• Analyzer not performing as normal operation
• Numerous cuvettes fail after a photocal
Lift the cuvette wheel cover. The cuvettes are frosty or white. If they are dark, black, or wet
when removed, the cuvette wheel has overflowed.
Items to Confirm when Recovering from an Overflow
Warning
Perform corrective actions for an overflow immediately. If nothing is done to correct

the problem, the wheel continues to overflow. Contact Beckman Coulter for
assistance with performing these procedures.
• Align the wash nozzle component over the cuvettes. Visually inspect and confirm that
the wash nozzles are centered over the cuvettes and inspect the alignment.
• Sonicate and clean the wash nozzles with a stylet to remove any debris.
• Inspect the reagent and sample probes to confirm the probes are correctly aligned.
Rotate the sample and reagent probes over the cuvette wheel.
• Inspect for chipped or cracked cuvettes. Replace them if necessary. For more
information, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette Wheel.
• Confirm that the wash nozzle tubing connections are secure.
• Confirm that the O-rings inside the water supply tube mounting joint are in position
and not damaged.
After the Overflow is Repaired

After you correct the cuvette wheel overflow, refer to Clean the Cuvettes and the Cuvette
Wheel.

When the system generates a Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash event, and a
cuvette overflow did not occur, unstable photometry causes the event. Incorrectly placed
cuvettes in the cuvette wheel, an insufficient amount of diluted wash solution being
8-22 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
supplied to clean the cuvettes, bubbles in the bottom of the cuvettes, dirty or scratched
cuvettes, or a deteriorating lamp can cause unstable photometry.
Perform the following procedures in this section. After the error is identified and corrected,
perform a photocal. For more information, refer to Perform a Photocal. If the error still
occurs, contact Beckman Coulter.
Inspect the Cuvette Placement

Inspect the cuvette identified by the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash event
to determine if it is placed in the cuvette wheel correctly. Push the cuvette down into the
cuvette wheel until the top of the cuvette is even with the cuvette wheel.
Figure 8.5 Incorrect and Correct Cuvette Placement
1. Incorrect cuvette placement 2. Correct cuvette placement
Inspect the Cuvette Condition
1 Inspect the cuvettes identified by the Photometry Error During a Cuvette Wash
event to determine if there is sufficient diluted wash solution in the cuvette.
If the remaining diluted wash solution volume is insufficient or empty, there is a
possibility of system malfunction. Contact Beckman Coulter.
B71495AF 8-23
Troubleshooting
Figure 8.6 Diluted Wash Solution Level in Cuvette
1. Sufficient: OK 3. Empty: Not Good

2. Insufficient: Not Good
2 Inspect the cuvette to determine if there are any bubbles at the bottom of the cuvette.
Figure 8.7 Bubbles in Cuvette
1. Not good 2. Not good
3 If bubbles exist in the cuvette, inspect the water and wash solution supply tubing on the
wash nozzle component to determine if there are bubbles. The aspiration tubing has
bubbles in normal operation.
4 If bubbles exist in the water and wash solution supply tubing on the wash nozzle
component, tighten the tube mounting joints and remove the bubbles by performing a
W1 or Prime Wash Nozzle.
For more information, refer to Perform a W1 and Replace the O-rings in the Water
Supply Tube Mounting Joint.
8-24 B71495AF
8
Troubleshooting
Figure 8.8 Tube Mounting Joint Manifolds
1. Water supply tube mounting joint 2. Wash nozzle tube mounting joint
manifold (A total of six O-rings are manifolds
used inside) 3. Wash nozzle component
Figure 8.9 Water Supply Tubing
1. Inspect water supply tubing for

bubbles
5 Inspect the cuvette to determine if it is dirty or scratched. Clean or replace the cuvette
as required. For more information, refer to Clean or Replace Individual Cuvettes.
Inspect the Lamp

Select MAINT. > Analyzer Maintenance > Consumables.
B71495AF 8-25
Troubleshooting
Laboratory Automation System Problems
Confirm that the number of hours the lamp has been in use. If the lamp has been in use for
over 1,000 hours, replace the lamp.
For information on how to replace the photometer lamp, refer to Replace the Photometer
Lamp.
Laboratory Automation System Problems

To put the DxC 700 AU in STANDBY mode, select Stop Feeder.
For problems with the laboratory automation system, refer to the laboratory automation
systems manual.
When problems exist on the laboratory automation system, you can analyze samples from
the STAT table.
8-26 B71495AF
APPENDIX A
System Specifications
Installation
Before installation of the system, refer to the System Specifications for installation
requirements. A Beckman Coulter Field Service Engineer must be present when the
analyzer is removed from the shipping crate. A qualified Beckman Coulter Field Service
Engineer must install the system. If the analyzer must be relocated, contact Beckman
Coulter Customer Support.
System verification at the installation performed by Beckman Coulter Field Service Engineer:
1. Photocal
2. Water testing
3. Dye testing
4. ISE performance (ISE Calibration, ISE Selectivity Check, ISE Accuracy test) if the ISE is
installed
5. Temperature of the cuvette wash water.
Maintenance procedures required by the customer:

Refer to the Maintenance chapter.
This section summarizes DxC 700 AU information such as size, required clearances, power
requirements, and temperature requirements. For more information on other
configurations, contact Beckman Coulter.
Placement
To operate this system safely and accurately, confirm that the location in the laboratory:
• Is not subject to direct sunlight.
• Is not excessively dusty or subject to large amounts of airborne particles. This system
withstands up to pollution degree 2 as defined by IEC and UL standards.
• Is level, with a gradient less than 1/200.
• Is not subject to vibration.
• Has a floor that can support a minimum of 700 kg (1,540 pounds). This weight
includes the personal computer attached to the system.
• Is located less than 6,561 feet or 2,000 meters above sea level.
• Contains no corrosive gases.
Electrical and Noise Conditions

Prepare the power source before system delivery.
• Have a power connector within 33 feet, or 10 meters of the location of the system.
• Have a 20A capacity of the circuit breaker on the power switchboard.
B71495AF A-1
• Have a power source with maximum voltage fluctuations (± 10%) and transient
overvoltage less than 2500 V.
Note
To avoid electrical damage to the system caused by uneven current, use an

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to connect the system to electrical power. For
• Confirm that the system is always grounded. The grounding terminal must be less than
100 Ω of grounding resistance defined in the technical standards for electrical facilities.
• Do not install this system near equipment that generates extreme levels of
electromagnetic or electrical noise.
• Do not use mobile or cordless telephones and transceivers in the room where the
system is installed.
• Do not use medical equipment that can be susceptible to malfunctions caused by
Electric Magnetic Field (EMF) near the system computer (Console) or the monitor.
Warning
Connect all the grounding terminals provided on the system and distribution panel to
ground. Failure to ground the terminals can cause electric shock and system
malfunction.
Figure A.1 Crimp Terminal Hole
1. Crimp terminal hole diameter 5.4 mm
Caution
Only a Beckman Coulter Representative can connect the power cable.

• When connecting the power cables to the system, connect the grounding terminal first.
To disconnect the cables, disconnect the grounding terminal last.
• Connect the power cables to the distribution panel.
A-2 B71495AF
A
Figure A.2 Distribution Panel
1. Gray 8. Connect these terminals to the power

2. White source specified for this system
3. Yellow/Green 9. Connect this terminal to a grounding
4. Terminal board terminal that measures less than 100 Ω
5. Black (LIVE) 10. Yellow/Green
6. Black (NEUTRAL) 11. Black (NEUTRAL)
7. Yellow/Green 12. Black (LIVE)
Clearance
The system includes the analyzer and the optional rack feeder module.
This system requires space of a minimum of 500 mm (20 inches) from the wall around it for
safe installation and maintenance.
Figure A.3 System Clearance
B71495AF A-3
1. DxC 700 AU Analyzer Module 3. Front

2. DxC 700 AU Rack Feeder Module
Dimensions
Table A.1 Dimensions
Module Dimensions
Length Height Depth Weight
mm mm mm kg
Analyzer Module 1250 1300 890 465
Rack Feeder 730 940 1040 165
Module
Water Supply
Table A.2 Water Supply
Specification Requirement
Deionized water conductivity 2.0 µS/cm or less (water transmitted through a
filter of 0.5 µm or less)
Water pressure 0.49×105 to 3.92×105 Pa (or 7 to 57 psi)
Water consumption Average: 28 L/hour (50/60 Hz)
Maximum water demand: 1.0 L/minute (50/60 Hz)
Deionized water temperature 5 to 28 °C (41 to 83 °F)

Water-supply facility More requirements for the water supply:
• The system is located within 10 m (33 feet) of

the deionized water outlet.
• Deionized water supplied to the system does
not contain excessive air bubbles.
The system includes the following tubing:
• Water supply hose: Braided hose 12 mm (ID)

x 18 mm (OD), L=10 m (33 feet), 1 piece.
Caution
If the tap water temperature exceeds the optimal temperature range for the
deionizer, consult the deionizer manufacturer. When using the existing water supply
tubing and deionizer, confirm that it is micro-organism free.
A-4 B71495AF
A
Note
The water pressure for this system operates at a range from 0.49 x 105 to 3.92 x 105 Pa.
For the correct water pressure for the deionizer, contact the deionizer manufacturer.
Beckman Coulter recommends use of a reverse osmotic membrane as the deionizer. For
Drainage and Exhaust

Table A.3 Drainage and Exhaust
Concentrated liquid waste hose, diluted liquid Braided hose 15 mm (ID) x 22 mm (OD), L=10 m
waste hose (33 feet), 2 pieces.
Exhaust hose Braided hose 12 mm (ID) x 18 mm (OD), L=10 m
(33 feet), 1 piece.
Warning
Follow your laboratory procedure for disposal of all liquid and infectious waste.
The system discharges liquid waste by forced drain and moist air containing the
components of liquid waste.
• Concentrated liquid waste: Compound liquid of sample and reagent retrieved from
cuvettes and diluted wash solution.
• Diluted liquid waste: Liquid waste used for washing cuvettes, mix bars, and so on.
Requirements:
• Place the drain hole within 10 m (33 feet) from this system.
• Connect the drain to an infectious waste collection tank as required by law.
• The drain must be located no higher than 1.5 m and the exhaust no higher than 0.1 m
above the system installation floor.
• Keep the ends of exhaust air hoses and the liquid waste hoses, which are inserted into
the drain, above the liquid level of the drain.
• Confirm that the liquid waste hoses are not bent or crushed.
• Drainage capability for concentrated and diluted liquid waste is:
— Concentrated liquid waste: 10 L/hour
— Diluted liquid waste: 18 L/hour
Environmental Requirements
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When in Use

Heat output by the system during operation is approximately 9600 kJ/h (9100 BTU).
When the specified room temperature and humidity ranges fluctuate, the system data may
not be reliable. When the system is in operation, confirm that the following requirements
are met.
B71495AF A-5
Confirm that the system is not exposed to direct airflow from air conditioners.
Table A.4 Temperature and Humidity
Temperature 18 to 32 °C (64 to 90 °F)
Temperature fluctuation Within 4 °C (7.2 °F) during analysis
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (without condensation)
Note
The installation site must be well ventilated. For more information, refer to Clearance.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When Not in Use

• The temperature is between 5 °C (41° F) and 40 °C (104° F).
• The humidity is between 15% RH and 90% RH.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions When the Analyzer is being Transported

• The temperature is between -30 °C (-22° F) and 60 °C (140° F).
• The humidity is between 10% RH and 95% RH.
Power Requirements
Table A.5 Power Requirements
Voltage, Frequency
AC 208 V 50/60 Hz (USA)
AC 230 V 50/60 Hz (Europe)
AC 220 V 50/60 Hz (Asia)
AC 240 V 50/60 Hz (Australia)
AC 200 V 50/60 Hz (Japan)
Maximum rated power consumption 3.8 kVA
Bar Code Reader

Table A.6 Sample ID Bar Code Reader Specifications
Item Specification
Maximum output 85 µW
Pulse width 112 µS
Frequency 500 Hz
Class 2
A-6 B71495AF
A
General Specifications
Table A.7 STAT Table Bar Code Reader Specifications

Item Specification
Maximum output 85 µW
Pulse width 112 µS
Frequency 500 Hz
Class 2
Regulatory Compliance
This system complies with IEC60825-1: 2007.
Method of Analysis
Discrete method
Configuration
Analyzer Module
Console
Caution
Do not move or adjust the computer from the original position. During installation,
Beckman Coulter installs the computer in the correct position. For proper ventilation,
the space requirement around the computer is at least 76 mm.
Option
Rack feeder module1
ISE
Printer
PROService kit
Rack tray
DTS (Direct Track Sampling) kit
Water supply equipment
External storage device
LAN connections kit
1 The rack feeder module is specific for the DxC 700 AU.
B71495AF A-7
Type of Sample
Serum, plasma, urine, other fluids with viscosities in the same range as serum, whole
blood (HbA1c).
Number of Simultaneous Analytes

Maximum of 60 photometric + 3 ISE tests on board
Throughput
Maximum 800 photometric tests/hour or 1200 tests/hour (photometric + ISE)
Maximum 100 tests/hour for analysis of only HbA1c
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, throughput depends
on the Laboratory Automation System.
Data Input Methods

Touch screen
Keyboard
Mouse
Online (RS232C or TCP/IP)
Manual bar code reader
CD
PROService (Option)
Data Output Methods

Monitor display
Printer (option)
Online (RS232C or TCP/IP)
External storage device (option)
PROService (option)
Internal hard disk
CD
A-8 B71495AF
B71495AF
Cups or Tubes Specifications
Warning
Use only sample cups and tubes listed in the specifications and validated by Beckman Coulter. If other cups or tubes are
used, analysis cannot be performed or errors can result.
Note
BD indicates a Becton Dickinson PN. The BD tube or its equivalent can be used.
Important
If the system is programmed to use the pre-dilution option with a pre-dilution rate of 3 or 5, a larger dead volume is required
to ensure accurate sample dispensing. Refer to the Pre-Dilution Rate Volumes table in the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual for
the sample volumes required for each pre-dilution rate. The system can be programmed for pre-dilution rates other than 3
and 5, or to dispense a smaller rerun sample volume than the first-run sample volume without affecting the dead volume
requirement. Refer to the Rerun Test Parameters Screen in the DxC 700 AU Reference Manual for more information.
Table A.8 Cup or Tube Available for Racks or STAT Table

Cup or Tube Size PN Dead Volume (µL) Dead Volume (µL) for 3 Dead Volume (µL) when
and 5 Pre-Dilution Rate Connected to Laboratory
Automation
Hitachi cup 2.5 mL MU853200 50 80 N/A for samples from

automation line
50 (or 80) for samples on
the STAT table
Auto aliquot tube 13 mm 2910034 80 80 300
Serum Separator 13 x 100 mm BD 367986 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
Tube non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
gel) layer
A-9
A-10 Table A.8 Cup or Tube Available for Racks or STAT Table (Continued)

Cup or Tube Size PN Dead Volume (µL) Dead Volume (µL) for 3 Dead Volume (µL) when
and 5 Pre-Dilution Rate Connected to Laboratory
Automation
Serum Separator 16 x 100 mm BD 367988 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
Tube non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
gel) layer
Lithium heparin with 13 x 75 mm BD 367960 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
gel separator (light non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
green top) gel) layer
Lithium heparin with 13 x 100 mm BD 367962 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
gel separator (light non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
green top) gel) layer
Lithium heparin 13 x 75 mm BD 367884 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
(green top) non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
gel) layer
Lithium heparin 13 x 100 mm BD 367886 4 mm above the 4 mm above the non- 4 mm above the non-
(green top) non-sample (cells or sample (cells or gel) layer sample (cells or gel) layer
gel) layer
Primary tube (red 13 x 75 mm BD 366668 140 140 300
top)
Primary tube (red 13 x 100 mm BD 367815 140 140 300
top)
Table A.9 Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for Racks

Cup, Size PN Tube PN Dead Volume (µL) Dead Volume (µL) for 3
and 5 Pre-Dilution Rate
DxC cup, 2.0 mL 652730 DxC transfer 979272 50 200
Access 2 cup, 2.0 mL 81902 DxC transfer 979272 50 200
B71495AF
Table A.9 Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for Racks (Continued)
B71495AF
Access 2 cup, 1.0 mL 81915 13 x 75 mm BD 367960 140 140
BD 367884
BD 366668
BD 367886
BD 367815
Hitachi cup MU853200 SST 16x100 mm BD 367988 50 80
• Sample Cup 2.5

mL
EZ Nest cup 1270013000 13 x 75 mm BD 367960 50 150
BD 367884
BD 366668
EZ Nest cup 1270013000 13 x 100 mm BD 367962 50 150
BD 367886

BD 367815
EZ Nest cup 1270016000 16 x 75 mm BD 364976 50 120
EZ Nest cup 1270016000 16 x 100 mm BD 367988 50 120
A-11
A-12 Table A.10 Cup Nested (Inserted) in Tube Available for STAT Table

DxC cup, 2.0 mL 652730 DxC transfer 979272 50 200
Access 2 cup, 2.0 mL 81902 DxC transfer 979272 50 200
BD 367884
BD 366668
EZ Nest cup 1270013000 13 x 75 mm BD 367960 50 150
BD 367884
BD 366668
EZ Nest cup 1270016000 16 x 75 mm BD 364976 50 120

B71495AF
B71495AF
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Tubes in Racks

The diagrams are not drawn to scale and are not intended to be physically compared to the sample tubes or cups.
Figure A.4

Commercial Tubes*1
These two tubes are examples of commercial tubes. Commercial tube sizes that can be used on the DxC 700 AU are 13 x 75 mm,
13 x 100 mm, and 16 x 100 mm.
A-13
A-14 13 mm outer diameter tubes include BD367986, BD367960, BD367962, BD637884, BD367886, BD36668, and BD367815.

16 mm outer diameter tube is BD367988.
The maximum sample volume limit for commercial tubes meeting DxC 700 AU specifications is the same. Most importantly,
confirm there is 15 mm of space between the sample level and the top of the tube.
Sample Volume Limits*2

BD indicates a Becton Dickinson PN. You can use the BD tube or its equivalent. The maximum sample volume limit is defined as
15 mm from the top of the tube to the sample level in the tube due to the volume differences in various commercial tubes.
B71495AF
B71495AF
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Other Containers in Racks

The diagrams are not drawn to scale and are not intended to be physically compared to the sample tubes or cups.
Figure A.5
Maximum Sample Volume Limits for Other Containers in Racks

The blue highlight shown in the sample containers is used as an indication that the containers are insert cups nested inside
other tubes.
A-15
Sampling Specifications
Sampling Specifications
Note
When the DxC 700 AU connects to a Laboratory Automation System, the DxC 700 AU
does not use racks. Refer to the Laboratory Automation System specifications for tubes
and cups that can be used on the system.
Sample Capacity
Maximum 150 samples (15 racks)
Sample Dispensing System

Micro-syringe system
The system is provided with the following functions:

• Liquid level detection
• Clot detection
• Collision detection
• Pre-dilution
Sample Volume
Table A.11 Sample Volume
Sample Volume
Normal dispensing 1.0 to 25.0 µL/test, in steps of 0.1 µL
Dispensing with dilution 1.0 to 20.0 µL/test, in steps of 0.1 µL
Rack Type
NE racks are required on the system.
• Blue rack
• Yellow rack
• Green rack
• White rack
• Red rack
Reagent Specifications
Reagent Storage Capacity

Table A.12 Reagent Storage Capacity
Module Capacity
R1 refrigerator 60 with serial reagent bottle capability
A-16 B71495AF
A
Reaction System Specifications
Table A.12 Reagent Storage Capacity (Continued)

Module Capacity
R2 refrigerator 48 with serial reagent bottle capability
Refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 4 to 12 °C (39.2 to 53.6 °F)
Reagent Setting Method

Turn table method
Type of Reagent
• Normal concentration reagent
• Highly concentrated reagent
Reagent Dispensing System

Micro-syringe with collision detection function for the probe
Number of Reagent Steps

Maximum 3 steps
Reagent Volume Setting Range

Table A.13 Reagent Volume
Reagent Volume
Normal dispensing 10 to 250 µL/test, in steps of 1.0 µL
Dilution dispensing 10 to 240 µL/test, in steps of 1.0 µL
Reaction System Specifications
Reaction Incubation Method

Dry bath system
Reaction Temperature
Dry bath: 37± 0.3 °C (98.6± 0.5 °F)
Reaction Mixture Volume

120 to 350 μL (All countries and regions except Japan)
90 to 350 μL (Japan only)
B71495AF A-17
Analytical Method Specifications
Reaction Time
Maximum 8 minutes 33 seconds
Mixing System
Rotating mixing bar system
Reaction Cell
Glass square cuvette
• Optical path length: 5 mm
Reaction Line
Rotary disk system: 165 cuvettes
Analytical Method Specifications
Photometric Points
28
Type of Measurement
• End point assay
• Rate assay
• Fixed point assay
• Electrode method (ISE) (option)
Analytical Performance Characteristics

Refer to the reagent Instructions for Use.
Optical System Specifications
Photometer
Multi-wavelength diffraction grating spectrophotometer
Photometric Modes
Monochromatic or bichromatic
Wavelengths
340 to 800 nm (13 steps of 340, 380, 410, 450, 480, 520, 540, 570, 600, 660, 700, 750, and
800 nm)
A-18 B71495AF
A
Data Processing Specifications
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode array
Light Source
Halogen lamp 12 V/20 W
Measurable Absorbance Range

0 to 3.0 Abs (converted in units of 10 mm of optical path length)
Photometric resolution
0.0001 Abs
Data Processing Specifications
Storage Capacity
Table A.14 Data Storage Capacity
Data Hard Disk Storage Capacity
Patient Samples 100,000 samples
9999 samples/index
Maximum 300 indexes
Reaction Monitor data: A maximum of 40,000 tests per index and a maximum
of 400,000 tests in multiple indexes
Control Samples 999 samples/index
Maximum 300 indexes
Data Processing Configuration

• Hard disk: 500 GB or more
• Memory capacity: 8 GB or more
• Keyboard: 101-109 keyboard
• Touch panel monitor
• DVD-RW drive
• Printer (option)
Calculation Processing Specifications
Calculation
• Calibration
B71495AF A-19
Input and Output Specifications
— Analytical method
— End point assay
— Rate assay
— Fixed point assay
— Electrode method (ISE)
— Calibration method
— ACAL AA
— ACAL AB
— ACAL 2 AB to ACAL 7 AB
— 4 MC to 10 MC
— MCAL MB
— MCAL 2 MB to MCAL 7 MB
— Calibration curve type
— Straight line
— Polygonal line
— Quadratic expression
— Tertiary expression (2 types)
— EIA-TYPE 1 to 4
— Spline
• Correction
— Water blank correction
— Reagent blank correction
— Sample blank correction
— Data correction
Quality control (QC)

• Control samples
— Maximum 10 types or test
— Maximum 100 types in total
• Quality control method
— Shewhart day-to-day management (Levey-Jennings method)
— Multi-rule control (Westgard method)
— Twin-plot control
Input and Output Specifications
Test Summary
• Patient sample test summary
• Emergency sample test summary
• Rerun sample test summary
• Control sample test summary
• Calibration test summary
A-20 B71495AF
A
ISE Specifications
Data Input and Output

• Test order: Keyboard entry, real-time online, batch online
• Analysis result output: Real-time, batch online
Input and Output To and From an External Device

• Online input and output
— RS232C or TCP/IP
• Offline output
— CD/DVD
— External storage device (HD) (option)
ISE Specifications
Reagents
• ISE Buffer Solution: 2L bottle
• ISE MID Standard Solution: 2L bottle
• ISE Reference Solution: 1L bottle
Measurement Method
Indirect (diluted) ion-selective electrode
Measurement Items
Na, K, and Cl ions in serum or urine
Throughput
200 samples per hour
Sample Volume
20 µL plus 10 µL deionized water
Dilution Ratio
32.4 times (deionized water 10 µL, ISE Buffer Solution 618 µL)
Measuring Range (mmol/L)

Table A.15 Measuring Range (mmol/L)
Test Item Serum Urine
Na 50 to 200 10 to 400
K 1.0 to 10.0 2.0 to 200
Cl 50 to 200 15 to 400
B71495AF A-21
ISE Specifications
Calibration Curve
Automatic calibration curve:
Measures the high-concentration calibrator and low-concentration calibrator to set two

points on the chart.
Data Correction
Enables manual calibration chart correction (MCAL) and automatic calibration chart
correction (ACAL, 3-point regression CAL).
Drift Correction
Automatic correction:
Measures the electrical potential of ISE MID Standard Solution for each sample to perform
drift correction.
Types of Consumables and Appropriate Consumption

Table A.16 Types of Consumables and Appropriate Consumption
Name Approximate Daily Consumption
ISE Buffer Solution Approx. 180 mL (in case of 200 serum samples/
day)
ISE MID Standard Solution Approx. 260 mL (in case of 200 serum samples/
day)
ISE Reference Solution Approx. 35 mL (in case of 200 serum samples/day)
ISE Cleaning Solution Approx. 1 mL (in case of 200 serum samples/day)
A-22 B71495AF
APPENDIX B
End-User License Agreement and Open Source
Software Notice
End-user License Agreement
Important
READ THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT:
THIS END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("Agreement") GOVERNS THE USE OF CERTAIN

COMPUTER PROGRAMS CONTAINED IN THE BECKMAN COULTER, INC. ("BCI") PRODUCT
PROVIDED BY BCI OR ON BEHALF OF BCI ("BCI Product"). ACCEPTANCE OF THE PRICE
QUOTE (BY SUBMISSION OF A PURCHASE ORDER OR OTHERWISE) FOR OR USE OF THE
BCI PRODUCT CONSTITUTES ASSENT AND ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT BY YOU
AND THE BUSINESS ENTITY ON WHOSE BEHALF THE BCI PRODUCT IS PROVIDED
(collectively "You" or "Your") AND SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. BCI'S ACCEPTANCE OF AN ORDER FOR
THE BCI PRODUCT IS CONDITIONAL UPON YOUR ASSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT TO THE EXCLUSION OF ALL OTHER TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH
ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, YOU DO NOT HAVE THE
RIGHT TO AND MAY NOT USE THE BCI PRODUCT OR THE COMPUTER PROGRAMS
CONTAINED IN THE BCI PRODUCT.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, BCI
grants to You a non-exclusive, non-sublicensable and non-transferable license ("
License ") to use the computer programs, including any updates or upgrades (in object
code form only) contained in the BCI Product ("Programs") and the associated user
documentation (" Documentation ")(together with the Programs referred to herein,
collectively, as the (" Software ")) only as incorporated within the BCI Product and only
in accordance with the Documentation. You have no right to receive, use or examine any
source code or design documentation relating to the Programs. The Software is licensed
and not sold. As between the parties, BCI and its licensors retains all right, title and
interest in and to the Software and any and all derivative works, except as expressly and
unambiguously licensed herein, and BCI reserves all rights in the Software not granted
to You. In order to use the Software, You may be required to input a registration number
or product authorization key and register Your copy of the Software with BCI to obtain
the necessary license key or license file. Except as otherwise expressly provided under
the Agreement, You shall only use the Software in connection with the use of BCI
Product provided to You from BCI or a third party on BCI's behalf and only for Your
internal business purposes.
2. RESTRICTIONS. Other than as expressly permitted under applicable law, You shall not
(and shall not allow others to): (i) copy the Software, except as reasonably required to
use the Programs strictly in accordance with this Agreement, (ii) alter, adapt, translate
or create derivative works based upon the Software, or include the Programs in any
other products or software, (iii) decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer or otherwise
attempt to discover or reconstruct the source code (or underlying ideas, sequence,
structure organization or algorithms) of any of the Programs, or attempt to do so,
except to the limited extent the foregoing is expressly permitted by applicable law, in
B71495AF B-1
End-User License Agreement and Open Source Software Notice
which case You must first notify BCI in writing and request interoperability information
regarding the Programs, (iv) provide, rent, loan or lease the Software to any other party
or provide any information services to any other party through the use of the Software,
whether in the form of a timesharing service, service bureau or other information
processing service, (v) remove, modify or obscure any product identification, copyright
notice, trademark, and/or any other proprietary legend contained in the Software, (vi)
disseminate performance information or analysis relating to the Programs (vii) use the
Programs in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance in which the
failure of the Programs could lead to death, personal injury or environmental damage,
or (viii) tamper with, bypass, circumvent, or alter the security features of the Program.
You hereby acknowledge and agree that the Program may stop working and become
unusable for tampering of the security management technology.
3. TERMINATION. The License is effective until terminated. You may terminate the
Agreement and the License at any time by destroying all copies of the Program. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice if You fail to
comply with any provision of this Agreement. Within fourteen (14) days following
termination, You shall cease all use of, and destroy, all copies of the Software in Your
possession or control and so certify to BCI in writing. Except for the License, the terms
of this Agreement shall survive termination. Termination is not an exclusive remedy
and all other remedies will be available to BCI whether or not the License is terminated.
4. PRODUCT SUPPORT. Please refer to the BCI support number provided in the
Documentation for the BCI Product for information regarding support of the BCI
Product.
5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND BCI
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT. BCI DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL BE ERROR-
FREE, THAT USE OF THE PROGRAMS WILL BE FREE FROM INTERRUPTION OR OTHER
FAILURES, THAT ANY ERRORS OR DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED
OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL SATISFY YOUR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS. YOU
ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT BCI DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE PERFORMANCE, USE OR RESULTS OF THE
USE OF THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING IDENTIFIED COMPONENTS) OR ITS
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. YOU
ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY IS AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS AGREEMENT. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS, SO THE FOREGOING DISCLAIMER MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THE
EVENT THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT ENFORCEABLE UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED TO NINETY (90)
DAYS FOLLOWING DELIVERY OF THE BCI PRODUCT.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE IN THIS
AGREEMENT, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, NEITHER BCI OR ITS
LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE WITH RESPECT TO ANY SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS
AGREEMENT UNDER ANY CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER
LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR LOSS OF OR INTERRUPTION TO BUSINESS; LOSS
OF PROFITS OR GOOD WILL; LOSS OF USE; LOSS OR DAMAGE TO OR CORRUPTION OF
DATA; DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR OTHER EQUIPMENT;
B-2 B71495AF
B
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO OR ALTERATIONS OF DATA; UNAUTHORIZED

DISCLOSURE OF SENSITIVE, CONFIDENTIAL OR PROPRIETARY INFORMATION; ANY
COSTS OF PROCURING SUBSTITUTE GOODS, SERVICES, TECHNOLOGY OR RIGHTS; ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES; OR
ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (US$250.00). THE
LIMITATIONS IN THIS SECTION 6 SHALL NOT LIMIT BCI'S LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
BODILY INJURY SOLELY RESULTING FORM BCI'S NEGLIGENCE, WILLFUL MISCONDUCT
OR FRAUDULENT MISREPRESENTATION.
7. U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS. The Software is a "commercial item" consisting of
"commercial computer software" and/or "commercial computer software
documentation" as such terms are defined in the Federal Acquisition Regulations
("FAR") section 2.101, and the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulations ("DFAR")
section 252.227-7014(a)(I) and DFAR section 252.227-7014(a)(5). Consistent with FAR
section 12.212 and DFAR section 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, any use of the
Software by or on behalf of an agency or other instrumentality of the U.S. Government
shall be governed solely by the terms of this Agreement and shall be prohibited except
to the extent expressly permitted by the terms of this Agreement. You will ensure that
each copy of the Software used by or for the U.S. Government is labeled to reflect the
foregoing.
8. EXPORT. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws,
including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be
subject to export or import regulations in other countries. You agree to comply strictly
with all such regulations and acknowledge that you have the responsibility to obtain
licenses to export, re-export, or import Software.
9. THIRD PARTY COMPONENTS; ADDITIONAL TERMS. The Software may contain or be
delivered with one or more components, which may include third-party components,
identified by BCI in the Documentation, readme.txt file, third-party click-accept or on
www.beckman.com/thirdpartysoftware (the "Identified Component(s)") as being
subject to different license agreement terms, disclaimers of warranties, limited
warranties or other terms and conditions (collectively, "Additional Terms") than those
set forth herein. You agree to the applicable Additional Terms for any such Identified
Component(s). Such Identified Components are the sole responsibility of the licensor of
that Identified Component. BCI is not responsible for any Identified Component,
whether or not BCI reviewed or modified such component.
10. CONFIDENTIALITY. The Software embodies logic, design, architecture, algorithms and
coding methodology which constitute valuable confidential information that is
proprietary to BCI and its licensors. You agree to safeguard the right to access the
Software using the same standard of care which You use for Your similar confidential
materials, but in no event less than reasonable care. You agree not to provide or to
otherwise make available in any form the Software, or any portion thereof, to any
person other than to Your employees or contractors with a need to know, without the
prior written consent of BCI.
11. MISCELLANEOUS. You may not assign this Agreement or any of Your rights hereunder
without BCI's prior written consent and any attempt to do so without such consent
shall be null and void. No failure to exercise any right hereunder will operate as a
waiver thereof. If any provision of this Agreement shall be adjudged by any court of
competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable or invalid, that provision shall be limited or
eliminated to the minimum extent necessary so that this Agreement shall otherwise
remain in full force and effect and enforceable. This Agreement shall be construed in
B71495AF B-3
Open Source Software Notice
accordance with the laws of the State of California and the United States without regard
to conflicts of laws provisions thereof and without regard to the United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. The sole and exclusive
jurisdiction and venue for any actions related to the subject matter hereof shall be the
state and U.S. federal courts located in the County of Orange, California. You irrevocably
submit to the jurisdiction of such courts and consent to venue in such forum with
respect to any action or proceeding that relates to this Agreement. The prevailing party
in any action to enforce this Agreement shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs
and expenses including reasonable attorneys' fees. No amendment to or modification of
this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized officer
of BCI. This Agreement is in the English language only, which language shall be
controlling and any revision of this Agreement in any other language shall not be
binding. Both parties agree that this Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement
of the mutual understanding of the parties relating to the subject matter of this
Agreement. BCI reserves the right at any time to modify this Agreement in its sole
discretion, without liability to You. This Agreement, as amended, will be effective upon
use of the BCI Products, or Software and effective for all existing users immediately
after posting of any amended terms on the BCI website.

This document is valid for open-source components used in the following BCI Product:
Please be informed that the Software contains the following third-party components:
Table B.1 Table 1
No. License Component Notes
1 Jam STAPL Jam STAPL Byte-Code Player, Version Copyright (C) Altera Corporation
Software 2.2, Module: jbicomp.c 1997-2001.
License
Jam STAPL Byte-Code Player, Version Copyright (C) Altera Corporation
2.2, Module: jbicomp.h 1997-2001.

2.2, Module: jbiexprt.h 1998-2001.

2.2, Module: jbijtag.c 1998-2001.

2.2, Module: jbijtag.h 1998-2001.

2.2, Module: jbimain.c 1998-2001.

2.2, Module: jbiport.h 2000-2001.

2.2, Module: jbistub.c 1997-2001.
B-4 B71495AF
B
License:
1) Jam STAPL Software License
SOFTWARE DISTRIBUTION AGREEMENT
THE JAM SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND EXECUTABLE FILES, AND RELATED SPECIFICATION
DOCUMENTATION ("PROGRAMS") (AVAILABLE FOR DOWNLOADING FROM THIS WEB
SITE OR ENCLOSED WITH THE COMPUTER DISK ACCOMPANYING THIS NOTICE), ARE
MADE FREELY AVAILABLE FOR USE BY ANYONE, SUBJECT TO CERTAIN TERMS AND
CONDITIONS SET FORTH BELOW. PLEASE READ THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR USING THE PROGRAMS. BY DOWNLOADING OR
USING THE PROGRAMS YOU INDICATE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS, WHICH CONSTITUTE THE LICENSE AGREEMENT (the "AGREEMENT")
BETWEEN YOU AND ALTERA CORPORATION ("ALTERA") WITH REGARD TO THE
PROGRAMS. IN THE EVENT THAT YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ANY OF THESE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS, DO NOT DOWNLOAD THE PROGRAMS OR PROMPTLY RETURN THE
PROGRAMS TO ALTERA UNUSED.
1. License Terms
Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Altera grants to you a
worldwide, nonexclusive, perpetual license (with the right to grant sublicenses, and
authorize sublicensees to sublicense further) to use, copy, prepare derivative works
based on, and distribute the Programs and derivative works thereof, provided that any
distribution or sublicense is subject to the same terms and conditions that you use for
distribution of your own comparable software products. Any copies of the Programs or
derivative works thereof will continue to be subject to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. You must include in any copies of the Programs or derivative works thereof
any trademark, copyright, and other proprietary rights notices included in the
Programs by Altera.
2. Disclaimer of Warranties and Remedies
NO WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE WITH RESPECT TO
THE PROGRAMS, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT, AND ALTERA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES NOT
STATED HEREIN. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, USE, AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAMS. SHOULD THE PROGRAMS PROVE DEFECTIVE
OR FAIL TO PERFORM PROPERLY, YOU -- AND NOT ALTERA -- SHALL ASSUME THE
ENTIRE COST AND RISK OF ANY REPAIR, SERVICE, CORRECTION, OR ANY OTHER
LIABILITY OR DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR OTHERWISE ASSOCIATED WITH THE
PROGRAMS. ALTERA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROGRAMS WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE PROGRAMS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. YOU ALSO ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE
SELECTION, INSTALLATION, USE, AND RESULTS OF USING THE PROGRAMS. Some
states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not
apply to you.
ALTERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
OR OTHERWISE ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
B71495AF B-5
PROGRAMS. IN ANY EVENT, ALTERA'S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL

NOT EXCEED THE LARGER OF EITHER THE AMOUNT YOU PAID ALTERA FOR USE
OF THE PROGRAMS, OR ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($100). YOUR SOLE REMEDIES
AND ALTERA'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARE AS SET FORTH ABOVE. Some states do not
allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
To the extent that the Programs are derived from third-party software or other third-
party materials, no such third-party provides any warranties with respect to the
Programs, assumes any liability regarding use of the Programs, or undertakes to furnish
you any support or information relating to the Programs.
3. General
You acknowledge that Altera is not responsible for and is not obligated to provide, any
support, including email and telephone support, for any purpose with respect to the
Programs.
You acknowledge that the Programs are made freely available in accordance with this
Agreement as part of an effort to promote broad use of the Programs with minimum
interference by you and Altera. Accordingly, you agree that, if you obtain any patents
relating to inventions or discoveries made through use of or access to the Programs or
derivative works thereof, or that are necessary for the use of the Programs, you will not
bring any claim for infringement thereof against Altera or any direct or indirect licensee
of Altera in connection with or use of the Programs or derivative works thereof. The
foregoing does not constitute a license of any copyright or trade secret.
You shall not export the Programs, or any product programmed by the Programs,
without first obtaining any necessary U.S. or other governmental licenses and
approvals.
This Agreement is entered into for the benefit of Altera and Altera's licensors and all
rights granted to you and all obligations owed to Altera shall be enforceable by Altera
and its licensors. This Agreement constitutes the entire understanding and agreement
applicable to the Programs, superseding any prior or contemporaneous understandings
or agreements. It may not be modified except in a writing executed by Altera.
This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California. You agree to
submit to the jurisdiction of the courts in the State of California for the resolution of any
dispute or claim arising out of or relating to this Agreement.
The prevailing party in any legal action or arbitration arising out of this Agreement
shall be entitled to reimbursement for its expenses, including court costs and
reasonable attorneys' fees, in addition to any other rights and remedies such party may
have.
BY USING THE PROGRAMS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS; YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE
STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ALTERA WHICH
SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND
ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AND ALTERA RELATING TO THE
SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.
4. U.S. Government Restricted Rights
B-6 B71495AF
B
The Programs and any accompanying documentation are provided with RESTRICTED
RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of Commercial
Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor/
manufacturer is Altera Corporation, 101 Innovation Drive, San Jose, CA 95134 and its
licensors.
B71495AF B-7
B-8 B71495AF
Glossary
ACAL (Auto Calibration) — The AB type Control Material — Material used to
(or ACAL) uses calibrator to calculate a confirm the performance characteristics
calibration factor automatically and of an in vitro diagnostic medical device.
create a calibration curve each time the
system calibrates. The calibration types Critical Limits — Operator-defined
are defined in parameters as AB (single boundaries of critical values. If the limit
point), AA, or 2AB-7AB (multi-point) for is exceeded, the system generates an
each test. audible alarm and a ph (high) or pl (low)
flag.
Alarm Tests — The number of tests that
can be performed using the remaining Cuvette — A glass vessel the system uses
reagent. The system generates a as the reaction vessel, containing the
Reagent Insufficient event when the sample and reagent.
remaining reagent volume decreases to Dead Volume (Reagent) — Reagent
the number of tests. volume that the reagent probe cannot
Advanced Calibration — The system can aspirate, and remains in the bottle. The
calibrate a maximum of 5 bottles or lot dead volume depends on the size of the
numbers of the same reagent before reagent bottle.
the system uses the reagent. Dead Volume (Sample) — Sample volume
Analytical Measuring Range — The range that the sample probe cannot aspirate,
the system can measure for a reagent. If and remains in the tube or cup. The
the range is exceeded, the system dead volume depends on the type of
generates an F (over) or G (under) flag. cup or tube.
Auto Power On — Allows the operator to Deciding Test — Generates an automatic

set a date and time when the system rerun order for the Related Test when
automatically powers on the analyzer. resulting in a rerun, fl, or fh flag. The
system also orders the Deciding Test
Calibration Curve — A curve calculated with a rerun flag, but does not order it
from the absorbance and concentration with an fh or fl flag. You can program a
of the calibrator. The system then maximum of 10 tests as Deciding Test.
calculates the analyte concentration for
a sample using the calibration curve. Deionized Water (DI Water) — Deionized
water, also known as demineralized
Calibration History — The system saves a water, is water that has had its mineral
maximum of 100 points of calibration ions removed, such as ions from
data per sample type per test. View sodium, calcium, iron, copper, and
calibration data and status in the anions such as chloride and bromide.
Calibration Monitor screen.
Disabling (a Test) — Prevents the system
Calibrator — Material with a known value from performing ordered tests during
that the system uses to establish the analysis. Use this function when the
measurement relationship. preceding calibration or QC has failed
for a test for samples that are loaded on
Consumable — Analyzer parts replaced the rack input area. Only tests for
by the operator if they are damaged or patient samples can be disabled
on a periodic basis to maintain (unavailable). Tests for reagent blank,
optimum performance of the analyzer. calibration, or QC cannot be disabled
Includes photometer lamps, probes, (unavailable).
and syringes.
B71495AF Glossary-1
Glossary
End Point Assay (END) — The three types Group of Tests — An operator-defined
of end point assays: group of tests that are selected in the
New Index dialog. The tests in the
• 1-point assay is a general end-point selected Group have reagents on board
assay that determines the optical
the analyzer and are available to
density of the reaction mixture
from the optical density perform analysis. You can program
measured at a specified three Groups in CONFIG. > Group of
photometric measuring point. Tests. For example, designate the tests
• 2-Point assay (self-blank method) frequently used for patient sample
provides sample blank analysis to Group 1, and the tests used
adjustment. The optical density for specific analysis to Group 2. Perform
values before dispensing reagent patient sample analysis under Group 1
are eliminated as the sample and switch to Group 2 for specific
blank. This optical density value analysis as required.
is then subtracted from the
values calculated after dispensing Index — A data file identified by date and
the second reagent. Any time, used to retrieve reagent blank,
contribution to the final reaction calibration, QC, and patient results.
optical density from the sample
(turbidity, icterus, and so on) is LAG_TIME Check — If a reaction is
removed to improve terminated too quickly, effective data at
measurement reliability. two points or more may not be
• Sample blank correction measures acquired. In this situation, the system
the blank item and then subtracts can be set up to calculate the analysis
the value from the measured result using the data in the lag phase.
optical density, to calculate the
Used for tests in the rate assay method.
optical density of the reaction.
This method requires an extra Refer to the individual method
blank. parameters to determine the correct
setting for the test.
END1 does not use the reagent blank
absorbance as the reference for LIH Testing - Serum Index — Evaluates
measurement data at each and performs test of lipemia (L), icterus
photometric point. (I), and hemolysis (H) in serum and
plasma. LIH is the symbol used for
testing lipemia (L), icterus (I), and
Fixed Point Assay (FIXED) — A method of
hemolysis (H).
calculation that determines the
difference between the optical densities Linearity — Ability of a measuring
at two specific time points within a method to generate results that are
reaction. FIXED1 does not use the proportional to the analyte
reagent blank absorbance as the concentration in a sample.
reference for measurement data at
each photometric point. MCAL (MB) — A type of calibration that
does not use any calibrator material. A
Flag — Symbols that display on analysis preset MB factor has been determined
results, indicating that a problem or an and is entered per the reagent setting
error has occurred during analysis. A sheet provided for this type of test.
result with a flag must be reviewed and
have corrective actions performed Optical Density (OD) — The
before reporting results. measurement of the amount of light
absorbed by a solution in the cuvette
with the use of a photometer. The
Glossary-2 B71495AF
higher the optical density the lower the tests. It also becomes the Y-intercept of
transmittance. calibration curves created by ACAL.
Photocal Measurement — Evaluates the Reagent — A combination of chemicals
integrity of the cuvettes used to obtain that react with the target analyte in the
accurate analysis results. Confirm the sample. The DxC 700 AU uses one (R1),
photocal data obtained from a photocal two (R1 and R2), or three reagents
measurement from MAINT. > Analyzer (R1-1, R1-2, and R2) per analyte.
Maintenance > Photocal Monitor. For
more information, refer to Perform a Reagent ID — The analyzer identifies
Photocal. reagents placed on board the analyzer
using the bar code label.
QC Monitor — The QC Monitor gives an
instant visual summary of QC analysis Reflex Testing — A function to generate a
results. rerun order automatically for the
Related Test by linking the Related Test
Quality Control (QC) Analysis — The to the Deciding Test. Reflex testing
process of analyzing samples with occurs when the Deciding Test has
known concentrations of analytes to resulted in a rerun, fl, or fh flag.
test the quality of reagents, calibrators,
analyzer, and procedures. Related Test — The system automatically
orders the test for rerun when the
Rate Assay (RATE) — Deciding Test has resulted in a rerun, fl,
or fh flag. A maximum of five tests can
• Normal rate assay measures the be programmed as Related Test in
variation in the rate of
combination with a Deciding Test.
absorbance per minute by
calculating the average change in Rerun — A process whereby the analyzer
absorbance between two tests the samples again, either manually
photometric points, using the
or automatically.
least squares method.
• Double rate assay determines the Sample Diluent — Solution the system
rate of absorbance variation per uses for a manual or automatic dilution
minute by calculating the average of samples.
of the absorbance variations
between two measuring points, Sample ID — An alphanumeric code
using the least squares method. assigned and used to identify each
The rate of absorbance before sample. The system reads the sample
dispensing reagent 2 is bar code label attached to the sample
subtracted from the value
cup to identify the sample ID .
calculated after dispensing the
second reagent. Sample Number (Sample No.) — A 4-digit
RATE1 does not use the reagent blank number the analyzer generates and
absorbance as the reference for uses to identify each sample. The
measurement data at each system displays a sample data prefix in
photometric point. front of the sample number indicating
the sample kind and type.
Reagent Blank (RB) — In the analysis, the Standard Deviation — Measurement of
reagent blank serves as the reference statistical dispersion. In multiple
value for the reagents at each measurements of the same sample, the
photometric point of individual analysis standard deviation measures how
spread out the values are.
B71495AF Glossary-3
Glossary
Test Order — An instruction to perform

tests on a sample. When a sample is
placed on the analyzer, the system uses
the test order information to link the
sample to the required tests.
Twin Plot — Determines whether the
analyzer causes a problematic variation
in QC or if the variation is a random
error. Perform QC analysis using two
control samples: normal and abnormal.
The twin plot function displays the first
control sample on the x-axis of a 2-
dimensional plot and the second
control sample on the y-axis.
W1 — A maintenance procedure that
automatically cleans cuvettes using the
wash nozzle component before and
after analysis in routine operation. For
more information, refer to Perform a
W1.
W2 — A maintenance procedure that
automatically cleans cuvettes, the
sample probe, reagent probes, and mix
bars using either sodium hypochlorite
solution (0.5%) or 1N hydrochloric acid.
After performing the W2, perform a
photocal. For more information, refer to
Perform a W2.
Glossary-4 B71495AF
www.beckmancoulter.com
© 2021 Beckman Coulter, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

B71495AF Instructions For Use DXC 700 AU

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

B71495AF Instructions For Use DXC 700 AU

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B71495AF Instructions For Use DXC 700 AU

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for Use

BECKMAN COULTER DxC 700 AU

For In Vitro Diagnostic Use

Find us on the World Wide Web at:

2 Training and Education Resources

3 How to Use the Software

6 IFU Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Screen Navigation and Software Overview:

IFU, Daily Startup

Rebooting the System:

Parts List for Analyzer Maintenance and ISE Maintenance:

Analyzer Maintenance and ISE Maintenance Schedules:

For Japan, ISE Addendum - Maintenance Schedule

Program a New Test:

This document was created to:

This document was created to:

This document was created to:

• Update Search for Results to View, Print, or Send to LIS section.

This document was created to add the following sentence

to the following sections:

Initial Issue, B71495AA, 12/2016

The customer is responsible for routine preventive maintenance procedures. Repairs

Telephone Service: International

Turn on the System, 2-1

CHAPTER 3: System Setup, 3-1

Monitor Results, 5-1

Add a Maintenance Procedure, 6-10

Replace Rack ID Labels, 6-93

bn: Mastercurve used, 7-19

Reagent Blank Issues and Corrective Actions, 8-2

Number Key Pad on Keyboard Does Not Work, 8-17

Alerts for Warning, Caution, Important, Note, and Tip

Important indicates important information to follow.

Note indicates notable information to follow.

Tip indicates information to consider.

Indicates conformity with the provisions of the applicable EU directives.

cNRTLus Certification Mark

This symbol indicates recognition by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)

Country of Origin Symbol

Moving Parts Symbol

Warning; Crushing of hands

This symbol indicates a warning of a closing motion of mechanical parts of equipment.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

Table 1 Symbols Glossary (Continued)

RoHS Environmental Symbol

Table 1 Symbols Glossary (Continued)

EU Directive 2002-96-EC: waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE)

For the Japan market:

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

This symbol indicates the on position.

To indicate connection to or disconnection from the mains.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

Table 1 Symbols Glossary (Continued)

To indicate the "ON" condition for a part of equipment.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information

This symbol can also indicate on or reset conditions.

To identify the control or the indicator to stop the active function.

Supplemental Product-Specific Manufacturer Information